iPF8400S Service Manual E-03

Service Manual
iPF8000 series
iPF8400S
Oct 27 2018
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When
changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need
arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition
of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2018 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer-
ence to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the
direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in
supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, how-
ever, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors
used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the
DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be com-
municated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be
able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Product Overview .......................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 Product Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 1- 1
1.2 Features .....................................................................................................................................................1- 3
1.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 3
1.2.2 Printhead ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 3
1.2.3 Ink Tank................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 3
1.2.4 Cutter Unit ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.2.5 Roll Holder............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 4
1.2.6 Stand ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 5
1.2.7 Media Take-up Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 1- 6
1.2.8 Hard Disk Drive ....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.2.9 Consumables........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.3 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 8
1.3.1 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 8
1.4 Detailed Specifications ...............................................................................................................................1- 9
1.4.1 Interface Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 9
1.5 Names and Functions of Components .....................................................................................................1- 10
1.5.1 Front ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 10
1.5.2 Rear....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)................................................................................................................................................. 1- 12
1.5.4 Carriage................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 13
1.5.5 Ink Tank Cover (Inside) ......................................................................................................................................... 1- 14
1.6 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................1- 15
1.6.1 Operation Panel..................................................................................................................................................... 1- 15
1.6.2 Display................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16
1.6.3 Main Menu............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 17
1.6.4 Basket Unit ............................................................................................................................................................ 1- 33
1.7 Safety and Precautions ............................................................................................................................1- 39
1.7.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 39
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 39
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 40
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts.......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 42
1.7.2 Other Precautions.................................................................................................................................................. 1- 43
1.7.2.1 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 43
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 44
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ............................................................................................................................................................... 1- 45
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer...................................................................................................................... 1- 47
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer ................................................................................................................................. 1- 47
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version .......................................................................................................................................... 1- 47
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ..................................................................................................................................... 1- 47
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly............................................................................................................................. 1- 47
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 47
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 48
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.1 Basic Operation Outline..............................................................................................................................2- 1
2.1.1 Printer Diagram ....................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 2- 2
2.1.3 Print Driving ............................................................................................................................................................. 2- 3
Contents
2.2 Firmware .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5

2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on............................................................................................................................2- 5
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off............................................................................................................................2- 6
2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function ..........................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.4 Head Management ..................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control ...............................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.6 Pause between Pages .............................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.7 White Raster Skip ....................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.8 Sleep Mode..............................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.2.9 Hard Disk Drive........................................................................................................................................................2- 7
2.3 Printer Mechanical System......................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.3.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................2- 9
2.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 9
2.3.2 Ink Passage ...........................................................................................................................................................2- 10
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 10
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 12
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit.......................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 14
2.3.2.4 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 17
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 18
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge........................................................................................................................................................... 2- 22
2.3.2.7 Air Flow .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 23
2.3.3 Paper Path .............................................................................................................................................................2- 24
2.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2- 24
2.3.3.2 Paper Path ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 25
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2- 26
2.4 Printer Electrical System .......................................................................................................................... 2- 27
2.4.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................2- 27
2.4.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 27
2.4.2 Main Controller.......................................................................................................................................................2- 29
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 29
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB...............................................................................................................................................2- 31
2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 31
2.4.4 Head Relay PCB....................................................................................................................................................2- 31
2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components................................................................................................................................................. 2- 31
2.4.5 Motor Driver ...........................................................................................................................................................2- 32
2.4.5.1 Media take-up PCB components ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 32
2.4.6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB ........................................................................................................................2- 32
2.4.6.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components...................................................................................................................... 2- 32
2.4.7 Power Supply.........................................................................................................................................................2- 32
2.4.7.1 Power supply block diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 2- 32
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................ 2- 33
2.5.1 Covers....................................................................................................................................................................2- 33
2.5.2 Ink passage system ...............................................................................................................................................2- 34
2.5.3 Carriage system.....................................................................................................................................................2- 36
2.5.4 Paper path system .................................................................................................................................................2- 38
2.5.5 Media take-up Unit.................................................................................................................................................2- 39
2.5.6 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................2- 39
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Transporting the Printer.............................................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.1.1 Transporting the Printer ...........................................................................................................................................3- 1
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer...........................................................................................................................................3- 14
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 14
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
Contents
4.1 Service Parts ..............................................................................................................................................4- 1

4.1.1 Service Parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly...........................................................................................................................4- 2
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly .......................................................................................4- 5
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled...................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually.................................................................................................................................. 4- 5
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................. 4- 5
4.3.4 External Covers ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 6
4.3.5 Drive Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 4- 14
4.3.6 Carriage Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 15
4.3.7 Ink Tube Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 4- 20
4.3.8 Feeder Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 4- 22
4.3.9 Purge Unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 23
4.3.10 Ink Tank Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 24
4.3.11 Linear Encoder .................................................................................................................................................... 4- 27
4.3.12 Head Management Sensor.................................................................................................................................. 4- 28
4.3.13 PCBs.................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 29
4.3.14 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit ............................................................................................................. 4- 30
4.3.15 Opening and closing ink supply valves................................................................................................................ 4- 31
4.3.16 Draining the ink.................................................................................................................................................... 4- 32
4.4 Applying the Grease .................................................................................................................................4- 33
4.4.1 Applying the Grease .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 33
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items ....................................................................................................................4- 36
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 36
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ............................................................................... 4- 36
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder ..................................................................... 4- 36
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor................................................................................... 4- 36
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .......................................................................................................................5- 1
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.2 Consumable Parts ......................................................................................................................................5- 1
5.2.1 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.3 Periodic Maintenance .................................................................................................................................5- 2
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 5- 2
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................................................6- 1
6.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement............................................................................................6- 2
6.2.1 Main controller PCB................................................................................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB................................................................................................................................................ 6- 12
6.2.3 Head relay PCB..................................................................................................................................................... 6- 21
6.3 Version Up ................................................................................................................................................6- 29
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................................................................... 6- 29
6.4 Service Tools ............................................................................................................................................6- 34
6.4.1 Tool List ................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 34
Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE

7.1 Service Mode..............................................................................................................................................7- 1
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation.......................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
Contents
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 2

7.1.3 Details of Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 11
7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote ....................................................................................................................7- 28
7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF................................................................................................................................................7- 38
7.2 Special Mode............................................................................................................................................ 7- 53
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ..................................................................................................................................7- 53
Chapter 8 ERROR CODE

8.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 8- 1
8.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................8- 1
8.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error ................................................................................................................ 8- 2
8.2.1 Code Table ..............................................................................................................................................................8- 2
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Contents
Contents
1.1 Product Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Product Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Features ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Features .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2 Printhead ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.3 Ink Tank................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.4 Cutter Unit ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.5 Roll Holder............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.6 Stand ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.7 Media Take-up Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.2.8 Hard Disk Drive ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.9 Consumables........................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 1-8
1.3.1 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 1-8
1.4 Detailed Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.1 Interface Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.5 Names and Functions of Components ..................................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.1 Front ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.2 Rear........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-11
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside).................................................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.5.4 Carriage.................................................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.5.5 Ink Tank Cover (Inside) .......................................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.6 Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................ 1-15
1.6.1 Operation Panel...................................................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.6.2 Display.................................................................................................................................................................... 1-16
1.6.3 Main Menu.............................................................................................................................................................. 1-17
1.6.4 Basket Unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-33
1.7 Safety and Precautions ............................................................................................................................ 1-39
1.7.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................. 1-39
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-39
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-40
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-42
1.7.2 Other Precautions................................................................................................................................................... 1-43
1.7.2.1 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-43
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank .................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-44
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-45
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer....................................................................................................................... 1-47
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer .................................................................................................................................. 1-47
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version ........................................................................................................................................... 1-47
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity ...................................................................................................................................... 1-47
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly.............................................................................................................................. 1-47
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-47
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery ............................................................................................................................................. 1-48
Chapter 1
1.1 Product Overview
1.1.1 Product Overview

0024-9412
This printer is a large-format printer that prints in a maximum width of 44 inches with high-speed photographic picture quality.
This printer is a stand-mounted type printer and is capable of output to either roll media or cut sheet.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[15]
[14]
[10]
[5]
[13]
[6] [11]
[12]
[7]
[9]
[8]
F-1-1
1-1
Chapter 1
[17] [16]
[18]
[19]
[21]
[20]
F-1-2
[1] Upper Cover [12] Stand

[2] Ink Tank Cover [13] Maintenance Cartridge Cover
[3] Ejection Slot [14] Maintenance Cartridge
[4] Ejection Guide [15] Operation Panel
[5] Output Stacker [16] Ethernet Port
[6] Roll Holder Slot [17] USB Port
[7] Holder Stopper [18] Accessory Pocket
[8] Roll Holder [19] Media Take-up Unit Power Inlet
[9] Paper Feed Slot [20] Power Supply Connector
[10] Ejection Support [21] Carrying Handles
[11] Release Lever
1-2
Chapter 1
1.2 Features
1.2.1 Features
0030-4812
- Media pass in widths up to 44 inches (1117.6 mm).

- Large ink tanks reduce the need for frequent ink replacement.
- Uninterrupted printing from subtanks.
- BK and MBK inks are loaded concurrently to eliminate the need for their replacement.
- A 8-color pigment ink system "LUCIA EX" is used to improve rubfastness, chromogenic effect, and bronzing resistance, ensuring higher-grade printing.
- A printing mode that improved control of the optimum ink droplet landing order (when in the mode for the highest image quality) and the ink droplet landing
accuracy ensure higher-grade printing.
- A printhead having nozzles (I-shaped nozzle) with a new shape reduces ink mist, ensuring superfine printing.
- The symmetrical order of the printhead's ink nozzle color reduces uneven print.
- The operation panel that equipped a 160 x 128-dot large LCD allows you to operate the printer intuitively.
- Media take-up unit (option) is supported.
- Media take-up unit (option) can be mounted concurrently with a basket.
- Durability will be added by maintenance kit.
- Barcodes printed on roll media makes measuring the remaining roll length more manageable.
- Borderless four-side printing support (roll media) reduces laborious cutting work, easing the job of creating posters to a significant degree.
- High-speed printing with a 1-inch head for each color (1280 nozzles), under bidirectional print control.
- The color calibration feature adds to the faithfulness of color reproduction.
- The network interface (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T) compatible with 1000Base-T (Gigabit Ethernet) comes standard with the printer to cope with the
high-speed LAN environment.
- Compatibility with e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote allows centralized management of customer's printer information.
- The hard disk is installed for better print job management.
Functional enhancements new to this model include:

- The processing ability of the printed data will enhance by increase of hard disk drive capacity.
- A newly multi sensor has been able to perform a high accurate color calibration.
1.2.2 Printhead
0013-2742
The printhead that mounts on the carriage is an integrated six-color disposable printhead.
It has 2,560 nozzles for each color, comprising two rows of 1,280 nozzles each arranged in a staggerd pattern.
If print quality does not improve despite carrying out the specified cleaning, the printhead must be replaced with a new one.
F-1-3
1.2.3 Ink Tank

0017-8112
The ink tanks are disposable.

The ink tanks come with 8-colors: mat black(MBK), black(BK), photo cyan(PC), cyan(C), photo magenta(PM), magenta(M), yellow(Y) and gray(GY). Each of
these inks are pigment ink.
The ink tanks are also available in two capacities: 330 ml and 700 ml.
Each tank is furnished with a notch for preventing incorrect installation, which will allow the tank to be installed only at the position marked in the right color.
An ink tank should be replaced when an ink tank replacement prompt message appears.
F-1-4
1-3
Chapter 1
1.2.4 Cutter Unit

0013-6369
The cutter unit that mounts on the carriage unit is disposable.

Replace the cutter unit when it gets dull.
F-1-5
1.2.5 Roll Holder

0020-5421
The roller holder accepts paper tubes having inside diameters of both 2 and 3 inches. It is furnished with attachments for 2- and 3-inch diameter paper tubes.
The roll holder clamps the paper tube of a roll not exceeding 150 mm in outside diameter from the inside.
F-1-6
[2-inch paper tube attachment]
F-1-7
[3-inch paper tube attachment 1]
F-1-8
[3-inch paper tube attachment 2]
F-1-9
1-4
Chapter 1
1.2.6 Stand
0017-8299
The stand is equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved.
[1]
[2]
ON
F-1-10
[1] Stand [2] Stopper
1-5
Chapter 1
1.2.7 Media Take-up Unit

0014-8824
Media take-up unit

The Media Take-up unit spools the 2 or 3 inch core, the roll media (17" to 44"), after it is printed by the host computer.
Take-up begins once the falling paper is detected by the Media take-up paper detection sensor, attached to the weight roller.
The roll media may also be manually spooled, using the button on the media take up unit.
The media take-up unit has an overload protection feature to prevent accidents while spooling rolls. (This feature will disable the motor automatically when an
overload occurs while spooling a roll.)
Additional features of the media take-up unit include:

- An adapter may be installed to support a 3-inch paper tube.
- Roll media can be unwound by feeding them backwards to visually check the images.
- Weight rollers varying in length to suit specific roll widths ensure added takeup efficiency.
- The printer detects errors in the media take-up unit as an independent function.
- Linked with the printer's sleep mode.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-1-11
[1] Left media take-up unit [4] Media take-up unit

[2] Rewind spool [5] 3-inch adapter
[3] Media take-up sensor
Weight
This weight consists of weight roll(7 pcs.)[1], weight flange(2 sets)[2] and weight joint[3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-1-12
1-6
Chapter 1
1.2.8 Hard Disk Drive

0017-8472
Each print job received from the host computer is saved to the hard disk drive(serial ATA connection) attached to the printer, so the printer can print the job repeat-
edly as needed, without having to wait for its retransmission from the host computer.
Saving print jobs will offer the following benefits:

- Eased computer workload
A print job may be automatically preserved to the hard disk when printing or may be preserved to the hard disk without printing. A print job preserved can be
printed in as many copies as needed without having to use the host computer.
- Reprinting after error occurrence

If the printer encounters errors, such as paper out, while printing a print job, it can resume the print operation as soon as the errors are cleared, without needing its
retransmission from the host computer.
- Higher print work efficiency

Print jobs can be printed selectively or in a specified number of copies without using a host computer. Multiple print jobs can be printed batched. Unattended print
operations in the nighttime are also possible.
1.2.9 Consumables
0026-6820
Printhead
The consumable printhead is the same as the one that comes with the printer.
F-1-13
Ink tanks
The consumable ink tanks contain 8 colors: mat black, black, photo cyan, cyan, photo magenta, magenta, yellow and gray. Each tank is available in two capacities:
330 ml and 700 ml.
F-1-14
Maintenance cartridge
The consumable maintenance cartridge (including the shaft cleaner) is the same as the one that comes with the printer.
F-1-15
1-7
Chapter 1
1.3 Product Specifications
1.3.1 Product Specifications

0030-4813
Type Bubble jet large-sized paper printer (stand model)

Feeding system Roll media: Manual (front loading)
Cut sheet: Paper tray (front loading)
Feeding capacity - Roll media
One roll
Outer diameter of roll: 150 mm or less
- Cut sheet
1 sheet
Delivery method Forward delivery, face up
Sheet delivery capability 1 sheet (using the outout stacker of the stand)
Cutter Automatic cross-cutter (round blade)
Type of media Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Plain Paper (High Grade),
Coated Paper, Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper,
Glossy Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Backlit Film, Backprint
Film, Flame-Resistant Cloth, Fine Art Photo, Fine Art Heavyweight
Photo, Fine Art Textured, Canvas Matte, Premium Coated Paper,
Graphic Canvas, Durable Backlit Film, Durable Banner, Matt Coated
Paper, Extra Matt Coated Paper, Opaque Paper, Hi Res Graphic Paper,
Prem Art Paper Embossed, Prem Art Paper Smooth, Hi Res Barrier
Paper, Scrim Banner, Uni Opaque Backlit Film, Roll-Up Film, Water
Res Art Canvas, Adhesive Matt Vinyl Stretch
Supported thickness 0.07mm to 0.8mm
Media size (Roll media) Width: 254mm (10") to 1118mm (44")
Length: 203mm (8") to 18m (709")
* Outer diameter of roll :150mm or less
* The maximum amount of length may vary by the using operating
system or the applications.
Media size (Cut sheet) Width: 203mm (8") to 1118mm (44")

Length: 203mm (8") to 1600mm (63")
Printable area (Roll media) Internal area, excluding a 5-mm top, bottom and left and right margins.
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.
Printable area (Cut sheet) Internal area, excluding a 5-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin and
5-mm left and right margins.
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media used.
Printing recommendation area Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 5-mm bottom margin and
(Roll media) 5-mm left and right margins.
Printing recommendation area Internal area, excluding a 20-mm top margin, a 23-mm bottom margin
(Cut sheet) and 5-mm left and right margins.
Borderless printing * Roll media only
width: 254mm(10"), 355.6mm(14"), 431.8mm(17"), 515mm(B2/B3),
594mm(A1/A2), 609.6mm(24"), 841mm(A0/A1), 914.4mm(36"),
1030mm(B0/B1), 1066.8mm(42"), 1117.6mm(44")
Memory 384MB
Increase of memory: none
Hard disk drive 250GB (2.5inch, 5400rpm, S-ATA I/F)
Firmware Flash ROM (update from USB or Ethernet)
- Printer description language
GARO (Graphic Arts language with Raster Operation)
Emulation None
Interface USB 2.0 Hi-speed
Network (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
Operation panel LCD (160 X 128 dots), 13 keys, 5 LEDs
- Panel language
English
- Message language
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, Korean, Russianand
and Japanese
Printhead/Ink Tank type Printhead and separate ink tanks
Printhead [PF-05]
Structure: Integrated six-color assembly
- Number of nozzles C, PC, PM, GY: 2,560 for each color X2
- Number of nozzles BK, MBK, M, Y: 2,560 for each color
Ink tank [PFI-306/8306] BK/MBK/C/M/Y/PC/PM/GY
[PFI-706/8706] BK/MBK/C/M/Y/PC/PM/GY
Ink type: Pigment ink
Ink tank capacity: [PFI-306/8306] 330 ml, [PFI-706/8706] 700 ml
Detection functions (Cover Cover open/closed detection: Yes
system) Left and right ink tank cover open/closed detection: Yes
1-8
Chapter 1
Detection functions (Ink passage Ink tank presence/absence detection: Yes

system) Remaining ink level detection: Yes
Maintenance cartridge presence/absence detection: Yes
Used ink tank full detection: Yes
Detection functions (Carriage Printhead presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Carriage position detection: Yes
Carriage home position detection: Yes
Carriage cover open/closed detection: Yes
Carriage temperature detection: Yes
Printhead height detection: Yes
Non-discharging nozzle detection: Yes
Non-discharging nozzle backup feature: Yes
Detection functions (Paper path Paper presence/absence detection: Yes
system) Paper width detection: Yes
Skew detection: Yes
Paper release lever position detection: Yes
Remaining roll media detection: Yes
Feed roller rotation detection: Yes
Operating noise Operating: Approx. 50dB (A) or less
Standby: Approx. 35dB (A) or less
Operating environment Temperature: 15 to 35 degrees centigrade
Humidity: 10% to 90%RH
Print quality guaranteed Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade
environment Humidity: 10% to 80%RH
Power supply 100-240 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption (Maximum) During printing: Max. 190W
Power consumption In power save (sleep) mode:
100-120 VAC : 5W or less
220-240 VAC : 6W or less
During standby: 0.5W or less
Printer unit dimensions 1893mm x 975mm x 1144mm (with stand and output stacker)
(WxDxH)
Weight Approx. 143 kg (with stand and output stacker)
1.4 Detailed Specifications
1.4.1 Interface Specifications

0023-2577
a. USB (standard)
(1) Interface type
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed (Full speed (12 Mbits/sec), High speed (480 Mbits/sec))
(2) Data transfer system
Control transfer
Bulk transfer
(3) Signal level
Compliant with the USB standard.
(4) Interface cable
Twisted-pair shielded cable, 5.0 m max.
Compliant with the USB standard.
Wire materials: AWG No.28, data wire pair (AWF: American Wire Gauge)
AWG No.20 to No.28, power distribution wire pair
(5) Interface connector
Printer side: Series B receptacle compliant with USB standard
Cable side: Series B plug compliant with USB standard
b. Network (standard)
(1) Interface type
Interface compliant with IEEE802.3
(2) Data transfer system
IEEE802.0 10Base-T, IEEE802.3u 100Base-TX/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE802.3ab 1000Base-T/Auto-Negotiation, IEEE802.3x Full Duplex
(3) Interface cable
Category 5 (UTP or FTP) cable, 100 m or shorter
Compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B
(4) Interface connector
Printer side: Compliant with IEEE802.3, ANSI X3.263, ISO/IEC60603-7
(5) Protocol
IPX/SPX (Netware4.2(J), 5.1(J), 6.0(J)), SNMP, TCP/IP(IPv4/IPv6), AppleTalk, HTTP
1-9
Chapter 1
1.5 Names and Functions of Components
1.5.1 Front
0024-9417
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[15]
[14]
[10]
[5]
[13]
[6] [11]
[12]
[7]
[9]
[8]
F-1-16
[1] Top Cover
Open this cover to install the Printhead, load paper, and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer as needed.
[2] Ink Tank Cover
Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank.
[3] Ejection Slot
All printed matter is ejected from this port.
[4] Ejection Guide
Guides printed documents as they are ejected. Open this guide when loading a roll.
[5] Output Stacker
A cloth tray that catches ejected documents.
[6] Roll Holder Slot
Slide the Roll Holder into this slot.
[7] Holder Stopper
Secure the roll on the Roll Holder with this part.
[8] Roll Holder
Load the roll on this holder.
[9] Paper Feed Slot
When loading a roll, insert the edge of the roll paper here.
[10] Ejection Support
Prevents printed documents from winding around the Roll Holder or Paper Feed Slot.
[11] Release Lever
Releases the Paper Retainer. Lift this lever toward the front of the printer when loading paper.
[12] Stand
A stand that holds the printer. Equipped with casters to facilitate moving the printer.
[13] Maintenance Cartridge Cover
Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
[14] Maintenance Cartridge
Ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning is absorbed. (Replace the cartridge when it is full.)
[15] Operation Panel
Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status.
1-10
Chapter 1
1.5.2 Rear
0024-9418
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
F-1-17
[1] Ethernet Port
Connect an Ethernet cable to this port. The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly and communication is possible between the computer
and printer.
[2] USB Port
Connect a USB cable to this port. This port is compatible with USB 2.0 Hi-Speed mode.
[3] Accessory Pocket
Holds printer manuals, assembly tools, and other items.
[4] Media Take-up Unit Power Inlet
Connect the power cord of the Media Take-up Unit here.
[5] Power Supply Connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
[6] Carrying handles
When carrying the printer, have six people hold it by these handles under both sides.
1-11
Chapter 1
1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)

0024-9419
[9]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[6]
[4] [3]
[5]
[10]
F-1-18
[1] Top Cover Roller
Prevents paper from rising when ejected.
[2] Carriage
Moves the Printhead. The carriage serves a key role in printing.
[3] Borderless Printing Ink Grooves
These grooves catch ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.
[4] Fixed Blade
The Cutter Unit passes through this blade to cut paper.
[5]Platen
The Printhead moves across the platen to print. The Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.
[6] Pinch Roller
Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.
[7] Carriage Shaft
The Carriage slides along this shaft.
[8] Paper Alignment Line
Align paper with this line when loading it.
[9] Cleaning Brush
When cleaning inside of the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen.
[10] Switch
Set the switch to the side opposite of the circle mark if the edges of printed images are blurred. Set the switch to the circle mark side before borderless
printing.
1-12
Chapter 1
1.5.4 Carriage
0024-9420
[7]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[4]
[5]
F-1-19
[1] Printhead Fixer Cover
Holds the Printhead in place.
[2] Printhead
Equipped with ink nozzles. Printheads serve a key role in printing.
[3] Carriage Cover
Protects the Carriage.
[4] Cutter Unit
A round-bladed cutter for automatic paper cutting. The cutter blade is retracted inside when not cutting.
[5] Printhead Fixer Lever
Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover.
[6] Shaft Cleaner
Prevents the Carriage Shaft from becoming dirty.
[7] Cutter Unit Detachment Lever
Used when replacing the Cutter Unit.
1-13
Chapter 1
1.5.5 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

0026-6822
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
<Left> <Right>
F-1-20
[1] Ink Tank
Cartridges of ink in each color.
[2] Ink Tank Lock Lever
A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Lift and press down the lever when replacing an Ink Tank. To open it, lift the stopper of the
lever until it stops, and then push it down toward the front. To close it, push it down until it clicks into place.
[3] [4]
F-1-21
[3] Ink Lamp (Red)
Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.
- On: The Ink Tank is installed correctly.
- Off: No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function is off.
- Flashing slowly: Not much ink is left.
- Flashing rapidly: Ink tank is empty.
[4] Ink Color Label
Load an Ink Tank that matches the color and name on this label.
1-14
Chapter 1
1.6 Basic Operation
1.6.1 Operation Panel

0024-9421
This section explains the functions of the buttons and the meanings of the LEDs on the operation panel.
[15] [1] [14] [8] [5] [2] [3]

[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[7] [6] [4]

F-1-22
[1] Display
Printer menus, statuses, and messages are shown on this display.
[2] [Power] button
Use this button to turn on or off the printer.
When the printer is powered or in the sleep mode, the [Power] button lamp stays lit.
[3] [Stop] button
Use this button to stop execution of a job or drying ink.
[4] [Navi] button
Use this key to confirm the procedures for loading/unloading media, replacing an ink tank, and replacing the printhead.
[5] Direction buttons
- button: Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] moves the tab. When a menu requiring you to enter a value is selected, pressing this button allows
you to move to the left-hand digit.
- button: Pressing this button in a menu displays the upper item or setting value.
- button: Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] moves the tab. When a menu requiring you to enter a value is selected, pressing this button allows
you to move to the right-hand digit.
- button: Pressing this button in a menu displays the lower item or setting value.
[6] [OK] button
Pressing this button on the [tab selection screen] displays the menu for the displayed tab.
In the menu for a tab, pressing this button at the item preceded by [+] allows you to move to the bottom layer of menu items, where you can execute a menu item
or set values. Also press this button when a message asking you to press the [OK] button is shown on the display.
[7] [Back] button
Pressing this button displays the preceding screen.
[8] [Menu] button
Pressing this button displays the [tab selection screen] screen.
[9] [Media Cut] button
When roll media is loaded, pressing this button cuts the media.
[10] [Media Feed] button
When roll media is loaded, pressing this button allows you to change the media position.
[11] [Media Change] button
Press this button when loading/replacing media.
[12] [Cut Sheet] lamp (green)
This lamp stays lit when cut sheet is selected as a media type.
[13] [Roll Media] lamp (green)
This lamp stays lit when roll media is selected as a media type.
[14] Message lamp (orange)
- Stays lit: A warning message is being displayed.
- Blinking: An error message is being displayed.
- Not lit: The printer is normal or not powered.
[15] Data reception lamp (green)
- Blinking: When the printer is making prints, this lamp indicates that a print job is being received or processed. When the printer is not making prints, this lamp
indicates that the print job is suspended or the firmware data is being received.
- Not lit: This lamp indicates that there is no print job.
MEMO:
When the printer is in the sleep mode, pressing any button other than the [Power] button wakes up the printer.
1-15
Chapter 1
1.6.2 Display
0023-1271
When the printer starts, the [tab selection screen] appears on the display.
There are four types of tabs on which the relevant printer status, menu, and error information are displayed.
The tab appears as the icon to the top field of display. The tab moves by key or key.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[A]
[B]
[C]
F-1-23
[1] Media tab
This tab shows the printer status and menu related to media. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Media] menu.
-[A] Top field of display: Shows the media icon in reverse video.
-[B] Middle field of display: Shows the printer status and a menu name.
-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the media type in the first row and the media size in the second row.
[2] Ink tab

This tab shows the printer status and menu related to ink. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Ink] menu.
-[A] Top field of display: Shows the ink icon in reverse video.
-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the remaining ink levels of the ink tanks loaded in the printer.
[3] Job tab

This tab shows the printer status and menu related to the print job. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Job] menu.
-[A] Top field of display: Shows the job icon in reverse video.
[4] Setup/Adjustment tab
This tab shows the printer status and menu related to setup/adjustment. When this tab is shown in reverse video, pressing the [OK] button displays the [Setup/
Adjustment] menu.
-[A] Top field of display: Shows the setup/adjustment icon in reverse video.
-[C] Bottom field of display: Shows the remaining ink level of the maintenance cartridge.
1-16
Chapter 1
1.6.3 Main Menu

0028-6325
The printer has a Main menu which includes a menu related to maintenance such as adjustment of ink ejection position of each nozzle and head cleaning, a menu
related to printing settings such as auto cutting and ink drying time, and a menu related to parameters such as a message language.
1. Menu Operation
a) Displaying menu on each tab
Press the key or key on the [Tab Selection] screen to select a tab, and press the [OK] key.
A menu associated with each tab is displayed.
Press the key or key to select a menu and press the [OK] key.
The menu is selected and menu items are displayed.
Select a menu with [+] on the left side and press the [OK] key to navigate to lower level menus.
b) Setting menu items

Press the key or key to select an item to set and press the [OK] key.
The item is checked on the left side check box to confirm that it is set.
After 2 seconds, the menu that is one level above is displayed.
c) Setting numeric value for a menu item
Proceed as follows to set a numeric value for an item such as network settings.
1. Press the key or key to move the underscore to the field you want to enter a numeric value.
2. Press the key or key to enter a numeric value.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 and press the [OK] key when finished.
1-17
Chapter 1
2. Main Menu
The structure and settings of the main menu is as follows. The asterisk mark "*" is default setting.
[Paper Menu]
T-1-1
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
[Load Paper] [Roll Paper]
[Cut Sheet]
[Eject Paper]
[Chg. Paper Type] [Roll Paper] (The paper type is displayed
here.)
[Cut Sheet] (The paper type is displayed
here.)
[Chg. Paper Size] [Sheet Size]*2 (The paper type is displayed
here.)
[CustomPaperSize] (Set the paper length and
width.)
[Roll Length]*1 (Set the paper length.)
[Roll Width]*2 (Set the paper width.)
[ManageRemainRoll] [Off]*
[On]
[Paper Details] (The paper type is displayed [Head Height] [Automatic]*
here.) [Highest]
[High]
[Standard]
[Low]
[Lowest]
[Super Low]
[Skew Check Lv.] [Standard]*
[Loose]
[Off]
[Cutting Mode] [Automatic]
[Eject]
[Manual]
[Cut Speed] [Fast]
[Standard]
[Slow]
[Trim Edge First] [Automatic]
[Off]
[On (Preset Len)]
[On(Input Length)]
[Manual]
[CutDustReduct.] [Off]
[On]
[VacuumStrngth] [Automatic]*
[Strongest]
[Strong]
[Standard]
[Weak]
[Weakest]
[Roll Tension] [High]
[Standard]
1-18
Chapter 1
T-1-2
[Paper Details] (The paper type is displayed [Scan Wait Time] [Dry time] [Off]
here.) [1 sec.]
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[9 sec.]
[Area]*18 [Entire area]*
[Leading edge]
[Roll DryingTime] [Off]
[30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[3 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
[NearEnd RollMrgn] [5mm]
[20mm]
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] [5mm]
[20mm]
[Bordless Oversize] [Standard]*
[Little]
[Width Detection] [Off]
[On]*
[Return Defaults]
[Paper Details]
[Keep Paper Type] [Off]*
[On]
1-19
Chapter 1
[Ink Menu]
T-1-3
[Rep. Ink Tank]
[Head Cleaning A]
[Job Menu]
T-1-4
[Print Job] [Job List] (Select Print Job.) [Delete]
[Preempt Jobs]*11
[Stored Job] [Mailbox List] (Enter a password if one has [Job List] [Print]
been set.) [Delete]
[Print Job List]
[Job Log] (Choose from information [Document Name]
about the latest three print [User Name]
jobs.)
[Page Count]
[Job Status] [OK]
[CANCELED]
[Print Start Time] [yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss]
[Print End Time] [yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss]
[Print Time] [xxxsec.]
[Output Img. Size] [xxxxxxxxsq.mm]
[Media Type]
[Paper Consumed]
[Paper Length]
[Paper Width]
[Interface] [USB]
[Network]
[HDD]
[Ink Consumed] [Tot.Ink Consumed] xxx.xxx ml
(The ink color is displayed xxx.xxx ml
here.)
[Print Settings]
[Head Height]
[Temp./Humidity]
[Adjustment reg.]
[Print Job Log]
[Pause Print] [Off]*
[On]
[HDD Information] [Total capacity
Box free space]
1-20
Chapter 1
[Set./Adj. Menu]
T-1-5
[Test Print] [Nozzle Check]
[Status Print]
[Interface Print]
[Paper Details]
[Print Job Log]
[Menu Map]
[Adjust Printer] [Head Posi. Adj.] [Standard]
[Simple]
[Other] [Initial adjustmt]
[Manual]
[Feed Priority] [Adj. Priority]*6 [Automatic]*
[Print Quality]
[Print Length]
[Adj. Quality]*4*6 [Auto(GenuinePpr)]
[Auto(OtherPaper)]
[Manual]
[Adjust Length]*5*6 [AdjustmentPrint] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
[Change Settings] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
[Calibration] [Auto Adjust]
[Calibration Log] [Date]
[Paper Type]
[Adjustment Type]
[Use Adj. Value] [Disable]
[Enable]*
[Set Exec. Guide] [Off]*
[On]
[Return Defaults]
[Maintenance] [Head Cleaning] [Head Cleaning A]
[Head Cleaning B]
[Nozzle Check]
[Replace P.head] [Printhead L]
[Printhead R]
[L & R Printheads]
[Repl. maint cart]
[Repl. S. Cleaner]
[Change Cutter]
[Interface Setup] [EOP Timer]*12 [10 sec.]
[30 sec.]
[1 min.]
[2 min.]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]*
[30 min.]
[60 min.]
1-21
Chapter 1
T-1-6
Seventh
First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level
Level
[Interface Setup] [TCP/IP]*12 [IPv4] [IPv4 Mode] [Automatic]
[Manual]*
[Protocol]*7 [DHCP] [On]
[Off]*
[BOOTP] [On]
[Off]*
[RARP] [On]
[Off]*
[IPv4 Settings]*13 [IP Address] xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
[Subnet Mask] xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
[Default G/W] xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
[DNS Settings]*13 [DNS Dync update] [On]
[Off]*
[Pri. DNS SrvAddr]
[Sec. DNS SrvAddr]
[DNS Host Name]
[DNS Domain Name]
[IPv6] [IPv6 Support] [On]
[Off]*
[IPv6 StlessAddrs]*9 [On]*
[Off]
[DHCPv6]*9 [On]
[Off]*
[DNS Settings]*9*13 [DNS Dync update] [Statefull Addr] [On]
[Off]*
[Stateless Addr] [On]
[Off]*
[Pri. DNS SrvAddr]
[Sec. DNS SrvAddr]
[DNS Host Name]
[DNS Domain Name]
[NetWare]*12 [NetWare] [On]
[Off]*
[Frame Type]*8 [Auto Detect]
[Ethernet 2]
[Ethernet 802.2]*
[Ethernet 802.3]
[Ethernet SNAP]
[Print Service]*8 [BinderyPServer]
[RPrinter]
[NDSPServer]
[NPrinter]
1-22
Chapter 1
T-1-7
[Interface Setup] [AppleTalk]*12 [On]
[Off]*
[Ethernet Driver]*12 [Auto Detect] [On]*
[Off]
[Comm.Mode]*10 [Half Duplex]*
[Full Duplex]
[Ethernet Type]*10 [10Base-T]*
[100Base-TX]
[1000Base-T]
[Spanning Tree] [Not Use]*
[Use]
[MAC Address] xxxxxxxxxxxx
[Interface Print]*12
[Return Defaults]*12
[System Setup] [Sleep Timer]*19 [5 min.]*
[10 min.]
[15 min.]
[20 min.]
[30 min.]
[40 min.]
[50 min.]
[60 min.]
[210 min.]
[Shut Down Timer] [off]
[5 min.]
[10 min.]
[30 min.]
[1 hour]
[4 hours]
[8 hours]
[12 hours]
[Buzzer] [Off]
[On]*
[Contrast Adj.] -4,-3,-2,-1,0*,+1,+2,+3,+4
[Date & Time]*12 [Date] [yyyy/mm/dd]*14
[Time] [hh:mm]
[Date Format]*12 [yyyy/mm/dd]*
[dd/mm/yyyy]
[mm/dd/yyyy]
[Language] [English]
[Japanese]
[Francais]
[Italiano]
[Deutsch]
[Espanol]
[Russian]
[Chinese] (simplified)
[Korean]
1-23
Chapter 1
T-1-8
[System Setup] [Time Zone]*12 [0:London(GMT)]
[+1:Paris,Rome]
[+2:Athens,Cairo]
[+3:Moscow]
[+4:Eerevan,Baku]
[+5:Islamabad]
[+6:Dacca]
[+7:Bangkok]
[+8:Hong Kong]
[+9:Tokyo,Seoul]
[+10:Canberra]
[+11NewCaledonia]
[+12:Wellington]
[-12:Eniwetok]
[-11:Midway is.]
[-10Hawaii(AHST)]
[-9:Alaska(AKST)]
[-8:Oregon (PST)]
[-7:Arizona(MST)]
[-6:Texas(CST)]
[-5:NewYork(EST)]
[-4:Santiago]
[-3:Buenos Aires]
[-2:]
[-1:Cape Verde]
[Length Unit] [meter]*
[feet/inch]
[Detect Mismatch] [Pause]
[Warning]
[None]*
[Hold Job]*2
[Paper Size Basis] [Sht Selection 1] [ISO A3+]*
[13"X19" (Super B)]
[Sht Selection 2] [ISO B1]*
[28"X40" (ANSI F)]
[Keep Paper Size] [Off]*
[On]
[Rep.P.head Print] [Off]
[On]*
1-24
Chapter 1
T-1-9
[System Setup] [Nozzle Check] [Frequency] [Standard]*
[1 page]
[10 pages]
[Off]
[Warning] [Off]*
[On]
[CarriageScanWidth] [Automatic]*
[Fixed]
[Use RemoteUI]*12 [On]*
[Off]
[Reset PaprSetngs]*12
[Erase HDD Data]*12 [High Speed]
[Secure High Spd.]
[Secure]
[Output Method] [Print]*
[Print (Auto Del)]
[Save: Box XX]
[Print After Recv] [Off]*
[On]
[Common Box Set.]*12 [Print]
[Print (Auto Del)]*
[Show Job Log] [Off]
[On]*
[Take-up Reel] [Use Take-up Reel] [Disable]*
[Enable]
[Auto Feed]*16
[Skip Take-up Err]*17 [Off]*
[On]
[Prep.MovePrinter] [Level 1]
[Level 2]
[Level 3]
[Admin. Menu]*12 [Change Password]*13 (The screen for setting the
password is displayed)
[Init.Admin.Pswd]*13
[Printer Info] [Paper Info]
[Ink Info]
[Head Info]
[System Info]
[Error Log]
[Other Counter]
*1: Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On.

*2: Available only if Width Detection is set to Off.
*3: Available after Auto(Advanced) in Head Posi. Adj. has been used once.
*4: Available when you have specified Feed Priority > Adj. Priority > Automatic or Print Quality.
*5: Available when you have specified Feed Priority > Adj. Priority > Automatic or Print Length.
*6: Displayed if a sheet is loaded in the printer.
*7: Not shown if you have set IPv4 Mode to Manual.
*8: Not shown if you have set NetWare to Off.
*9: Not displayed if IPv6 Support is Off.
*10: Not shown if you have set Auto Detect to On.
*11: Print Anyway is displayed when a job being held is selected.
*12: Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators, and only viewing for other users.
*13: Viewing and configuration is possible for administrators only.
*14: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*15: Displayed only when the Media Take-up Unit is attached.
*16: Available if: Use Take-up Reel is Enable, roll paper is loaded, and you have not executed Auto Feed for the loaded roll.
*17: Available when Use Take-up Reel is Enable.
*18: Leading edge is not available as a setting option in the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box of the printer driver.
*19: Default setting for the time to enter the power save mode/sleep mode is recommended.
1-25
Chapter 1
3. Main menu during printing

The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.
T-1-10
[Adj. Fine Feed]
[Printer Info] [Paper Info]
[Ink Info]
[Head Info]
[System Info]
[Error Log]
[Other Counter]
1-26
Chapter 1
4. Main Menu Settings

Main menu items are described in the following tables.
[Paper Menu]
T-1-11
Setting Item Description/Instructions

[Load Paper] Select either roll paper or cut sheet.
[Eject Paper] Choose this item before removing loaded paper.
[Chg. Paper Type] Change currently set paper type.
[Chg. Paper Size] Change currently set paper size.
[ManageRemainRoll] Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed barcode can
be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. ChooseOff if you prefer not to print the
barcode.
[Paper Details] [Head Height] Adjust the Printhead height.
(The paper type is displayed [Skew Check Lv.] If you print on the paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection
here.) threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when
detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
[Cutting Mode] Select whether to use standard round blade cutter or not.
Select [Automatic] to cut paper after printing. Select [Manual] to print a line at the cut position
after printing without cutting. Select [Eject] to prevent the printout from dropping until the ink
dries after printing.
[Cut Speed] Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing Slow helps prevent adhesive
from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp.
[Trim Edge First] If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
[CutDustReduct.] Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting film and similar media by
printing a line at the cut position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after
cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp if
you use adhesive paper.
[VacuumStrngth] Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen.
[Roll Tension] Choose the back tension of the roll media.
[Scan Wait Time] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in bidirectional printing, in
consideration of how quickly the ink dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a
wait time.
[Roll DryingTime] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
[NearEnd RollMrgn] Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better printing quality
at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 5mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect
feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better printing quality at the leading
edge.
Note that if you choose 5mm, it may lower the printing quality at the leading edge and affect
feeding accuracy. The printed surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge.
[Bordless Oversize] Choose the margin during borderless printing.
[Width Detection] Make this setting when the print size is different from the media size, for example, when you
want to make a print within a frame.
When you select [OFF], the paper width is not detected.
[Return Defaults] Choose OK to restore Paper Details to the factory default values.
[Print Paper Detail] Print the paper settings set with [Paper Details].
[Keep Paper Type] Select [On] to continue using the same type of paper.
1-27
Chapter 1
[Ink Menu]
T-1-12

[Rep. Ink Tank] When replacing the Ink Tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Head Cleaning A] Specify Printhead cleaning options.
Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.
[Job Menu]
T-1-13

[Print Job] [Job List] (Select Print [Delete] Delete the current job or queued jobs.
Job.) [Preempt Jobs] Print the job first after the current print job is finished printing.
[Stored Job] [Mailbox List] (Enter a [Job List]- Prints a saved job.
password if [Print]
one has been [Job List]- Deletes a saved job.
set.) [Delete]
[Print Job List] Prints a list of saved jobs.
[Job Log] (Choose from [Document Name] Indicates the document name of the selected print job.
information [User Name] Indicates the name of the user who sent the print job.
about the latest
three print [Page Count] Indicates the number of pages in the job.
jobs.) [Job Status] Indicates the printing results.
[Print Start Time] Indicates when the print job was started.
[Print End Time] Indicates when the print job was finished.
[Print Time] Indicates the time required to print the job.
[Output Img. Size] Indicates the image size in the print job.
[Media Type] Indicates the type of paper in the print job.
[Paper Consumed] Indicates the consumption of paper.
[Paper Length] Indicates the length of paper.
[Paper Width] Indicates the width of paper.
[Interface] Indicates the interface used for the print job.
[Ink Consumed] Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per job.
[Print Settings] A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates the job print settings.
[Head Height] A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates the head height when jobs were printed.
[Temp./Humidity] A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates the temperature and humidity when jobs were
printed.
[Adjustment reg.] A counter for maintenance purposes. Indicates the adjustment conditions applied to jobs.
[Print Job Log] Print the print job information such as paper type, size, and ink consumption. Ink consumption
is the approximate amount of ink used to print one sheet.
[Pause Print] Select [On] to stop printing.
[HDD Information] Indicates the total hard disk capacity and the mail box free space.
1-28
Chapter 1
[Set./Adj. Menu]
T-1-14

[Test Print] [Nozzle Check] Print a nozzle check pattern.
[Status Print] Print the printer information.
[Interface Print] Print the interface settings.
[Paper Details] Prints the paper settings set with [Paper Details].
[Print Job Log] Print print job information such as paper type, size, and ink consumption. Ink consumption is
the approximate amount of ink used to print one sheet.
[Menu Map] Print the menu list.
[Adjust [Head Posi. Adj.] The printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic or manual adjustment of Printhead
Printer] alignment relative to the printing direction.
[Feed Priority] [Adj. Priority] [Automatic] Set the priority feed precision. Normally select [Automatic]. Select [Print Quality] to print at
[Print Quality] high quality. Select [Print Quality] to reduce horizontal streaks. Select [Print Length] to
accurately control the feed amount. However, selecting [Print Length] may cause colors to
[Print Length] become slightly uneven in the carriage scan direction.
[Adj. Quality] [Auto(Genuin Set when using paper described in the paper reference guide.
ePpr)] A pattern to adjust the paper feed amount is printed, and the feed amount is automatically
adjusted from the printed result.
[Auto(OtherPa Set when using paper not described in the paper reference guide.
per)] A pattern to adjust the paper feed amount is printed, and the feed amount is automatically
adjusted from the printed result.
This takes longer than [Auto (GenuinePpr)] to print and consumes more ink.
[Manual] Select for paper that cannot be adjusted by [Auto(GenuinePpr)] or [Auto(OtherPaper)], such as
highly transparent paper.
Print a pattern to adjust the paper feed amount according to the type of paper.
[Adjust [AdjustmentPr Print a test pattern for adjustment relative to paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can
Length] int]-[A:High]/ enter the amount of adjustment.
[B:Standard/
Draft]
[Change Displayed when [Print Length] is selected as [Adj. Priority] for [Feed Priority].
Settings]- Adjust the expansion rate of the currently loaded paper.
[A:High]/ Enter the result adjusted with [AdjustmentPrint] or the difference with your own measurement
[B:Standard/ in %.
Draft] Increase the adjustment value to increase the feed amount for paper that tends to expand, and
reduce it for paper that tends to shrink.
[Calibration] [Auto Adjust] Choose Yes for automatic adjustment of the adjustment value after a test pattern for color
calibration is printed. The new color calibration adjustment value is applied in all print jobs.
[Calibration Log] Check the date when color calibration was executed, as well as the type of paper used, as shown
on the Display Screen.
[Use Adj. Value] Choose Disabled >OK if you prefer not to apply the color calibration adjustment value in print
jobs. The printer driver settings will be used instead.
Choose Enabled >OK to apply the color calibration adjustment value in print jobs. However,
printer driver settings are given priority.
[Set Exec. Guide] Choose On if you want to be displayed the message at the recommended timing of the
calibration.
[Return Defaults] Clear the color calibration adjustment value and the execution log.
[Maintenance] [Head Cleaning] Specify Printhead cleaning options.
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by Head
Cleaning A.
[Nozzle Check] Print a nozzle check pattern.
[Replace P.head] Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is
low.
When replacing the Printhead, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Repl. maint cart] When exchanging the maintenance cartridge, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the
screen.
[Repl. S. Cleaner] When replacing the Shaft Cleaner, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
[Change Cutter] When transferring the printer to another location, choose the level of transfer and follow the
instructions on the screen.
1-29
Chapter 1
T-1-15

[Interfac [EOP Timer] Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the
e Setup] printer.
[TCP/IP] [IPv4] [IPv4 Mode] Choose whether the printer IP address is configured automatically or a static IP address is
entered manually.
[Protocol] [DHCP]/ Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address automatically.
[BOOTP]/
[RARP]
[IPv4 Settings] [IP Address]/ Specify the printer network information when using a static IP address.
[Subnet Mask]/ Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as the network subnet mask and default
[Default G/W] gateway.
[DNS Settings] [DNS Dync Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically.
update]
[Pri. DNS Specify the DNS server address.
SrvAddr]/[Sec.
DNS SrvAddr]
[DNS Host Specify the DNS host name.
Name]
[DNS Domain Specify the DNS domain name.
Name]
[IPv6] [IPv6 Support] Set whether to support IPv6 connection.
[IPv6 StlessAddrs] Set whether to use IPv6 stateless address.
[DHCPv6] Set whether to use DHCPv6 setting.
[DNS Settings] [DNS Dync Specify whether DNS server registration is updated automatically.
update]-
[Statefull
Addr]/
[Stateless
Addr]
[Pri. DNS Specify the DNS server address.
SrvAddr]/[Sec.
DNS SrvAddr]
[DNS Host Specify the DNS host name.
Name]
[DNS Domain Specify the DNS domain name.
Name]
[NetWare] [NetWare] Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting.
[Frame Type] Specify the frame type to use.
[Print Service] Choose the print service.
[AppleTalk] Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To apply your changes, choose Register
Setting.
[Ethernet [Auto Detect] Specify the communication method. To apply your changes, choose Register Setting.
Driver]*12 Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN communication protocol. Choose Off to
use settings values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type.
[Comm.Mode] Choose the LAN communication method.
[Ethernet Type] Choose the LAN transfer rate.
[Spanning Tree] Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported over the LAN.
[MAC Address] Displays the MAC address.
[Interface Print] Print the interface settings.
[Return Defaults] Select [OK] to return the [Interface Setup] settings to factory default.
1-30
Chapter 1
T-1-16

[System Setup] [Sleep Timer] Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.
[Shut Down Timer] Specify the period before the printer shuts down.
[Buzzer] Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for warnings and three times for errors.
[Contrast Adj.] Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
[Date & Time] [Date] Set the current date.
[Time] Set the current time. This can be set only when [Date] is set.
[Date Format] Specify the date format.
[Language] Specify the language used on the Display Screen.
[Time Zone] Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city in this time zone and the
difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
[Length Unit] Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed. You can switch the unit
displayed for the remaining paper amount.
[Detect Mismatch] Set the printing behavior when the paper type and size set with the printer menu does not match
the paper type and size set with the printer driver.
Select [Pause] to pause printing. Select [Warning] to print a warning and continue printing.
Select [None] to continue printing without displaying a warning. Select [Hold Job] to queue the
job with different paper type and size in a job queue on the hard disk.
[Paper Size [Sht Selection 1] Select which size is to be recognized, [ISO A3+] or [13"x19"(Super B)], when the detected size
Basis] of the cut sheet is between these sizes.
[Sht Selection 2] Select which size is to be recognized, [ISO B1] or [28"x40"(ANSI F)], when the detected size
of the cut sheet is between these sizes.
[Keep Paper Size] Select [On] to give priority to paper size. If the margin set with the printer driver is less than
the margin set with the printer menu, the margin set with the printer menu has priority and text
and images extending beyond the margins are truncated.
Select [Off] to give priority to margin settings. If the margins set with the printer driver and the
margins set with the printer menu are different, the larger settings are used for printing.
[Rep.P.head Print] Select [On] to automatically perform [Adjust Detail] after replacing the Printhead.
[Nozzle Check] Set with [Frequency] the timing to check for nozzle clogging after printing. Select [Standard]
to adjust the checking timing according to the nozzle usage.
Select [1 page] or [10 pages] to check every one page or 10 pages.
Select [On] for [Warning] to display a warning when the print head nozzle is clogged while
printing.
[Use RemoteUI] Select [Off] to disable access from RemoteUI and enable setting only from the operation panel.
[Reset PaprSetngs] Restores settings that you have changed with Media Configuration Tool to the factory default
values.
1-31
Chapter 1
T-1-17

[System Setup] [Erase HDD [High Speed] Delete the file management information of the saved data in the HDD.
Data] [Secure High Overwrite the random data in the whole of the hard disk drive.
Spd.]
[Secure] Overwrite 00 and FF and random data in the whole of the hard disk drive once at a time.
Execute the verify check whether the data has written correctly to the hard disk drive.
[Output Method] [Print] Select the output method of jobs sent from software other than the printer driver. This can be
[Print (Auto set from the printer if you are using a printer driver.
Del)] Select [Print] to print normally. Select [Print (AutoDel)] to print and delete the data in hard
disk. Select [Save: Box XX] to save to box without printing.
[Save: Box XX]
[Print After Recv] Setting of jobs sent from software other than the printer driver. This can be set from the printer
if you are using a printer driver. Select [On] to print after saving.
[Common Box Set.] Select [Print(AutoDel)] to print without saving to a common box.
[Show Job Log] Selecting Off prevents display of the log in Job Menu > Job Log. Additionally, the log is not
printed if you choose Job Menu > Print Job Log. Note that because job logs are not collected,
the Status Monitor accounting functions will not work correctly.
[Take-up Reel] [Use Take-up Reel] Choose Enable to use the Media Take-up Unit.
[Auto Feed] This command is available only if Take-up Reel is set to Enable. Choose Yes to advance roll
paper automatically on the Rewind Spool, up to the fastening position.
[Skip Take-Up Err] Choose On to continue with printing even if an error occurs with the Media Take-up Unit.
Choose Off to have the printer pause before printing if a rewinding error occurs.
[Prep.MovePrint [Level 1] Select when moving the printer. Follow the instruction on the screen and perform the necessary
er] [Level 2] process.
This is not displayed when displaying a warning message about the amount remaining
[Level 3] maintenance cartridge.
[Admin. Menu] [Change Password] Set a password to restrict displaying/setting of menus as follows. Allowed value is from 0 to
9999999.
- Allow only administrator to display/set
[IPv4]
[Change Password]
[Init.Admin.Pswd]
- Allow administrator to display/set and non-administrator to display only
[Interface Setup](exclude [IPv4])
[Date & Time]
[Date Format]
[Time Zone]
[Use RemoteUI]
[Reset PaprSetngs]
[Save: Shared Box]
[Init.Admin.Pswd] Press [OK] to return the [Administrator Menu] password to factory default.
[Printer Info] [Paper Info] Indicates the current paper size, type, and related printer settings.
[Ink Info] Indicates ink levels and maintenance cartridge capacity.
[Head Info] Indicates information about the printhead.
[System Info] Indicates the firmware version, serial number, and interface information.
[Error Log] Indicates the most recent error messages (up to five).
[Other Counter] Indicates the total printing volume of the printer.
1-32
Chapter 1
1.6.4 Basket Unit

0017-9389
The Basket Unit(output stacker) can be installed at four positions, as shown.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-1-24
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-1-25
[1] When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, set it to this position.
[2] When the Output Stacker is not used, set it to this position.
[3] When printing on large and stiff sheets, or when the Media Take-up Unit is used, or when the Output Stacker is stored for long periods, lower it to
this position for storage.
When using the Output Stacker again after storage, reattach the Basket Rod on the front of the Output Stacker to the tips of the left and right Basket
Rods and pull the side rods out completely.
[4] When printing banners or when printing on delicate paper, set it to this position.
- When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position [1]. If you do not, printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker,
and the printed surface may become soiled.
- The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it is printed.
- Before using the Output Stacker, remove the Rewind Spool. If you do not, it may prevent printed documents from being held correctly, and it they may be
scratched.
a. Using the Output Stacker in the position for ejection in the front of the printer
You can also set the Output Stacker to the following position when printing banners or when printing on delicate paper.
MEMO:
- Always choose [Cutting Mode] > [Eject] in the main menu when the Output Stacker is in the position for ejection in the front of the printer. If you choose [Auto-
matic], printed documents may be damaged.
- During ejection in the front of the printer, be especially careful when using delicate paper or paper that curls easily.
- With some types of paper, the leading edge may curl or bend during ejection. In this case, straighten out the paper. Printed documents may be damaged if the paper
is curled or bent.
- Some types of paper may get caught between the Ejection Guide and Output Stacker during ejection. In this case, free the paper from where it is caught. Printed
documents may be damaged if the paper gets caught.
1-33
Chapter 1
1) Lift the Basket Rod gently to release the lock, lower the stacker toward the front, and push it all the way back.
F-1-26
2) Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Rods, and remove the back Basket Rod and the black cord from the Rod Holder.
F-1-27
1-34
Chapter 1
3) Store the left and right Basket Rods. Next, remove the Rod Holder Adapter, leaving the Rod Holder attached, and put it in front of the printer.
F-1-28
4) Pull out the Basket Hooks from the left and right side of the Ejection Guide.
F-1-29
5) Attach the Basket Rod to the Basket Hooks so that the white tag of the Basket Cloth is on the left side.
F-1-30
1-35
Chapter 1
6) Form the Basket Cloth into a sloping shape to make it taut, and attach the middle Basket Rod to the Rod Holder.
F-1-31
b. Stowing the Output Stacker

Stow the Output Stacker if you will use the Media Take-up Unit or if you will not use the Output Stacker for an extended period.
1) Lift the front Basket Rod gently to release the lock, lower the stacker toward the front, and push it all the way back.
F-1-32
1-36
Chapter 1
2) Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Rods. Roll up the Basket Cloth and put it at the back of the Bottom Stand Stay.
F-1-33
F-1-34
Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up Sensor.
F-1-35
1-37
Chapter 1
3) Push in the left and right Basket Rods toward the back all the way, until they stop.
F-1-36
1-38
Chapter 1
1.7 Safety and Precautions
1.7.1 Safety Precautions
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts

0012-6284
Be careful not to get your hair, clothes, or accessories caught in the moving parts of the printer.
These include the carriage unit activated by the carriage motor, the carriage belt, the ink tube and the flexible cable; the feed motor-driven the feed roller, the pinch
roller; and the purge motor-driven the purge unit.
To prevent accidents, the upper cover of the printer is locked during printing so that it does not open. If the upper cover is opened in the online/offline mode, the
carriage motor, feed motor, and other driving power supplies are turned off.
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[8]
[9] [7]
[12]
[10]
[11]
F-1-37
[1] Carriage belt [7] Purge unit

[2] Ink tube [8] Pinch roller
[3] Flexible cable [9] Feed roller
[4] Carriage unit [10] Feed unit
[5] Carriage motor [11] Feed motor
[6] Lift unit [12] Media take-up unit
1-39
Chapter 1
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink

0014-0264
1. Ink passages
Be careful not to touch the ink passages of the printer or to allow ink to stain the workbench, hands, clothes or the printer under repair.
The ink flows through the ink tank unit, carriage unit, purge unit, maintenance-jet tray, borderless print ink groove, maintenance cartridge and the ink tubes that
relay ink to each unit.
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
F-1-38
[1] Maintenance-jet tray [4] Carriage unit

[2] Maintenance cartridge [5] Ink tank unit
[3] Purge unit [6] Borderless print ink groove
Although the ink is not harmful to the human body, it contains organic solvents.
Avoid getting the ink in your mouth or eyes.
Flush well with water and see a doctor if contact occurs.
In case of accidental ingestion of a large quantity, call a doctor immediately.
Since this ink contains pigment, stains will not come out of clothing.
1-40
Chapter 1
2. Ink mist
Since the printhead prints by squirting ink onto the media, a minute amount of ink mist is generated in the printing unit during printing. The ink mist is collected in
the printer by the airflow. However, uncollected ink mist may stain the platen unit, carriage unit, carriage shaft unit, external unit, or purge unit.
These stains may soil the print media or hands and clothes when servicing the printer, wipe them off carefully with a soft, well-wrung damp cloth.
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-1-39
[1] Purge unit

[2] Upper cover
[3] Platen unit/Carriage unit/Carriage shaft unit
1-41
Chapter 1
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts

0012-6287
The electrical unit of the printer is activated when connected to the AC power supply.
At the rear of the printer are the main controller, power supply, interface connector, and optional media take-up unit connector. The head relay PCB and carriage
relay PCB are incorporated in the carriage unit, and the operation panel is located on the upper right cover.
When servicing the printer with the cover removed, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting contacts.
[3] [2]
[1]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[5]
F-1-40
[1] Operation panel [5] Power Supply

[2] Carriage relay PCB [6] Main controller PCB
[3] Head relay PCB [7] Interface connector
[4] AC inlet [8] Media take-up unit connector
1-42
Chapter 1
1.7.2 Other Precautions
1.7.2.1 Printhead
0013-1937
1. How to Handle the Printhead

Do not open the printhead package until you are ready to install the head.
When installing the printhead in the printer, hold the knob and then remove the protective cap 1 and protective cap 2 in that order.
Do not reattach the protective cap to the printhead because the cap may damage the nozzles.
To prevent the nozzles from getting clogged with foreign matter or dried ink, install the printhead immediately after you remove the protective caps.
Also make sure to press down the locking lever of the printhead until you feel a click.
In addition, to prevent clogging of the nozzles with foreign matter and improper supply of ink, never touch the nozzles or ink port, or wipe it with tissue paper or
anything else.
Do not touch Electrical contact.
Also, never attempt to disassemble/reassemble the printhead or wash it with water.
MEMO:
If the nozzles are clogged or an ink suction problem occurs, white lines can appear on the printout a constant frequency or color dulling can occur. If this problem
is not resolved by cleaning operations, replace the printhead with a new one.
[6]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
F-1-41
[1] Knob [4] Nozzles

[2] Protective cap 1 [5] Electrical contact
[3] Protective cap 2 [6] Ink port
2. Capping
The printer will perform the capping operation when printing has ended or during standby due to an error, in order to protect the printhead and avoid ink leakage.
If the power cord is accidentally unplugged, turn off the Power button, reconnect the power cord, and then turn on the Power button. Confirm that the printer starts
up properly and enters to the "Online" or "Offline" status, and then power off the printer using the Power button.
Improper "capping operation" may cause clogged nozzles due to dried ink or ink leakage from the printhead.
3. When the printer is not used for a long time

Keep the printhead installed in the printer even when it is not used for an extended period of time.
If the printhead is left uninstalled, a printing failure may arise from closed nozzles due to depositing of foreign matter or dried ink when it is reinstalled.
Even if the head remains installed, the nozzle may dry out and cause a printing failure if the ink is drained for transport.
4. Conductivity of Ink
The ink used in this printer is electrically conductive. If ink leaks to into the mechanical unit, wipe clean with a soft, well-wrung damp cloth. If ink leaks onto
electrical units, wipe them completely using tissue paper. If you cannot remove ink completely, replace the electrical units with new ones.
If electrical units are powered with ink leaked onto them, the units may damage.
Never connect the power cord when ink has leaded onto the electrical units.
1-43
Chapter 1
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank

0012-6292
1. Unpacking the Ink Tank

Do not unpack the ink tank until you are ready to install it.
When installing the ink tank, be sure to shake it slowly 7 to 8 times before unpacking it. Otherwise, the ink ingredients may precipitate and degrade the print quality.
To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink port, install the unpacked ink tank in the printer immediately.
330ml 700ml
F-1-42
2. Handling the Ink Tank
To prevent foreign matter from entering the ink flow path and causing ink suction and printing problems, never touch the ink port and contacts of the ink tank.
When you press down the ink tank cover, the needle enters the ink port, allowing ink to flow between the printer and ink tank.
Do not raise or lower the ink tank cover except when replacing the ink tank.
G G
330ml 700ml
F-1-43
1-44
Chapter 1
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer

0012-6294
1. Precautions against Static Electricity

Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices or change their
electrical characteristics.
In particular, never touch the printhead contacts[1].
[1]
F-1-44
2. Fixing the Carriage
After completion of printing, the carriage is mechanically locked by the lock arm in the purge unit at the same moment the printhead is capped.
Before transporting the printer, secure the carriage at its home position using belt stopper[1] so that the carriage does not become separated from the lock arm and
damage or ink does not leak.
[1]
F-1-45
1-45
Chapter 1
3. Contact of Linear Scale/Carriage Shaft

Do not touch the linear scale and carriage shaft when the upper cover is opened, for maintenance.
Touching the linear scale and carriage shaft might cause abnormal movement of the carriage and produce defective prints.
[1]
[2]
F-1-46
[1] Linear Scale

[2] Carriage Shaft
Don't apply the grease to the linear scale and carriage shaft. It may cause abnormal operations and defective prints.
4. Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

When the maintenance cartridge detects that the tank is full, the "Repl. Maint. C" error appears. In this case the maintenance cartridge must be replaced.
The printer will not operate until the error is cancelled.
Be careful that the waste ink does not splash when you remove the used maintenance cartridge from the printer.
MEMO:
This printer has an EEPROM in the maintenance cartridge and the maintenance cartridge status is controlled by the main controller PCB which reads and writes
the contents of that EEPROM. Therefore, initializing the counter information will not be needed when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.
5. Refilling the ink

After draining the ink from the printer according to the automatic or manual ink draining procedure for disassemble, reassemble, or transport/ship the printer, refill
the ink as soon as possible upon completion of those tasks.
Dried remaining ink on the surface of some components, may cause damage or abnormal operations.
1-46
Chapter 1
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer

0013-5942
This printer counts the print length, number of ink tank replacements, carriage driving time, number of cleaning operations, number of cutter operations, and so on
and stores them in the main controller's EEPROM as a COUNTER in Service mode.
COUNTER provides important information about the printer usage status.
You can check this information by printing it in the service mode or displaying it on the display.
Follow the precautions below when servicing the printer.
(1) Repairing/replacing the PCB

When replacing the main controller, follow the specified replacement procedure.
For the main controller replacement procedure, see "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly" > "PCBs".
(2) After replacing the carriage unit

The information about the carriage driving time resides in the carriage unit. After replacing the carriage unit, select [INITIALIZE] > [CARRIAGE] in the service
mode to initialize the information about the carriage driving time.
(3) After replacing the purge unit

The information about the number of cleanings resides in the purge unit. After replacing the purge unit, select [INITIALIZE] > [PURGE] in the service mode to
initialize (clear) the information about the number of cleanings.
(4) On replacement of supplies

After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.
For the consumable parts, see "MAINTENANCE" > "Periodic Replacement Parts".
You cannot check the counter information once it is initialized (cleared). Be careful not to initialize the counter information before checking it.
You cannot modify the counter information from the operation panel.
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version

0013-5945
Firmware has been downloaded to the main controller.

When you have replaced the main controller, check that the firmware is the latest version. If not, update it to the latest version.
Reference:
For instruction on how to update the main controller, refer to "TROUBLESHOOTING" > "Version Up".
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity

0013-5947
Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a charge can damage electrical devices.
To prevent this, discharge any static buildup by touching a grounded metal fitting before you start disassembling the printer.
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly

0013-5948
The precautions for disassembly/reassembly are described in "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY".
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature

0013-5950
The printer has a self-diagnostic feature to analyze hardware problems.

The self-diagnosis result is shown on the display and indicated by lamps.
For detailed information, see "ERROR CODE".
1-47
Chapter 1
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery

0013-5952
The main controller PCB of this printer is equipped with a lithium battery to back up various data.
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
"For CA, USA Only

Included battery contains Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. See
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for detail."
1-48
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
Contents
Contents
2.1 Basic Operation Outline.............................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.1 Printer Diagram ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 Print Driving ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2 Firmware..................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on ........................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off ........................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function.......................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.4 Head Management .................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control............................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.6 Pause between Pages............................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.7 White Raster Skip.................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.8 Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.9 Hard Disk Drive ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.3 Printer Mechanical System ......................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.2 Ink Passage............................................................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage ................................................................................................................................................. 2-10
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 2-15
2.3.2.4 Printhead................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead...................................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 2-18
2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge............................................................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge .................................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.3.2.7 Air Flow ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.3.2.7.1 Air Flow............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-23
2.3.3 Paper Path.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-24
2.3.3.1 Outline..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path ................................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.3.3.2 Paper Path .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-25
2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Feed Roller Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.4 Printer Electrical System........................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.4.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.4.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-27
2.4.2 Main Controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-29
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components ........................................................................................................................................... 2-29
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB ............................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components ............................................................................................................................................ 2-31
2.4.4 Head Relay PCB .................................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components.................................................................................................................................................. 2-31
2.4.5 Motor Driver............................................................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.4.5.1 Media take-up PCB components ............................................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.4.6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB......................................................................................................................... 2-32
Contents
2.4.6.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components....................................................................................................................... 2-32

2.4.7 Power Supply......................................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.4.7.1 Power supply block diagram ................................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors ............................................................................................................. 2-33
2.5.1 Covers.................................................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.5.2 Ink passage system ............................................................................................................................................... 2-34
2.5.3 Carriage system..................................................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.5.4 Paper path system ................................................................................................................................................. 2-38
2.5.5 Media take-up Unit................................................................................................................................................. 2-39
2.5.6 Others .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-39
Chapter 2
2.1 Basic Operation Outline
2.1.1 Printer Diagram

0024-9578
Shown below is a printer diagram.
Main controller PCB
IC601-IC604
SO-DIMM Operation panel PCB
SDRAM
IC802 IC701/IC703 Maintenance cartridge

J3 J1801 EEPROM FLASH ROM relay PCB
Power supply PCB
ROM PCB
IC803 IC1
RTC ASIC
Ink tank
BAT 801
Lithium battery
J1201/ Ink tank
J1202 ROM PCB
IC1201
HDD
HDD Controller
Linear encoder USB Sensor

sensor
Media take-up
LAN NIC BOARD ON/OFF sensor
Media take-up paper
J201
detection sensor
IC301/ Motor
J2601
Head IC304 J101/J102/
J101/J102/ J3301 Media take-up
J103/J201/ J103/J104/ IC2
motor
J202/J203 J105 ASIC J3201
J103 J102
J3003 J102
Multi J501
sensor J3401/J3501/ J101 J101 IC104
J701/J702/
J3502/J3601/ Motor driver
J703/J801/
J802/J803 J3602 Media take-up PCB
Lift cam J502 Media take-up

sensor relay PCB
Head relay PCB J2701

Fan
Carriage Suction fan

J202
cover sensor Mist fan (L)/(R)
Carriage relay PCB

IC2700 J2702/J3910
J2402/J2501/ Solenoid/Clutch
Driver
J2502/J2701/
Upper cover lock solenoid
J2702/J3001/
(L)/(R)
J3002/J3201/
Pick-up pressure solenoid
J3301
Sensor/Switch Roll media pick-up
pressure clutch 1/ 2
Carriage HP sensor J2402/J2501/
Pump encoder sensor J2502/J2801/
IC2802/IC2900 J3150
Pump cam sensor Motor
IC2902/IC3100
Media sensor
Motor driver
Head management sensor Carriage motor
Feed roller encoder sensor Feed motor
Feed roller HP sensor Lift motor
Valve open/closed detection sensor (L)/(R) Purge motor
Agitation cam sensor (L)/(R) Valve motor (L)/(R)
Temperature/humidity sensor
Upper cover lock switch (L)/(R)
Pressure release switch
Ink tank cover switch (L)/(R)
Ink detection sensor
F-2-1
2-1
Chapter 2
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence

0026-6428
The signal sequence from when the printer receives the print signals until printing starts is shown in the following figure.
: Image data
Host computer : Mask pattern data
: Heat pulse
Printer driver : Command data
: PCI bus
a a
: Data bus
: Universal sirial bus
Interface unit
USB LAN
b b
i
ASIC (IC1/L-COA)
EEPROM
Printhead
c Image processing unit g
SDRAM EEPROM
d
SDRAM
f Carriage PCB
e
FLASH ROM f Latch IC
e,h
e
i e
Ink tank
h
EEPROM
ASIC (IC2)
i
Operation panel
i
Sensor and drive unit
Main controller
F-2-2
a) The printer driver on the host computer transmits print data, including command data, to the printer after compressing the image data, without resolution, color
and 8-color binarization conversion.
To achieve high-quality image output, the image processing table data used for image data color conversion and binarization conversion are generated as command
data to meet the Media Type and other specifications of the printer driver.
b) This printer receives print data from the individual interfaces on the main controller, transmitting the received print data to ASIC (IC1).
c) The main controller decompresses the print data transmitted to the ASIC and gets it through resolution, color and 8-color binarization conversion while loading
the data into SDRAM from time to time.
It also converts the print data to 8-color binary equivalents of image and command data.
d) The ASIC (IC1) generates image data synthesized with mask data within the ASIC in sync with the discharge time while loading the data into SDRAM from
time to time.
e) The ASIC (IC2) collects printhead information from EEPROM mounted on the printheads and the printer temperature from the latch IC on the carriage board
and transmit them to the ASIC (IC1).
The ASIC (IC1) also receives mask pattern data from the firmware installed in flash ROM.
f) The ASIC (IC1) converts the image data synthesized with the mask pattern to data associated with the printhead information and the printer temperature, trans-
mitting the data to the printheads as a print signal. It transmits heat pulses to the printheads at the same time to optimize head driving.
g) The printheads convert the received print signal from a serial signal to a parallel signal for each row of nozzles and then the signal is composed with the heat
pulses to perform the printing.
h) The ASIC (IC1) controls the general aspects of image processing and print drive control by detecting the status of the individual printer components with refer-
ence to the adjustment values stored in EEPROM. SDRAM is used as work memory.
i) The ASIC (IC2) controls the general aspects of drive control by controlling button actuations and message displays on the basis of the firmware installed in flash
ROM.
2-2
Chapter 2
2.1.3 Print Driving

0026-6429
Print and control signals are transferred via the carriage board to the printheads to discharge inks from the nozzle assembly at printing.
Each printhead has 12 trains of nozzles arranged in a zigzag pattern.
This printer uses two printheads arranged side by side.
(In installed state, from left to right, PC, C, PM, GY, MBK, M, Y, BK, GY, PM, C, PC)
Print signals directed at each nozzle train are even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV) and odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD). These are
transferred in timing with a data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).
The Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) drive control signal enables inks to be discharged from the nozzles.
1. Pint drive control

Each train of nozzles in a printhead has 2,560 nozzles.
Ink discharge nozzles are selected split in 40-, 20- or 10-nozzle blocks according to the Block Enable information in the even-numbered nozzle data and odd-num-
bered nozzle data.
Each selected block of nozzles is impressed with a Heat Enable signal generated with variable pulse widths according to the head rank, head temperature and printer
temperature for optimized ink discharges. The nozzles are driven by heater boards in the nozzles to discharge inks. Optimal nozzle blocks are selected according
to the print path.
The diagram below illustrates the relationship between a 40-block nozzle and nozzles driven.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Block No.
0
Printhead nozzle No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
2559
The pattern is repeated until 2560 nozzles is reached.
F-2-3
2-3
Chapter 2
2. Print drive timing

Each printhead houses 12 trains of nozzles, which share the same data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).
Even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV), odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD) and the Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) signal are generated for each
nozzle train and controlled individually.
Printing is carried out in two ways through reciprocating motion of the carriage.
An encoder sensor mounted on the carriage generates a 150-dpi-pitched linear scale detection signal (ENCODER_A) and a signal (ENCODER_B) shifted 120 de-
grees in phase. The direction of carriage motion is detected from the status of the ENCODER_B signal relative to the leading edge of the ENCODER_A signal.
The printhead is driven using a 2400-dpi timing signal (internal signal), which is generated by dividing the ENCODER_A signal detected at the 150 dpi timing into
16 equal sections.
Printing in the forward direction is triggered at the leading edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A).
Printing in the backward direction is carried out the same way as printing in the forward direction but at the trailing edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A),
when the order of heated nozzles is reversed depending on the sequence of transfer of even-numbered nozzle data and odd-numbered nozzle data.
150dpi
Linear scale
ENCODER_A
ENCODER_B
2400dpi
Internal signal
2400dpi
H0_CLK
H0_A_DATA_0_EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_1_EV Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_0_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_A_DATA_1_OD Data of block 0 Data of block 2 Data of block 4 Data of block 22
H0_LT
H0_A_HE_1
Low active
F-2-4
2-4
Chapter 2
2.2 Firmware
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on

0012-6310
The sequence of printer operations, from power-on to transition to online mode, is flowcharted below. The printer takes less than 1 minute to initialize itself(*).
* Excluding the times spent supplying inks and cleaning the printhead after leaving the printer for extended periods of time.
Power Button ON
- Initialization of software
Device/resource - Initialization of various devices
initialization
- Engine startup status check

Engine status check
- Previous power-off status check,etc.
- Printhead installation status check

Printhead/ - Ink tank installation status check
ink tank check - EEPROM check
- Cassette pick-up unit initialization

Media feed system - Roll feed unit initialization
initialization - Roll feed unit initialization
- Sensor check
- Recovery system return to origin

Recovery system - Sensor check
initialization
- Carriage motor return to origin

Carriage position
initialization
Remaining ink level detection/

Waste ink level detection
Power-on
automatic recovery operation
Capping
Waiting for print operation

F-2-5
2-5
Chapter 2
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off

0012-6311
Turning off the power switch cuts off the drive voltage supply, launching a firmware power-off sequence as shown below.
If the power cord is disconnected from the wall outlet or the upper cover or any other cover is opened, the printer cancels the ongoing operation and shuts down
immediately. Since printhead capping may or may not have been carried out properly, reconnect the power cord to the wall out and turn on the power switch. Making
sure that the printer has entered online mode, turn off the power switch.
1. Power-off sequence
Hold down for at least once second

Power button OFF
If media remains,it is ejected even

Media ejection
when printing is in progress.
Power-off automatic recovery
Capping
Sensor system power OFF
Writing to EEPROM
Backup of various data
Power-off
F-2-6
2-6
Chapter 2
2.2.3 Print Position Adjustment Function

0012-6313
This printer supports a print position adjustment for the vertical and horizontal print positions, the bidirectional print position of the printhead mounted on the car-
riage, and the feedrate.
There are two adjustment modes for the print: automatic adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns printed are detected by the multi sensor attached
to the lower left part of the carriage, and manual adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns that are slightly modified from one another are printed, so
that visually verified adjustment values can be set from the operation panel.
To execute the print position adjustments, 10-inches size or larger roll media or two sheets of A4/LTR-size or larger cut sheet are needed. However, in case of A2-
size or larger cut sheet, one sheet is needed.
The print position adjustment function is executed by the following menu.
[Set./Adj. Menu]
[Adjust Printer] [Head Posi. Adj.] [Auto(Standard)]
[Auto(Advanced)]
[Manual]*4
[Head Inc. Adj.]
[Feed Priority] [Adj. Priority] [Automatic]*
[Print Quality]
[Print Length]
[Adj. Quality]*5 [Auto(GenuinePpr)]
[Auto(OtherPaper)]
[Manual]
[Adjust Length]*6 [AdjustmentPrint] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
[Change Settings] [A:High]
[B:Standard/Draft]
2.2.4 Head Management

0012-6314
This printer supports a nozzle check function to spot non-discharging nozzles in the printhead.
When the printer detects a non-discharging nozzle, it starts cleaning the printhead automatically to correct its discharge failure. If cleaning does not work, the printer
backs up the non-discharging nozzle with an alternative nozzle automatically to ensure unfailing print performance.
Detection timings (automatic):
Power-on, carriage cover open detection, print start (check timing variable by selecting Nozzle Check from the system menu).
2.2.5 Printhead Overheating Protection Control

0012-6315
When an abnormal temperature rise in the printhead is detected, overheating protection control launches.
Overheating could occur in the printhead after a period of print operations without the nozzles being filled with inks.
Overheating protection control is implemented on the basis of the temperature detected by the head temperature sensor for each nozzle. When an abnormal temper-
ature is detected in any nozzle train, overheating protection control is exerted at one of two levels according to that temperature.
Protection level 1:
If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) detects a temperature higher than the protection temperature, it halts the carriage temporarily at the scan end position in
the direction of travel according to the carriage scan status.
Printing resumes when the printhead radiates naturally to cool down below a predetermined temperature or when 30 seconds or longer have elapsed since the de-
tection of the higher temperature.
Protection level 2:
If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) detects a temperature higher than the abnormal temperature, the printer shuts down the print operation immediately,
moving the carriage to the home position for capping, with an error indication on the display.
2.2.6 Pause between Pages

0012-6320
An inter-page function is available to prevent ink rubbing, which keeps paper just printed hanging above the platen and waiting for a predetermined period of time
before delivery.
The wait time is user-programmable from the print driver. This feature is particularly useful on paper that takes time to dry after printing, such as film.
2.2.7 White Raster Skip

0012-6322
This printer supports a white raster skip function to bypass carriage scanning in a consecutive sequence of voids in print data, for added throughput.
2.2.8 Sleep Mode

0012-6324
The printer has sleep mode to reduce its standby power requirement.
The printer transitions to sleep mode automatically when it has been left idle or no print data has been received for a predetermined period of time while the printer
is online or offline.
The printer exits sleep mode when any operation panel key is activated or print data is received from the host computer.
The time to transition to sleep mode is variable from the operation panel (Default: 5minutes).
2.2.9 Hard Disk Drive

0013-9239
This printer features a hard disk drive, which provides the following functions.
- Early release of the host computer
- Error recovery
2-7
Chapter 2
- Job preservation
- Preserved job print
- Job queue handling
1) Early release of the host computer

Each print job received from the host computer is preserved to the hard disk drive attached to the printer, so the printer can proceed with independent printing,
releasing the host computer before the print job completes.
2) Error recovery
If a print job aborts as a result of any print problem, such as a paper jam or insufficient paper, the printer reloads the print job stored on the hard disk so it can resume
the print job without having to retransmit the job from the host computer to it.
3) Job preservation
Print jobs are in the common box, a place of temporary data storage, and in the personal box, a place of permanent data storage.
Normal print jobs are stored in the common box as they are received. Due to the limited hard disk space available, jobs stored in the common box are deleted from
the oldest one in sequence.
Print jobs can be simply stored in the personal box without printing. Print jobs stored in the common box can be moved to the personal box.
4) Preserved job handling
Print jobs stored in the personal box or common box can be printed from the operation panel.
5) Job queue handling

Multiple jobs queued for print can be handled. including the raising priority order of selected jobs in the queue or canceling selected print jobs.
2-8
Chapter 2
2.3 Printer Mechanical System
2.3.1 Outline
2.3.1.1 Outline
0012-6326
The printer mechanism is broken down into two broad sections: ink passage and paper passage.
The ink passage consists primarily of the carriage unit[2] that houses ink tanks[1] and a printhead, purge unit[3] and maintenance cartridge[4], and supplies, which
circulates, sucks and otherwise handles inks.
The paper passage consists of mechanical components, such as the paper feed unit[5], which is designed to feed, convey and deliver paper in two ways.
A summary description of each mechanical component of the printer is given below.
[3]
[1]
[5] [1]
[2]
[4]
F-2-7
2-9
Chapter 2
2.3.2 Ink Passage

2.3.2.1 Ink Passage
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage
0012-6328
The ink passage comprises ink tanks, a printheads, caps, a maintenance cartridge, ink tubes interconnecting the mechanical components of the printer, and a suction
pump that is driven to suck inks. It supplies, circulates, sucks and otherwise handles inks.
The ink passage (per color) is schematically shown below, along with the ink flow.
Mechanical Drive Unit

Ink or air flow
Carriage unit
Printhead Joint
Ink tank
Cap
Needle(ink supply) Needle(air passage)

Suction pump
Ink supply vavle
Piston
Agitation fin
Joint
Subtank
Valve Agitation
motor cam
F-2-8
a) Supplying inks from the ink tanks to the ink supply valve assembly
The each ink tanks contain ink to supply to the printhead.
Ink of the ink tanks is supplied to the subtanks and then ink of the subtanks is supplied to the ink supply valves by the fluid level difference.
On this occasion, air is discharged through the air passage of the subtanks to keep the internal pressure of the ink tanks constant.
b) Supplying inks from the ink supply valves to the printhead

Ink is filled from the ink tank to the printhead by driving the suction pump after the ink supply valve is opened and the printhead is capped.
The ink sucked from the caps flows to the maintenance cartridge.
c) Supplying inks while printing

The ink supply valves are kept open while printing, so that ink is constantly supplied to the printhead according to the negative pressure of the nozzle assembly
which is caused by the discharging inks.
Furthermore, waste inks sucked by the cleaning operation flow into the maintenance cartridge.
If opening all ink passages (that is, when the ink tank is not installed, ink supply valve is opened and printhead fixer lever is opened) while the ink tube is filled by
ink, ink in the ink tube flows backward according to the fluid level difference.
As a precaution, never open all the ink passages at the same time while the ink tubes are being filled with inks.
2-10
Chapter 2
d) Ink agitating
Ink will be agitated to prevent the element of the pigment ink from subsiding in the ink tank and the subtank.
The valve motor drive is transmitted to the agitation cam, the agitation fin in the subtank rotates and ink in the subtank will be agitated. In addition, ink in the ink
tank circulated by moving the piston under the needle(ink supply) up and down.
The operation timing is as following table.
Elapsed time from last agitating operation (h) Operating time

48 to 168 Approx. 90 seconds *1*2
168 to 336 Approx. 120 seconds *1*2
336 to 720 Approx. 12 minutes *1*2
720 to 1440 Approx. 18 minutes *1*2
1440 to 2160 Approx. 12 minutes *1
from 2160 Approx. 18 minutes *1
*1: The agitating operation don't execute at the same time with the printing and cleaning operation until the agitation operation finishes.
When executing the printing or ink supply valve opening suction operation (such as Cleaning 1/15/17) after the agitation operation finishes, their
operations execute at the same time with the agitation operation.
Also, when executing the suction operation that open or close the ink supply valve (such as Cleaning 2/4/5/6) after the agitation operation finishes,
their operations execute by stopping the agitation operation, and then the agitation operation is executed again after finishing the suction operation.
*2: The agitation operation at turning ON the power executes at the same time with the initial operation.
2-11
Chapter 2
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit

2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit
0012-6329
a) Ink tanks
The ink level in each ink tank is memorized in EEPROM attached to the tank and is detected as a dot count on the basis of the EEPROM information.
When an electrode attached to a hollow needle detects no continuity, it displays a message reporting that the ink tank is nearly empty.
If the dot count reaches a predesigned value in this state, an ink out condition is assumed.
b) Ink port
Depressing the ink tank fixer lever on the printer would cause would cause a hollow needle to pierce the ink tank port sealed by a rubber plug, linking the ink passage
of the ink to the printer.
c) Air passage
Depressing the ink tank fixer lever on the printer would cause an open hollow needle to pierce the air passage sealed by a rubber plug releasing the internal pressure
of the ink tank to keep it constant.
d) Notches for preventing incorrect installation

Ink tanks are furnished with a notch for preventing incorrect installation.
If the installation of an ink tank in incorrect position is attempted, the notch would interfere with it, preventing its installation.
The ink tank fixer lever won't lower without the ink tank fully inserted to reach the mounting position, so the ink cannot be supplied.
Ink port
Air passage
EEPROM
Notch for preventing

incorrect installation
Ink tank
Notch for preventing incorrect installation
F-2-9
2-12
Chapter 2
e) Subtank
The subtank installed under each ink tank complements the work of the ink tank, agitating the ink in the tank.
If the ink tank runs out of the ink while printing, the ink stored in the subtank is available, allowing the ink tank to be replaced without having to stop printing.
f) Ink supply valves

Ink tank supply valves are located halfway between the ink tanks and the ink tubes. These valves prevent the leakage of inks that might otherwise be caused by the
opening of the ink tubes on the side of the ink tanks during their replacement.
The ink supply valves are caused to open and close by the valve open/close mechanism that is activated by driving the valve motors.
The ink tank unit consists of tank bases each are organized into one group of six colors, and six-color ink tubes.
The color-specific ink supply valves will open and close at the same time for all colors.
Valve motor
Hollow needle
Valve open/closed detection sensor
Agitation cam sensor

Valve cam
Ink supply valve
Ink tube
Subtank
F-2-10
2-13
Chapter 2
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit

2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit
0024-9588
a) Printhead mounting function

The carriage, which fixes the printhead in position mechanically, is connected to the contacts of the head relay PCB.
b) Control function
The carriage carries a carriage relay PCB, which relays drive signals from the main controller PCB, a head relay PCB, which relays printhead drive signals to the
printhead, a linear encoder, which generates print timing signals, and a multi sensor, which detects the width of paper and skews in it, adjusts is registration and the
head height.
The carriage relay PCB is connected to the main controller PCB by a flexible cable.
c) Carriage drive function

The carriage is moved over the platen by means of the carriage belt that is driven by the power imparted from the carriage motor.
d) Printhead maintenance function

This printer performs cleaning operations, such as wiping the printhead and sucking inks, with the carriage halted at its home position.
e) Nozzle check function

This printer carries out an ink discharge operation with the carriage halted at the head management sensor, locating a non-discharging nozzle in the printhead.
f) Carriage height adjustment function

If the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper (carriage height) is varied as a result of differing paper thicknesses, crooked or curled paper or
other problems, the printer is liable to generate excess mist as the carriage height increases or to result in head rubbing as the carriage height decreases.
To maintain an acceptable carriage height, the lift motor is driven according to the selected paper type, feeding method, print conditions (borderless printing/prior-
itized picture quality) , environmental condition(temperature/humidity) and multi sensor measurements to automatically adjust the separation between the face of
the printhead and the paper
The table below shows the relation between the media type and the height of the head.
T-2-1
Height of printhead
Media type (reference) Remarks
(mm)
1.2 Plain paper
1.4 Photopaper, Synthetic paper, Film, Plain paper(Line drawing) Capping position
1.8 Coated paper(Line drawing)
2.0 Plain paper, Coated paper, Fabric banner
2.2 Premium matte paper, Fine art(watercolor,block print)
2.6 Canvas
g) Paper leading edge detection function/paper width detection function/skew detection function
The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage detects the leading edge and width of paper feeding on the platen and any skews in it.
h) Automatic printhead position adjustment function

The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage reads an adjustment pattern printed on a form and adjusts the print timing of each printhead automat-
ically.
i) Remaining roll media detection function

The printer prints a bar code on roll media upon installation of the roll media. The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage detects the remaining
roll length.
j) Internal unit temperature sensor

A thermistor installed on the head relay PCB detects the internal unit temperature near the printhead.
2-14
Chapter 2
2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit

0028-6252
a) Printhead mount
The printhead is secured to the carriage by the printhead fixer cover and the printhead fixer lever.
When the printhead is secured to the carriage, the signal contact of the head relay PCB is pressed against that of the printhead to convey print signals.
Furthermore, the ink passage from the ink tanks is connected to the printhead via the ink tubes.
b) Ink port
Ink is supplied to the printhead via an ink tube, which is connected to ink joints, and runs between the tube guides to reach the carriage and follow its movement.
[3]
[1]
[2] [4]
[5]
F-2-11
[1] Carriage motor

[2] Printhead fixer lever
[3] Printhead fixer cover
[4] Electrical contact
[5] Ink tube
c) Controller
The Carriage relay PCB is connected to the head relay PCB by means of a short flexible cable.
The flexible cable between the main controller and the carriage relay PCB follows up the motion of the carriage together with the tube guide.
A photocoupler encoder mounted in the lower part of the back of the carriage detects a linear scale reading as the carriage moves.
d) Carriage drive
Mechanical misregistrations in the vertical/horizontal and bidirectional print positions of the printhead mounted can be corrected by selecting Adjust Printer from
the main menu to shift the print timing.
A DC-operated carriage motor drives the carriage reciprocally on the platen by way of the carriage belt.
The carriage home position, or the capping position, is detected by the sensor flag on the right side of the carriage and the photointerrupter-based carriage HP sensor
on the right side of the printer. When the linear scale position is set as a reference home position for use in subsequent position control operations, the carriage motor
is driven by a control signal generated from the main controller PCB.
e) Printhead maintenance unit

This printer cleans the printhead with the carriage halted at its home position.
Wiping takes place through the rotation of the motor.
Wiper blades mounted on the carriage wipe the printhead while the carriage is halted at its home position.
Wet wiping is carried out for added wiping removal performance, whereby the wiper blades are moistened with glycerin as they are pressed against an absorber
impregnated with glycerin.
Maintenance jet ejection is carried out on the cap, at the maintenance jet tray, borderless printing ink tray and on the paper surface.
A suction operation is carried out by a suction cap in the purge unit.
f) Carriage height adjustment unit

The head height is adjusted with the carriage halted at its home position.
The lift motor is driven to rotate the lift shaft within the carriage, in sync with which the lift cams on both sides of the carriage move the head holder up and down,
thereby varying the separation between the face of the printhead and the paper.
The printhead height is detected from the lift cam sensor within the carriage and the distance of rotation of the lift motor.
g) Multi sensor
2-15
Chapter 2
The multi sensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage consists of four LEDs and four light-receiving sensors to detect the leading edges and width of paper
and skews in it, and to adjust its registration and head height.
The multi sensor reference has the white plate attached to it, so that a reference value can be calculated during carriage height measurement by measuring the in-
tensity of light reflected upon the white plate.
(Service mode: SERVICE MODE>ADJUST>GAP CALIB)
h) Shaft cleaner
The shaft cleaner located in the right rear of the carriage helps keep the carriage shaft clean.
i) Internal unit temperature sensor

One thermistor is installed on the head relay PCB on the back of the head holder to detect the internal unit temperature.
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3] [6]
[4] [5]
[10]
[12]
[9]
[8]
[11]
F-2-12
[1] Carriage relay PCB [7] Shaft cleaner

[2] Multi sensor [8] Maintenance jet tray
[3] Head relay PCB [9] Carriage HP sensor
[4] Lift cam sensor [10] Multisensor reference
[5] Sensor flag [11] Head management sensor unit
[6] Lift cam [12] Lift motor
2-16
Chapter 2
2.3.2.4 Printhead
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead
0013-8015
Each printhead is an integrated assembly of six trains of nozzles. Capable of controlling each nozzle individually, each printhead implements discharge control for
six colors by itself.
a) Nozzle arrangement
The nozzle assembly is formed of 1,280 nozzles arranged at 600-dpi intervals in a zigzag pattern, offering a total of 2,560 nozzles 1,200-dpi intervals.
1
1/1200inch
0
2
1278
1279 2559
F-2-13
b) Nozzle assembly structure
Inks supplied from the ink tanks are filtered through a mesh ink filter before being sent to the nozzle assembly.
Each nozzle train is supplied with an ink from the common nozzle chamber.
A head drive current subsequently flowing through the nozzle heater boils the ink, generating bubbles to discharge ink drops from the nozzle assembly.
Resin
Sillicon plate
Heater Heater
Shared ink chamber
F-2-14
2-17
Chapter 2
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit

2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit
0012-6344
To maintain high print quality, the purge unit performs maintenance of the nozzles of the printhead.
The purge unit supports a capping function, cleaning function, and ink supply function.
a) Capping function
The capping function presses the cap of the purge unit against the face plate on the nozzle section of the printhead to prevent nozzle drying and dust adhesion.
Capping is performed when printing is complete, at the start of the suction operation, and when switching to the standby state due to an error.
The capping function also establishes the ink passage between the printhead and purge unit.
b) Cleaning function
The cleaning function restores the printhead to the state where ink can be easily discharged from nozzles. This function includes the following three types of oper-
ations.
- Wiping operation
This operation is performed to remove paper fibers and dried ink from the face plate.
- Pumping operation
This operation is performed to remove ink from the nozzles and fill the nozzles with fresh ink.
- Maintenance jet operation

This operation is performed to spray ink from the nozzles to the cap, the borderless ink jet tray, and on paper to remove bubbles in the nozzles and dust and other
foreign particles.
c) Ink supply function

The suction pump of the purge unit operates together with the ink supply valve to supply ink to the printhead during the initial filling and ink level adjustment.
Details of the cleaning function are shown in the table below.
Name of Service mode or

Cleaning mode PRINT INF Operation Description of cleaning
(Name of Main Menu)
Cleaning 1 CLN-A-1/CLN-M-1 Normal cleaning Removes dried ink from nozzles, thick ink accumulated on the
(Head Cleaning A) face, and paper particles.
Cleaning 2 CLN-A-2 Ink level adjustment and cleaning Adjust the ink level in the head by suction, and then performs
normal cleaning.
Cleaning 3 CLN-A-3 Initial filling ink Fills the empty tube (during initial installation) with ink, and
then performs normal cleaning.
Cleaning 4 CLN-M-4 Ink drainage for head replacement Drains ink to replace the head (drains only the ink in the head).
(Replace P.head)
Cleaning 5 CLN-M-5 Ink drainage for secondary transport Drains ink from the head and tube for secondary transport.
(Move Printer)
Cleaning 6 CLN-A-6/CLN-M-6 Normal (strong) cleaning Performs suction stronger than when adjusting the ink filling
(Head Cleaning B) amount in the head or normal cleaning to unclog nozzles.
Cleaning 7 CLN-A-7 Aging Performs idle ejection after replacement of the head.
Cleaning 10 CLN-A-10 Ink filling after secondary transport Fills the empty tube (during installation after secondary
(Move Printer) transport) with ink, and performs normal cleaning.
Cleaning 11 CLN-A-11 Ink filling after head replacement Performs normal cleaning after head replacement and ink
filling.
Cleaning 15 CLN-A-15 Dot count suction Performs suction to remove ink adhered to dried nozzles and
thick ink accumulated on the face when the dot count reaches
the prescribed value.
Cleaning 16 CLN-A-16 Precipitated ink agitation Performs the agitation (ink supply valve open/close) operation
to prevent the ink ingredient from precipitating.
Cleaning 17 CLN-A-17 Cleaning (weak) Performs cleaning weaker than normal cleaning to unclog
nozzles.
2-18
Chapter 2
Cleaning operation timings are as follows.
Consumption
Printer status Cleaning operation
(typ.)*1
Standby 168 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Cleaning)
At least 720 to 960 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 10 (480 hours after Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
initial installation) (strong) Cleaning)
At initial installation and 48 hours or more elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 16 Cleaning 16 -
(Precipitated ink
agitation)
1 hour elapsed capped with a specified number of dots discharged per chip completed after last Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
wiping
Power-on At initial installation Cleaning 3 (initial filling 40g
ink)
Both heads and inks The print operation has completed. 168 to 720 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
available Cleaning)
At least 720 to 960 hours elapsed Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
since the last session of Cleaning 2, (strong) Cleaning)
3, 6 or 10 (360 to 480 hours after
initial installation)
At least 960 to 2160 hours elapsed Cleaning 2 (Ink level 10g
since the last session of Cleaning 2, adjustment and
3, 6 or 10 (480 hours after initial cleaning)
installation)
At least 48 hours or more elapsed Cleaning 16 -
since the last session of Cleaning 16 (Precipitated ink
agitation)
At least 1 hour elapsed capped with Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
a specified number of dots
discharged per chip completed after
last wiping
Print operation aborted (uncapped) Up to 72 hours elapsed after an Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
and CR error occurring abort Cleaning)
Over 72 hours elapsed after an abort Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
(strong) Cleaning)
Print operation aborted (uncapped) and no CR error occurring Cleaning 11 (ink filling 10g
after head replacement)
No heads are available Cleaning 10 (ink filling 40g
on secondary transport)
Power off Specified number of dots discharged per chip completed since the last session of wiping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
Before the Less than 168 hours elapsed capped Idle ejection 0.013g
start of At least 168 hours elapsed capped Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
printing Cleaning)
Before printing in the wake of an error occurrence Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Cleaning)
Printing Before scanning while printing Idle ejection (+Wiping) - (0.013g)
After the end A specified number of dots (color) discharged per chip since the last session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 1 Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
of printing (strong) Cleaning)
A specified number of dots discharged per chip after the last session of wiping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
3 minutes elapsed since the last session of capping Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g
Total 2 hours elapsed uncapped since the last session of Cleaning 1, 2, 3, 6 or 10 Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Cleaning)
When the Manual Cleaning (Head Cleaning A) Cleaning 1 (Normal 1g
Head Cleaning)
Cleaning Manual cleaning (Head cleaning B) Cleaning 6 (Normal 5g
menu choice (strong) Cleaning)
is executed
When the After head replacement Cleaning 2 (ink level 10g
Replace Print adjustment and
Head menu cleaning) + Cleaning 4
choice is (ink drainage for head
executed replacement)
When the After the Move Printer menu choice is executed Cleaning 5 (ink drainage 10g
Move Printer for secondary transport)
menu choice After power-on at secondary installation After power-on at 15g
is executed secondary installation
*1: Quantities of ink consumption by nozzle train
2-19
Chapter 2
2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit

0012-6341
a) Cap unit
The cap unit cap the nozzle assembly in the left and right printheads during capping and cleaning. The part of the cap unit that comes into contact with the face plate
of the nozzle assembly is made of rubber. Two caps are in position to meet each of the printheads mounted on the carriage (six trains of nozzles).
The cap unit are activated to protect the nozzle assembly on capping. When the carriage moves to the home position , the cap unit are elevated by the cap cam that
is driven by the capping motor, capping the nozzle assembly to protect it.
These cap unit cap the nozzle assembly to suck inks from the printhead by means of the suction pump.
Wiper unit
Carriage lockpin
Glycerin tank
Pump cam sensor
Cap
Purge motor
Pump encoder sensor
F-2-15
b) Wiper unit
The wiper unit are driven by the purge motor to wipe the six trains of nozzles in the nozzle assembly in the printhead simultaneously.
A pair of wiper blades are in position to ensure wiping performance. The wiping operation operates on a slide wiping basis, sliding the wiper blades via wiper cams
through the normal rotation of the purge motor.
Wiping is executed by the wiper blades moving at a constant speed to the front of the printer after the end of a print or suction operation.
A wiper blade set perpendicularly to the head wipes the entire face of the printhead, followed by a narrower blade wiping the nozzle assembly.
The wiper blades are cleaned before they are replaced at the wiping position after wiping to preserve wiping performance.
Wiper blade cleaning is carried out by scraping off the inks that have been wiped off from the head with an ink scraper linked to the maintenance cartridge, then
wiping the blades with a blade cleaner.
Wet wiping is carried out for added wiping removal performance, whereby the wiper blades are moistened with glycerin as they are pressed against an absorber
impregnated with glycerin. The quantity of glycerin used is managed by counting the number of times the wiper blades have been pressed against the absorber.
When this count reaches to the specified values, either a replacement warning (continued print available) or replacement required indication (service call error) is
issued.
Glycerin Ink scraper Printhead

absorber
Glycerin tank Wiper blades
Blade holder
Wiper cam
Cap
F-2-16
c) Pump unit
The pump unit (suction pump) is a tube pump that pressurizes the ink tubes with rotating rollers to generate a negative pressure for sucking inks.
A single tube is sequentially pressurized by a pair of rotating rollers to control the level of ink suction by a wide margin.
2-20
Chapter 2
The timing at which the rotating rollers rotate is detected by the pump cam sensor, with the distance of rotation being controlled by the driving of the purge motor.
Cap
Pump cam sensor
Suction pump
Cap
Rotating rollers
Ink tubes
Purge motor
Pump encoder sensor
Suction pump
F-2-17
2-21
Chapter 2
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge

2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge
0012-6346
a) Maintenance cartridge
The maintenance cartridge can store waste ink.
b) Detection of waste ink in maintenance cartridge

The quantity of waste ink in the maintenance cartridge is measured by counting dots.
When the quantity of the waste ink reaches about 80% of the cartridge capacity, the warning message "Check maint cartridge capacity" is displayed to tell that the
maintenance cartridge is nearly full.
Printing may continue even when the warning message is displayed.
When the quantity of the waste ink reaches about 100% of the cartridge capacity, a replacement prompt error message is displayed, telling that the maintenance
cartridge is full.
When the printer determines that the maintenance cartridge is full, it shuts down even while it is printing.
The printer will remain inoperable until the maintenance cartridge is replaced.
MEMO:
The maintenance cartridge houses EEPROM, so that main controller PCB can control the status of the maintenance cartridge by writing to and reading from the
EEPROM content.
There is no need to initialize the counter information, therefore, when the maintenance cartridge is replaced.
Maintenance cartridge relay PCB
F-2-18
2-22
Chapter 2
2.3.2.7 Air Flow

2.3.2.7.1 Air Flow
0014-8865
This printer has two fans, a mist fan used to collect mist and a suction fan used to suck media onto the platen.
Ink mists floating during printing or springing back from the paper are collected in the mist fan unit by air flow in the printer.
Two mist fans located on the rear side of the printer makes the airflow that carries the ink mists to the mist fan unit.
Mist fan
F-2-19
A duct is located under the platen, along with a platen ink box unit used for collecting waste ink during borderless printing and idle discharges. The suction fan
collects the ink mist in the duct into the suction fan duct unit.
Duct
Suction fan duct unit
Suction fan
F-2-20
2-23
Chapter 2
2.3.3 Paper Path

2.3.3.1 Outline
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path
0013-8780
The key components of the paper passage consist of a feed roller assembly, a pinch roller drive that locks and releases the pinch roller and sensors that detect the
feed status of paper. It feeds paper in trays, conveys and delivers paper.
Basic operation of the roll media loading sequence

1) Multi sensor light quantity adjustment.
2) Paper leading edge detection sensor.
3) Paper left edge detection sensor.
4) Barcode read.
* Performed only if Chk Remain.Roll is turned on.
5) Paper skew detection sensor.
6) Paper right edge detection sensor.
7) Trim edge first detection sensor.
* Performed only if Trim Edge First is turned on.
8) Leading edge cutting.
* Leading edge cutting is executed under the following conditions.
a. Trim Edge First is set to Forced.
b. Trim Edge First is set to Automatic, and the need for cutting determined.
c. A barcode is detected when Chk Remain.Roll is on (forced cutting, regardless of the setting of Trim Edge First).
Basic operation of the cut sheet loading sequence

1) Paper trailing edge detection sensor.
2) Multi sensor light quantity adjustment.
3) Paper width detection sensor.
5) Paper skew detection sensor.
MEMO:
Press the [ ] key while the printer is offline to deliver paper, the [ key to rewind the paper.
2-24
Chapter 2
2.3.3.2 Paper Path

2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Feed Roller Unit
0024-9813
a) Paper feed assembly

The paper feed assembly consists of paper feeding mechanisms, such as a feed roller that is driven by the feed motor and a pinch roller unit that follows up the
motion of the feed roller.
Paper feeds horizontally under the printheads on the carriage as it is kept level on the platen to prevent cockle.
b) Sensors
The paper feed assembly includes sensors for detecting the status of paper feeding and that of the mechanical components that make up the paper passage.
For more details, see TECHNICAL REFERENCE > Detection Functions with Sensors.
c) Roll media pick-up drive unit

When the roll media feeds, the roll media pick-up pressure clutch 1 turns on to actuate the torque limiter in the pick-up drive unit. Thus the back tension works to
prevent the roll media from sags or skew.
At this time, if the paper tube of roll media is inside diameter of 3 inches, the pick-up pressure solenoid and roll media pick-up pressure clutch 2 turn on to increase
the back tension (about 2.6 times higher than before).
Media sensor
Pinch roller
Feed roller
Printhead
Roll media
Release lever
Roll holder
Feed roller Feed roller Roll media pick-up

HP sensor encoder sensor pressure clutch 1
Roll media pick-up
Feed motor
pressure clutch 2
Pick-up pressure solenoid
F-2-21
2-25
Chapter 2
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit

2.3.3.3.1 Structure of Cutter Unit
0012-6386
If the setting of the print driver or main menu is configured to use a cutter with roll media, cutter unit attached to the left side of the carriage cuts roll media auto-
matically. Cutter unit won't cut roll media if the setting of the print driver or main menu is configured otherwise.
Cutter unit
F-2-22
2-26
Chapter 2
2.4 Printer Electrical System
2.4.1 Outline
2.4.1.1 Overview
0024-9589
The printer electrical system consists of the main controller PCB and power supply PCB which are mounted on the back side of the printer, the carriage relay PCB,
the head relay PCB, and printhead which are mounted in the carriage, the operation panel on the right upper cover and other electrical components such as sensors,
and motors.
The main controller PCB manages the image data processing and the entire electrical system, and controls relay PCBs and driver functions.
Power supply PCB Main controller PCB
Head relay PCB Carriage relay PCB
HDD
Media take-up relay PCB

Operation panel PCB
Media take-up PCB
F-2-23
2-27
Chapter 2
Power supply PCB Main controller PCB

+26V generation function IC1501/IC1701
AC inlet
IC1601-IC1603
+21.5V generation function Power supply control function
BAT801 IC601-IC604
SO-DIMM
Lithium battery SDRAM
IC803 IC802
RTC EEPROM
IC1
Host computer Interface
Network Board control function
IC1201
HDD Hard disk drive control function
HDD controller
Linear encoder
sensor Linear encoder detection function
Head relay PCB
Head Heat pulse control function
IC301/IC304
Image data control function
DI sensor reading
EEPROM
control function
IC701/IC703 FLASH ROM
Temperature reading Carriage
control function relay PCB
Operation panel control function Operation panel

Thermistor
PWM control function Fans
Multi sensor
EEPROM Multi sensor Remaining ink level
detection function Ink tank ROM PCB
control function
LED control function Maintenance cartridge

relay PCB
EEPROM control function IC1 EEPROM
Sensors
Solenoids/
Media take-up PCB Solenoid/Clutch control function Driver Clutches
Media take-up Sensor detection function
IC104 relay PCB
Motor driver Motor control function
IC2802/IC2900
Motors IC2902/IC3100
Motor driver
F-2-24
2-28
Chapter 2
2.4.2 Main Controller
2.4.2.1 Main controller PCB components

0029-0084
J401
IC601
IC2802
IC602 IC3100
IC703
IC1 IC701 IC2700
IC603 BAT801 IC2902
IC2
IC2900
IC604
IC803
IC802
IC1201
F-2-25
a) ASIC (IC1/IC2)
The ASIC(IC1/IC2) with a 32/16-bit internal bus is driven in sync with the 330/66 MHz external clock. It supports the following functions:
Image processing unit

This unit converts the RGB multi-value image data or CMYK multi-value data received from the host computer through the interface connector to the binary image
data for the ink colors used.
DMA controller
This controller control DMA transfer of the data transferred through the input interfaces such as the USB and expansion card slot as well as DMA transfer of the
data stored in the DIMM.
Image data generation/output function

This function generates image data for color printing from the received image data and the mask pattern (corresponding to print mode) stored in the FLASH ROM,
and stored the generated image data in DIMM. It also outputs the generated image data to the carriage relay PCB.
Interrupt controller
This controller receives and processes internal interrupts and external interrupts from the USB, image processing unit, and expansion card slot.
Timer function
Even when the printer is turned off, the timer function is held on using the RTC(IC803) and lithium battery(BAT801) to assist the cleaning function.
When the power cord is plugged to the outlet, power is supplied to the RTC and therefore the lithium battery power is not consumed.
Heat Enable signal control function

This function uses the pulse width to perform variable control of the time of application of the Heat Enable signal to the nozzle heater board for each printhead
nozzle array.
Linear scale count function

This function reads the linear scale when the carriage moves, thus generating the ink discharge timing. It also counts the linear scale timing cycle using the reference
clock to measure the carriage moving speed.
Dot count function

This function controls the discharge dots used as the information for Heat Enable signal control, maintenance jet control, cleaning control, and remaining ink level
for each nozzle array.
Operation panel control function
This function controls serial communication with the operation panel.
PWM control function
This function controls driving of the suction fan and mist fan as well as the temperature of the printhead.
Remaining ink level detection function

This function detects the remaining level of each color of ink based on the signal received from the hollow needle mounted in the ink tank unit.
LED control function
This function controls the LEDs on the ink tank unit.
I/O port function

This function controls input signals from sensors.
Power ON/OFF control function

This function controls turning on/off of the drive power (32V and 5.1V) supplied from the power supply PCB.
Head DI sensor read control function

This function controls read operation by the head DI sensor.
Multi sensor control function

This function controls the LED, adjusts the gain, and controls obtainment of the reading for the multi sensor.
2-29
Chapter 2
EEPROM control function

This function controls the EEPROMs of individual ink tanks, the maintenance cartridge EEPROM, the EEPROM on the maintenance cartridge relay PCB, and the
head EEPROM in addition to the on-board EEPROM.
Motor control function

This function controls the carriage motor, feed motor, valve motor, purge motor and lift motor based on the input signals from sensors.
b) Driver IC (IC3100)
This IC generates a carriage motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
c) Driver IC (IC2802)
This IC generates feed motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
d) Driver IC (IC2900)
This IC generates purge motor and valve motor control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.
e) Driver IC (IC2902)
This IC generates lift motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.
f) Driver IC (IC2700)
This IC generates solenoid and clutch control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.
g) DIMMs (IC601/IC602/IC603/IC604)
The DIMM comprising a 128-MB SDR-SDRAM is connected to the 32-bit data bus to be used as a work area.
During print data reception, it is also used as an image buffer.
It cannot be expanded.
h) FLASH ROM (IC701/IC703)
A 128-MB flash ROM is connected to the 8-bit data bus to store the printer control program.
i) EEPROM (IC802)
The 128-KB EEPROM stores various setting values, adjustment values, log data, counter values related to the user/servicing.
j) SO-DIMM
The 256-MB SO-DIMM (J401) is connected to the 32-bit data bus to be used as a work area.
During print data reception, it is also used as an image buffer.
It cannot be expanded.
k) HDD controller (IC1201)

This controller control the hard disk drive.
MEMO:
After replacement of the main controller PCB, the printer must be started up in the service mode to copy over the setting and adjustment values to the new PCB
properly (the service mode will be switched to the PCB replacement mode automatically).
2-30
Chapter 2
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB
2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components

0012-6406
F-2-26
a) Image data relay function
This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead.
The function for processing image data is not supported.
b) Sensor relay function

This function relays the input signals from the multi sensor, lift cam sensor, carriage cover sensor, and linear encoder to the main controller PCB.
2.4.4 Head Relay PCB
2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components

0017-8321
IC304 IC301
F-2-27
a) Latch IC (IC301,IC304)
DI sensor read control function
Obtains reading value of the DI sensor in the printhead and the head rank value for each color and outputs them to the main controller based on the control commands
from the main controller.
Environment temperature read control function

Outputs the environment temperature detected by the thermistor on the head relay PCB to the main controller based on the control commands from the main con-
troller.
Relay function of the power to the logic components in the printhead

Supplies the power to the logic components in the printhead based on the control commands from the main controller.
b) Multi sensor control IC

These IC's generates the LED control signals and makes gain adjustment for the multi sensor.
c) Image data relay function

This function relays the image data from the main controller PCB to the printhead.
d) Sensor relay function

This function relays the input signals from the multi sensor, lift cam sensor, carriage cover sensor, and linear encoder to the main controller PCB.
2-31
Chapter 2
2.4.5 Motor Driver
2.4.5.1 Media take-up PCB components

0014-2480
IC104
F-2-28
a) Driver IC (IC104)
Media take-up motor drive function

This function controls the Media take-up motor based on the control signals from the main controller.
Sensor relay function

This function relays the input signals from the Media take-up paper detection sensor and Media take-up on/off sensor to the main controller PCB.
2.4.6 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB
2.4.6.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components

0013-6532
IC 1
F-2-29
a) EEPROM (IC1)
The 2-KB EEPROM stores all information written in the EEPROM on the main controller PCB.
2.4.7 Power Supply
2.4.7.1 Power supply block diagram

0012-6414
AC inlet
100V to 240V
Operation panel Main controller PCB Power supply
DC power supply +32V

POWER ON Noize filter circuit
control circuit generation circuit
Transformer
+5V/+3.3V +5.1V
generation circuit Rectifying circuit
generation circuit
F-2-30
The power supply converts AC voltages ranging from 100V to 240V from the AC inlet to DC voltages for driving the ICs, motor, and others.
The voltage generator circuits include the +32V generation circuit for driving motors, fans, and the +5.1V generator circuit for driving sensors, logic circuits.
When in the power saving mode, the power supply cut out the +32V and the +5.1V.
Power ON/OFF operation is controlled by the main controller PCB. When the upper cover is open, the power supply cut out only the +32V power to the carriage.
2-32
Chapter 2
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors
2.5.1 Covers
0012-6490
Ink tank cover switch
Upper cover lock switch
F-2-31
Upper cover lock switch (L) / (R)
The microswitch-based upper cover lock switches detect the open/closed states of the upper cover.
When the upper cover close, the switches are pressed to detect the closed state of the upper cover.
The printer has one switch installed on the left and right sides each to prevent one-sided closure of the upper cover.
Ink tank cover switch (L) / (R)

The microswitch-based ink tank cover switches detect the open/closed states of ink tank covers.
When an ink tank cover closes, the switches are pressed to detect the closed state of the ink tank cover.

The microswitch-based pressure release switch detects the status of the paper release lever.
When the paper release lever closes, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the paper release lever.
2-33
Chapter 2
2.5.2 Ink passage system

0024-9591
Agitation cam sensor Valve open/closed

detection sensor
Pump cam sensor
Pump encoder
Head management sensor
F-2-32
Pump cam sensor
As the cam rotates, it shields the sensor light of the photointerrupter-based pump cam sensor or allows it to be transmitted. The status of the purge unit, such as
capped, suction and wiping, is detected by the combination of the pump cam sensor detection and the control of pump motor rotation by the pump encoder sensor.
Rotary flag Sensor
- Carriage lock - Capping - Air passage valve open - Printing

- Suction - Idle suction - Suction during printing
- Wiping - Carriage lock - Carriage move - Maintenance jet

- Air passage - Idle suction
F-2-33
2-34
Chapter 2
Pump encoder sensor

The photointerrupter-based sensor reads slits in the encoder film of the Purge motor and controls the amount of its rotaion accordingly.
Slits
Sensor
F-2-34
Valve open/closed detection sensor
The photointerrupter-based valve open/closed detection sensor detects the status of the valve.
The sensor detects that the ink supply valve is open when the sensor light is shielded by a flag linked with the valve cam.
Agitation cam sensor

The photointerrupter-based agitation cam sensor detects the status of the agitation cam.
The sensor detects the agitation cam home position when the sensor light allows it to be transmitted.
Ink detection sensor

The ink detection sensor detects the presence or absence of the ink in an ink tank with respect to the status of continuity between two hollow needles.
When the ink level in the tank falls to a point below the wall surrounding the hollow needles in the air passage, continuity with the hollow needle on the ink supply
side is disrupted, causing the sensor to detect that the ink is out.
Ink tank
Wall
Rubber plug
Needle (ink supply) Needle(air passage)

F-2-35
The photo-transmission-type sensor detects that the printhead is discharging ink.
The carriage moves to and stops at the detection positions for individual nozzle arrays. When the carriage is at a stop, nozzles discharge ink on after another.
The sensor detects each nozzle due to the voltage change caused when ink discharged from the nozzle blocks the sensor light.
Non-discharging nozzle detection is carried out at the following timings:

- After the execution of Cleaning 1, Cleaning 2, Cleaning 3, Cleaning 6 or Cleaning 10
- After the number of copies that has been set by the user menu choice Nozzle Check Frequency have been printed
If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles have been located in one session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal cleaning sequence is
launched before a second session of non-discharging nozzle detection is conducted. If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles are located in the
second session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal (High) cleaning session is launched before a third session of non-discharging nozzle detection is
conducted.
If there are at least 320 non-discharging nozzles out of 2560 nozzles as the result of non-discharging nozzle detection, printing is canceled after displaying a message
to replace the head.
However, if service mode: [SERVICE MODE] > [SETTING] > [HEAD DOT INF] is [ON], the following message appears.
If there are at least 30 nozzles unable to correct the non-discharging state and the number of non-discharging nozzles is less than 100 out of 2,560 nozzles as the
result of non-discharging nozzle detection, printing can continue after displaying a message to check the printing. Also, if the number of non-discharging nozzles
is at least 100 but less than 320 nozzles, printing can continue after displaying a message to check the head. And if there are at least 320 non-discharging nozzles,
printing is canceled after displaying a message to replace the head.
Printhead
Nozzle unit
Head management
sensor unit
F-2-36
2-35
Chapter 2
2.5.3 Carriage system

0028-6197
Linear encoder sensor
Carriage cover sensor
Carriage relay PCB

Multi sensor
Head relay PCB
Linear scale
Lift cam sensor
Carriage HP sensor
F-2-37
Carriage cover sensor
The photointerrupter-based carriage cover sensor detects the opening and closing of the carriage cover.
When the carriage cover is closed, the sensor light is shielded by the sensor arm, enabling the sensor to detect that the carriage cover is closed.
Carriage HP sensor
The photointerrupter-based carriage HP sensor detects the home position of the carriage.
Installed on the right side plate of the printer, the sensor detects an edge of the carriage home position on the carriage unit under carriage movement control.
The printer establishes the carriage home position from the position at which its edge is detected as a reference position.
Linear encoder sensor

Mounted on the back of the carriage, the linear encoder detects the position of the carriage from a slit in the linear scale during its movement.
Lift cam sensor

This sensor is a photointerrupter-based sensor. After the sensor light is shielded by the flag, the lift motor is driven by a predetermined number of pulses to regulate
the separation between the printheads and platen automatically.
Ambient temperature sensor

The thermostat-based ambient temperature sensor mounted on the head relay PCB detects the ambient temperature to which the carriage is exposed.
The resistance of the thermistor that varies as a function of temperature changes in the printer is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage relay PCB.
The ambient temperature is used to help calibrate the head temperature sensor and detect abnormal ambient temperatures.
Head temperature sensor
The head temperature sensor detects the temperature of the printhead.
The printhead temperature is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage relay PCB.
The printhead temperature is used to help control the head drive and detect abnormal printhead temperatures.
Printhead contact detection

The printhead contact detects the status of printhead installation by electrical means.
The contact detects the status of contact from voltage changes in the flexible cables on the carriage side that come into contact with two terminals of the printhead
with remote contact surfaces, the power terminals and GND terminal.
2-36
Chapter 2
Multi sensor
The photo-reflection-type multi sensor is composed of four LEDs and four light-sensitive sensors. It detects the leading edge, skewing, and width of media and is
used for adjustment of the registration, head height, and color calibration.
During head adjustment, the light reflected by the GAP LED is detected by two light-sensitive sensors (GAP-Far, GAP-Near) )to calculate the head height from the
difference between the measurements.
When color calibration is executed, the light reflected from the printed color chart by the three-colors LED (red, blue, green) is detected by the light-sensitive sensor
(COLOR-SNS), so the color correction is implemented on the basis of the readings.
During media detection, the light reflected by the diffuse reflection LED and regular reflection LED and the three-colors LED (red, blue, green) are detected by the
light-sensitive sensors (EDGE-SNS, COLOR-SNS).
Ink mist adhering to the sensor could deliver incorrect measurement readings when color calibration is executed. If the ink dot count exceeds a tolerance, the service
error (E194-4034) would occur. If it does, execute service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB. after the multi sensor has been replaced to clear
the dot count.
Light-sensitive sensor
Regular reflection LED (GAP-Far) Light-sensitive sensor
GAP LED (GAP-Near)
Light-sensitive sensor Three-colors LED
(EDGE-SNS) (red/green/blue)
Light-sensitive sensor
Diffuse reflection LED (COLOR-SNS)
Media
Platen
Media detection
Color and media detection
Head height detection
F-2-38
- Service mode: After SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB. has been carried out, pass paper to make sure that it is detected properly.
- If performing the calibration in parallel with the "Head Posi Adj." of the main menu, perform the "Head Posi Adj." first for the sake of higher color calibration
accuracy.
2-37
Chapter 2
2.5.4 Paper path system

0014-8916
Feed roller HP sensor

Feed roller Media sensor
encoder
F-2-39
Media sensor
The photoreflector-based media sensor detects the presence or absence of paper on the platen.
The sensor detects the presence of paper when it receives sensor light reflected upon the paper.
Feed roller HP sensor

The feed roller HP sensor detects transitions from white (transmitted), or a reference, to black (shielded) when the printer is switched on, thereby setting the home
position of feed roller eccentricity correction.
Feed roller encoder sensor
The feed roller encoder sensor is driven to detect the length of paper feeding for each rotation of the feed roller from encoder slits.
2-38
Chapter 2
2.5.5 Media take-up Unit

0013-8115
Media take-up on/off sensor
OFF
ON
Media take-up
paper detection sensor
F-2-40
Media take-up on/off sensor
The photointerrupter-based media take-up on/off sensor detects the switch status of the media take-up unit.
When the media take-up switch is set to ON, the sensor arm transmits the sensor light, power-on the media take-up unit.
When the media take-up switch is set to OFF, the sensor arm shields the sensor light, shutting down the media take-up unit.
Media take-up paper detection sensor

When the sensor light is shielded by a loop of printed paper, the media take-up motor rotates to take up the paper.
2.5.6 Others
0013-8116
F-2-41
This sensor detects the temperature and humidity around the printer so that the measured values are used for head height adjustment, idle discharge control, waste
ink evaporation amount calculation, and suction fan control.
2-39
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION
Contents
Contents
3.1 Transporting the Printer .............................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.1 Transporting the Printer........................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer ........................................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer............................................................................................................................................................ 3-14
Chapter 3
3.1 Transporting the Printer
3.1.1 Transporting the Printer
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer

0026-6829
When transporting the printer, the printhead must be capped and stay in the carriage.
In spite of this precaution, shocks incurred during transportation can damage the printhead.
Print the nozzle check pattern before making preparations for transporting the printer, pint the nozzle check pattern again after installing the printer at the new lo-
cation, and then compare the two printouts.
If any problem such as nozzle clogging cannot be resolved by printhead cleaning, replace the printhead with a new one.
This section describes how to transport the printer.

The procedure depends on the mode of transportation. Select the appropriate transportation level from the following transportation modes.
1. Transportation mode
- Moving the printer on the same floor with no difference in grade (without tilting the printer): LEVEL 0
- Moving the printer on floor where there is difference in grade or by truck (by tilting the printer): LEVEL 1
- Transporting the printer by plane or ship (tilting direction of printer is unpredictable): LEVEL 2
- Moving the printer on its end: LEVEL 3
- Transporting the printer in low temperature environment such as subzero: LEVEL 3
When lifting or moving the printer, be sure to hold the left and right carrying handles of the printer. If holding the cover, it may cause to deform the cover.
F-3-1
F-3-2
3-1
Chapter 3
The printer main unit weights approximately 110 kg. When moving the printer, have at least six people hold it from both sides taking care not to hurt their back.
F-3-3
Do not place or transport the printer with load placed only at the center of the printer. Otherwise the printer can be deformed or damaged.
F-3-4
3-2
Chapter 3
When tilting the printer, be sure to hold the carrying handles or the bottom's metal cover of the printer and place a cardboard or blanket on the floor to prevent
damage to the printer.
F-3-5
When tilting the printer, support the printer at bottom left and right side of the printer.
If the printer is supported at any other location, the printer may be damaged or deformed.
Top Bottom
Bottom Top
F-3-6
3-3
Chapter 3
a. LEVEL 0
Moving the printer on the same floor without difference in grade
Item Description
[Prep. MovePrinter] on the Main menu This need not be performed.
Allowed tilting angle Do not tilt.
Ink consumption No ink is consumed.
Ink tank It may be installed or removed.
Separation of main unit and stand They do not need to be separated.
Maintenance cartridge Install.
There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge.
Replacement of consumable parts There is no need to replace consumable parts.
Service support No service support is necessary.
Transportation procedure
1) Turn off the power and check that the heads are capped.
2) Open the upper cover and mount the belt stopper.
F-3-7
When mounting the belt stopper, be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure. If the carriage moves when the heads are capped, the rubber
part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and damage the print head.
3) Close the upper cover.

4) Remove the paper and roll holder.
5) Remove power cord and interface cable.
6) Unlock the casters on the stand and move the printer slowly.
If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the print head. Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully.
3-4
Chapter 3
b. LEVEL 1
Moving the printer on a floor with difference in grade or by truck
Item Description
[Prep. MovePrinter] on the Main menu Perform [LEVEL 1].
Allowed tilting angle Lengthwise: -30 to +30 degrees
Rotation: -10 to +10 degrees
Ink consumption No ink is consumed.

Ink tank It may be installed or removed.
Separation of main unit and stand They do not need to be separated.
Maintenance cartridge Install.
There is no need to open a new maintenance cartridge.
However, if there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink,
replace with new maintenance cartridge before transporting.
Replacement of consumable parts Replacement of consumable parts and resetting of counter may be necessary.
Service support If consumable parts must be replaced, service support is necessary.
1) If there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink, replace the maintenance cartridge.
3) From [Set/Adj. Menu] > [Prep. MovePrinter], select [LEVEL 1].
4) Press the [OK] key and perform [LEVEL 1] of [Prep. MovePrinter].
5) If the consumable parts counter is checked and a message to replace consumable parts appear, check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace
the necessary consumable part.
See "d. Replacing consumable parts during transportation."
Repeat [LEVEL 1] after replacing consumable parts and resetting the counter.
6) When the completion message of [Prep. MovePrinter] appears, turn off the power, and remove the power cord and interface cable.
7) Open the upper cover and raise the ejection guide.
F-3-8
3-5
Chapter 3
8) Remove the ejection support and lower the ejection guide.
F-3-9
9) Install the belt stopper.
F-3-10

11) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.
12) Unlock the casters on the stand and move the printer slowly.
3-6
Chapter 3
c-1. LEVEL 2
Transporting by plane or ship
Item Description
Ink consumption Approximately 1200ml of ink is consumed.

Ink tank Remove all ink tanks.
Separation of main unit and stand Separate.
Maintenance cartridge Replace with new maintenance cartridge before performing transporting procedure.
Two new maintenance cartridges must be provided.
(One for disposing waste ink and one to be installed new maintenance cartridge during transportation)
3-7
Chapter 3
c-2. LEVEL 3
Moving the printer on its end
Transporting in low temperature environment such as subzero
Item Description
Ink consumption Approximately 1200ml of ink is consumed.

Ink tank Remove all ink tanks.
Separation of main unit and stand Separate.
Maintenance cartridge Replace with new maintenance cartridge before performing transporting procedure.
Three new maintenance cartridges must be provided.
(Two for disposing waste ink and one to be installed new maintenance cartridge during transportation)
1) If there is a message instructing to replace the maintenance cartridge or check the remaining ink, replace the maintenance cartridge.
3) From [Set/Adj. Menu] > [Prep. MovePrinter], select [LEVEL 2] or [LEVEL 3].
4) Press the [OK] key and perform [LEVEL 2] or [LEVEL 3] of [Prep. MovePrinter].
5) If the counter is checked and a message to replace consumable parts appear, check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace the necessary
consumable part.
See "d. Replacing consumable parts during transportation."
Repeat [LEVEL 2] or [LEVEL 3] after replacing consumable parts and resetting the counter.
6) Follow the displayed message and open the left and right ink tank covers.
F-3-11
3-8
Chapter 3
7) Raise the ink tank lock lever and remove all ink tanks.
F
F
PM
M
BK
F-3-12
Put the removed ink tanks in the plastic bag with the ink supply part [1] upward and close the opening.
[1]
F-3-13
8) Return the ink tank lock lever and close the ink tank cover.
Ink drainage is performed automatically. Replace the maintenance cartridge when the cartridge replacement message appears.
When transporting the printer, install the new maintenance cartridge to avoid the ink leakage.
9) When the completion message of [Prep. MovePrinter] appears, turn off the power, and remove the power cord and interface cable.
10) Open the upper cover and raise the ejection guide.
F-3-14
3-9
Chapter 3
11) Remove the ejection support and lower the ejection guide.
F-3-15
12) Install the belt stopper.
F-3-16

14) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.
15) If a basket is installed, remove the basket.
16) Remove the printer from the stand.
Hold the transporting handles at left and right bottom of the printer with three persons on each side and separate the printer from the stand.
17) Reverse the assembly procedure to disassemble the stand and media take-up unit as necessary and pack them.
18) Pack the printer and transport.
3-10
Chapter 3
d. Replacing consumable parts during transportation

During [Prep. MovePrinter], if a message to replace consumable parts appear, check the consumable parts counter from service mode and replace the necessary
consumable parts that is over the threshold value of counter in the following table.
See "Service mode" about how to check the counter.
The consumable parts to be replaced and counter to be reset depends on the [LEVEL].
[8]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-3-17
Service Mode Threshold value of

No Part number Name Q'ty Level x (Main menu)
PARTS xx counter (Unit: ml)
[1] QL2-2110 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT 1 Wia-1 581 1, 2, 3
[2] QL2-2108 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT (L) 2 Wia-3/Wia-4 143
[3] QL2-1650 WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT (S) 1 Wia-5 47
[4] QM3-3069 SUCTION FAN UNIT 1 Wia-6 152
[5] QL2-1663 DUCT 1
[6] QM3-7025 FAN UNIT 2 Mi-1 241 2, 3
[7] QM3-1033 INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT (L) 1 If there is waste ink, perform waste ink disposal or parts
[8] QM3-1034 INK SUPPLY MOUNT UNIT (R) 1 replacement. And confirm that the ink leakage has not caused to
the surrounding area of ink supply mount unit.
When replacing consumable parts, check for leaking waste ink. When replacing each consumable part, be careful of leaking waste ink especially from the marked
area [A] and avoid tilting the part when removing.
[A]
F-3-18
[1] WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT
3-11
Chapter 3
[A]
F-3-19
[2] WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT (L)

[3] WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT (S)
[A]
[A]
F-3-20
[4] SUCTION FAN UNIT
[A]
[A]
F-3-21
[5] DUCT
3-12
Chapter 3
[A]
F-3-22
[6] FAN UNIT
3-13
Chapter 3
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer

0020-5722
1. Installing after transporting by LEVEL 0 or LEVEL 1.

If ink drainage was not performed when transporting by LEVEL 0 or 1, remove the belt stopper and attach the power cord and interface cable after moving the
printer to the installation location, and then check the operation of the printer (with test pattern).
2. Installing after transporting by LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3.

If ink drainage was performed when transporting by LEVEL 2 or LEVEL 3, follow the installation procedure which is nearly identical to the procedure when in-
stalling for the first time.
3-14
Chapter 3
3-15
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
Contents
Contents
4.1 Service Parts .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1.1 Service Parts ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly ....................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled...................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually.................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink .................................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.4 External Covers ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.5 Drive Unit................................................................................................................................................................ 4-14
4.3.6 Carriage Unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.7 Ink Tube Unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.3.8 Feeder Unit............................................................................................................................................................. 4-22
4.3.9 Purge Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.3.10 Ink Tank Unit......................................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.3.11 Linear Encoder ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.12 Head Management Sensor................................................................................................................................... 4-28
4.3.13 PCBs..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.14 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit .............................................................................................................. 4-30
4.3.15 Opening and closing ink supply valves................................................................................................................. 4-31
4.3.16 Draining the ink..................................................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.4 Applying the Grease ................................................................................................................................. 4-33
4.4.1 Applying the Grease ............................................................................................................................................... 4-33
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items .................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List ............................................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor ................................................................................ 4-36
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder ...................................................................... 4-36
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor.................................................................................... 4-36
Chapter 4
4.1 Service Parts
4.1.1 Service Parts

0012-6508
The service parts indicated below require careful handling.
1. Keep all packages with the warning not to turn over.

Pay careful attention to all individually packaged service part (carriage unit, purge unit, ink tank unit, and other parts) boxes marked "This side up" and handle
appropriately.
F-4-1
4-1
Chapter 4
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly
0014-8946
See the Parts Catalog for the disassembly and reassembly procedures. The following four main units do not apply.
Main Units:
1. Carriage unit
2. Ink tube unit
3. Purge unit
4. Ink tank unit
The parts layout illustration in the Parts Catalog shows the figure numbers associated with the disassembly procedure for each product.
Main unit disassembly and assembly flows

* Ink drainage in the dotted lines may be performed using either the automatic or manual ink drain procedure.
1. Carriage Unit Disassembly Flow

<Legend > c: Connector h: Hook s: Screw
Printer
Automatic ink drain Move the carriage to

above the platen
Left/right circle cover (L) (h1)
Left/right printheads
Left/right circle cover (S) (h1)
Left/right joint bases
Left/right side covers (s3, h2)
Ink tube cover (s2)
Upper left/upper right covers
(h1) Ink tube joint
Rear cover right (s4) Carriage PCB cover (s4)
Rear cover left (s2) Flexible cable (c3)
Left/right tank cover units Head management sensor

(s3) (s1)
Open left/right ink tank units Pulley base (s3)

(s4)
Lift unit (s5)
Upper rear cover (s5)
Cutter unit
Upper cover
Carriage unit
Manual ink drain
F-4-2
4-2
Chapter 4
2. Ink Tube Unit Disassembly Flow

Printer
Left/right printhead
Automatic ink drain
Left/right circle covers (L) (h1) Left/right joint bases
Left/right circle covers (S) (h1) Ink tube cover (s2)
Left/right side covers (s3, h2) Ink tube joint
Carriage PCB cover (s4)

Upper left/upper right covers
(h1)
Flexible cable (c3)
Rear cover right (s4)

(s1)
Rear cover left (s2)
Pulley base (s3)
Left/right tank cover unit (s3)
Lift unit (s5)
Open left/right ink tank units
(s4) Cutter unit
Upper rear cover (s5) Carriage unit
Upper cover Flexible cable (c5)
Manual ink drain Cable fixer base (s3)
Move the carriage to

Ink tube unit
above the platen
F-4-3
3. Purge Unit Disassembly Flow

Printer
Right circle cover (L) (h1)
Right circle cover (S) (h1)
Right side covers (s3, h2)
Upper right cover (h1)
Operation panel (h1, c2)
Right front cover (s2)

above the platen
Purge unit (c1, s3)

F-4-4
4-3
Chapter 4
4. Ink Tank unit Disassembly Flow

Printer
Right circle cover (L) (h1)
Right circle cover (S) (h1)
Right side covers (s3, h2)

Automatic ink drain
Left/right tank cover units
(s3) Left/right tank cover units
(s3)

above the platen
Manual ink drain
Drain the ink in subtanks
Remove the left/right

ink tube joints
Ink tank unit(c5, s2)

F-4-5
4-4
Chapter 4
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly
4.3.1 Note: Items that should never be disassembled

0012-6514
Assemblies that should never be removed after initial factory adjustments, are indicated by the presence of red screws.
Under no circumstance should these red screws be loosened or removed. Removing these screws will render the printer out of alignment forever.
F-4-6
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually

0014-8950
When moving the carriage, hold it by the handle [1] shown below.
Move the carriage as required during assembly and disassembly to prevent the carriage from contacting the parts to be removed.
You cannot move the carriage when capping has been performed. Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly
> Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit to remove the caps, and then move the carriage.
[1]
F-4-7
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink

0014-8953
When disassembling the following units, drain the ink completely, to prevent ink leakage. For ink drain instructions, refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY >
Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Draining the ink.
[1] Carriage unit

Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Carriage unit.
[2] Ink tube unit
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly > Ink tube unit.
[3] Ink tank unit
Refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Notes on Disassembly and Reassembly >Ink tank unit.
4-5
Chapter 4
4.3.4 External Covers

0014-8958
a) Left circle cover (L)/Right circle cover (L)

Removing the left circle cover (L)/right circle cover (L)
1) To remove circle cover (L) [1], insert flathead screwdriver [2] at the position shown in the figure to remove claw [3] and turn the cover forward to remove.
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-8
Installing the left circle cover (L)/right circle cover (L)
1) Install circle cover (L) [1] with its part [2] inserted in arrow mark [3] of the right side cover and turn the cover backward to install.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-9
b) Left circle cover (S)/Right circle cover (S)
Removing the left circle cover (S)/right circle cover (S)
1) Remove circle cover (S) [1] by turning it forward to remove the hook.
[1]
F-4-10
4-6
Chapter 4
Installing the left circle cover (S)/right circle cover (S)

1) Install circle cover (S) [1] with its part [2] inserted in part [3] of the side cover and turn the cover rearward to install.
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-11
c) Left side cover/Right side cover
Removing the left side cover/right side cover
1) To remove left and right side covers [1], remove left and right circle covers (L) and left and right circle covers (S).
2) Remove three screws [2] and two hooks [3], and remove the side cover by opening its bottom side.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-12
4-7
Chapter 4
d) Operation panel
Removing the operation panel
1) To remove operation panel [1], open the upper cover and raise the ejection guides. Remove two claws [2] using a flathead screwdriver and disconnect connector
[3] and ground wire [4].
[1] [2]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-4-13
e) Upper left cover/Upper right cover
Removing the upper left cover/upper right cover
1) To remove upper left cover/upper right cover [1], remove left and right circle covers (L), left and right circle covers (S), left and right side covers and operation
panel.
2) Insert a flathead screwdriver at the position shown in the figure to remove hook [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-14
4-8
Chapter 4
f) Right front cover

Removing the right front cover
1) To remove right front cover [1], remove right circle cover (L), right circle cover (S), right side cover, upper right cover and the operation panel.
2) Remove two screws [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-15
g) Left rear cover/Right rear cover
Removing the left rear cover/right rear cover
1) To remove right rear cover [1], remove four screws [2].
2) To remove left rear cover [3], remove the right rear cover and two screws [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
F-4-16
4-9
Chapter 4
h) Left lower rear cover/Right lower rear cover, filter cover

Removing the left lower rear cover/right lower rear cover and filter cover
1) To remove right lower rear cover [1], remove four screws [2].
2) To remove left lower rear cover [3], remove two screws [4].
3) To remove filter cover [5], remove screw [6].
[2]
[4] [3] [1]
[5]
[6]
[2]
F-4-17
i) Left/Right ink tank cover units
Removing the left/right ink tank cover units
1) To remove ink tank cover unit [1], remove three screws [2], open tank cover [3] and remove two hooks [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-18
4-10
Chapter 4
j) Left/Right ink tank units

Opening the left/right ink tank units
1) To open the left/right ink tank units, remove left/right circle covers (L), left/right circle covers (S), left/right side covers, upper left/right covers and left/right ink
tank cover units.
2) Remove two screws [1].
3) Remove screw [2] from the support plate at inner side of the printer.
4) Remove screw [4] from the support plate [3] at outer side of the printer, loosen screw [5] and slide the support plate to open the ink tank unit.
(The following figure is the case of the left ink tank unit.)
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
F-4-19
The ink tank units will lock themselves when they are opened to the maximum allowable angle.
Be sure to open the ink tank unit to their maximum allowable angle to prevent them from turning over.
k) Upper rear cover

Removing the upper rear cover
1) To remove the upper rear cover, remove left/right circle covers (L), left/right circle covers (S), left/right side covers, upper left/right covers, left/right rear covers
and left/right ink tank cover units and then open the left/right ink tanks.
2) Remove two screws [1] on front side of the printer and three screws [2] on the rear side, and then remove upper rear cover [3].
[1]
[3] [1]
[2]
F-4-20
4-11
Chapter 4
Note on installing the upper rear cover

1) Fit three rear-panel screws [1] into screw holes on the right side.
[1]
F-4-21
l) Upper cover
Removing the upper cover
1) To remove the upper cover, remove left/right circle covers (L), left/right circle covers (S), left/right side covers, upper left/right covers, left/right rear covers,
right cover unit and upper rear cover.
2) Remove upper cover [2] while opening left/right arm stays [1] outward one by one.
[1]
[2] [2] [1]
[2]
F-4-22
4-12
Chapter 4
m) Release lever
Removing the release lever
1) To remove release lever [1], remove the purge unit and then remove the release lever. To do so, keep pinch roller [2] pressurized to ease the work of phase
alignment during gear installation.
Reinstalling the release lever

1) To install the release lever, align the gear of the release lever with mark [3] (phase) in the receiving gear.
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-23
4-13
Chapter 4
4.3.5 Drive Unit

0014-8962
a) Feed motor
Removing the feed motor
1) To remove feed motor [1], loosen four screws [2] and remove timing belt [3] and spring [4].
2) Remove four loosened screws [2] to release feed motor [1] and remove the connector.
Reinstalling the feed motor
To reassemble the feed roller drive timing belt [3] into position, set the tension of timing belt [3] by adjusting the pressure of spring [4]. Then, fix feed motor [1].
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[2]
F-4-24
b) Action to take after replacing the feed roller encoder and feed roller
This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity (that is, variations in the rate of paper feed from rotation to rotation) corrected for enhanced media feed ac-
curacy. When the feed roller HP sensor or feed roller encoder and feed roller pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced, therefore,
they should require adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions to launch automatic adjustment:
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING
- Media type: Glossy photo paper
- Media size (width): 36 inches or wider
If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual ad-
justment.
Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2
- Media type: Gloss photo paper
Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.
4-14
Chapter 4
4.3.6 Carriage Unit

0025-0362
a) Removing the carriage unit

1) Drain the ink. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Draining the ink.
2) Turn off the power and move the carriage to above the platen. If the carriage is locked at its home position, insert a Phillips screwdriver from the right side into
hole [1] in the shaft of the lifting unit in the purge unit and turn it counterclockwise. This will lower cap [2] and lock pin [3], allowing the carriage to be moved.
[2] [3]
[1]
F-4-25
3) Remove the printheads.
4) Release the ink tube from the guide, detach four link levers [1] from the printhead fixer lever, than remove two joint bases [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-26
4-15
Chapter 4
Cover the joints in the ink tube, as with a PVC bag, to keep inks from splashing from them.
F-4-27
5) Remove two screws [1] and ink tube cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-28
6) Remove four screws [1] and open carriage relay PCB cover [2].
[1] [1]
[2]
F-4-29
7) Disconnect five flexible cables from the carriage relay PCB.
4-16
Chapter 4
Never peel off tape [1] that fixes the ink tube when detaching the joints of the ink tube on the upper part of the carriage or when removing the joint base from the
carriage.
[1]
F-4-30
8) Twist off belt fixer knob [1] to loosen the belt, and remove spring [2], guide [3] and pulley [4].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
F-4-31
9) Release carriage belt from the pulley of the carriage motor.
4-17
Chapter 4
10) Remove two screws [1] and pulley base [2].

11) Remove screw [3] and the connector [4] to release head management sensor unit [5].
12) Remove five screws [6] and lift unit [7].
[1]
[3] [5]
[2]
[4]
[6]
[6] [7]
F-4-32
13) Remove the purge unit.
14) Remove the cutter unit, and lay the caterpillar of the ink tube unit on its side, and then remove the carriage from the right side of the printer.
To remove the carriage unit, pull it out of position keeping the carriage unit level with care not to harm the linear scale. Flaws on the linear scale could result in
malfunctioning.
When replacing the carriage unit, see "4.4.1 Applying the Grease" and follow the direction.
4-18
Chapter 4
b) Mounting the carriage belt

To install the carriage belt, put in the point of the belt to the interior of the groove [1], and have all the cogs of carriage belt [3] engaged with belt stopper [2].
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-33
c) Note on replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor
When either carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced, be sure to replace the multi sensor reference plate(QL2-8099: MOUNT, SENSOR ADJUSTING) as
well.
d) Action to take after replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor
Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in each printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical
axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and sensor calibration adjusted prior to shipment. When the carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced,
1) Carry out the following service mode without media loading.

- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.
2) Load the following media.
Media type : Photo glossy paper
Media size : Media having a width equal too larger than that of A2-size paper
3) Carry out the following service mode.
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS
e) Action following the replacement of the carriage unit, carriage motor, carriage belt or linear encoder sensor
After the carriage unit or carriage motor or carriage belt or linear encoder sensor have been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.
- Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > CR MOTOR COG
f) Precautions against handling the carriage shaft
The carriage shaft is functionally important part. Therefore, be sure to note the following points.
- Do not touch the shaft.
- Do not allow the shaft to get scratched or marked.
- Do not apply the grease to the shaft.
4-19
Chapter 4
4.3.7 Ink Tube Unit

0014-8966
a) Removing ink tube unit

1) Drain the ink. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly >Draining the ink.
2) Remove the carriage unit. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Carriage Unit.
3) Disconnect five flexible cables from the main controller PCB.
4) Remove the flexible cable leading to the carriage PCB cover from the guide.
5) Remove three screws [1] and release ink tube fixer base [2] from the frame.
[1]
[2]
F-4-34
6) Remove joint [1] of the ink tube unit from left and right ink tank unit to remove ink tube unit [2].
[2] [1]
F-4-35
Never peel off tape [1] that fixes the ink tube when detaching the joints of the ink tube on the upper part of the carriage or when removing the joint base from the
carriage.
When replacing the ink tube unit, be sure that the tapes [1] are posted to the new ink tube unit.
[1]
F-4-36
4-20
Chapter 4
b) Reassembling ink tube units

When the ink tube unit has been replaced, turn on the power without mounting the printhead and the ink tanks.
Then, mount the printhead and ink tanks as directed by message guidance.
After detaching the joint of the ink tube unit, the joint might become easy to come off by the ink that has adhered to it.
In that case, please wash the joint by alcohol and remove the adhering ink.
F-4-37
4-21
Chapter 4
4.3.8 Feeder Unit

0014-8972
a) Handling the feed roller
The feed roller is a functionally important part. Therefore, be sure to note the following points when handling the roller.
- Do not hold the roller with one hand or warp its shape.
- Do not touch the roller surface (coated surface).
- Do not allow the roller to get scratched or marked.
- Hold the roller at two points; location D and one of the locations A, B, or C as shown in the figure below.
F-4-38
b) Action to take after replacing the feed roller encoder and feed roller
This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity (that is, variations in the rate of paper feed from rotation to rotation) corrected for enhanced media feed ac-
curacy. When the feed roller HP sensor or feed roller encoder and feed roller pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced, therefore,
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING
Media type: Glossy photo paper
Media size (width): 36 inches or wider
justment.
Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2
Media type: Gloss photo paper
Media size (width): 36 inches or wider
4-22
Chapter 4
4.3.9 Purge Unit

0014-8978
a) Removing the purge unit

1) Turn off the power and move the carriage to above the platen. If the carriage is locked at its home position, insert a Phillips screwdriver from the right side into
hole [1] in the shaft of the lift unit in the purge unit and turn it counterclockwise. This will lower cap [2] and lock pin [3], allowing the carriage to be moved.
[2] [3]
[1]
F-4-39
2) Remove connector [1] and three screws [2] and then remove purge unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-40
4-23
Chapter 4
4.3.10 Ink Tank Unit

0014-8979
a) Removing ink tank units

1) Drain the ink. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Draining the ink.
2) Detach the joint [1] between the ink tube unit and ink tank unit.
3) Remove four screws [2] and five connectors [3] and then remove the ink tank unit.
[2] [3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-4-41
After detaching the joint between the ink tube unit and the ink tube of the ink tank unit, the joint might become easy to come off by the ink that has adhered to it.
In that case, please wash the joint by alcohol and remove the adhering ink.
F-4-42
4-24
Chapter 4
b) Reinstalling ink tank units

The left and right ink tank units are installed to different positions at ink supply mount unit [1].
Install the right ink tank unit at screw position [2].
Install the left ink tank unit at screw position [3].
(Installing position of each ink tank units are inner side of the printer.)
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-4-43
4-25
Chapter 4
c) Removing the valve motor unit

1) To remove the valve motor unit, remove the ink tank cover unit.
2) Remove three screws [1], two connectors [2] and bearing [3], and then remove valve motor unit [4].
[2] [4]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-4-44
4-26
Chapter 4
4.3.11 Linear Encoder

0014-8985
a) Removing the linear encoder

1) Move the carriage to above the platen.
2) Remove two screws [1] and upper rear stay [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-45
3) Remove two screws [1] and linear encoder [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-46
4-27
Chapter 4
4.3.12 Head Management Sensor

0014-8988
a) Removing the head management sensor

1) Remove the screw [2] and disconnect the connector [3] to remove the head management sensor [1].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-47
b) Action to take after replacing the head management sensor
Because the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical axis corrected to adjust
the non-discharging nozzle detection position prior to shipment. When the head management sensor has been replaced, it should require adjustment.
Execute service mode under the following conditions:
SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.
4-28
Chapter 4
4.3.13 PCBs
0023-3347
Do not replace the main controller PCB and the maintenance cartridge relay PCB (ROM board) at the same time.
Both PCBs hold vital information, such as settings and a carriage drive time. Before either PCB is replaced, such information is temporarily saved through internal
communication with the other PCB and is automatically written to the new PCB when it is installed. For this reason, the two PCBs cannot be replaced at the same
time. To replace both PCBs, work in order of (a) > (b).
When the main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge relay PCB have been replaced with service parts, check that the latest version of firmware is installed in
them.
If not, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Reference:
a) Replacing the maintenance cartridge relay PCB (ROM board)

1) Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug.
2) Replace the maintenance cartridge relay PCB.
3) Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the [Load] and [Navigate] keys. (Start the printer in PCB replacement mode.)
4) Release the key, but not before making sure that "Initializing" appears on the display. (The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode.)
5) Wait until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.
6) Select MC BOARD and press the [OK] key.
7) Turn off the power, but not before making sure that "Power off" appears on the display.
8) Turn on the power.
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
b) Replacing the main controller PCB

1) Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug.
2) Replace the main controller PCB.
3) Reconnect the power plug and turn on the power while pressing the [Load] and [Navigate] keys. (Start the printer in PCB replacement mode.)
4) Release the key, but not before making sure that "Initializing" appears on the display. (The message lamp lights when printer enters PCB replacement mode.)
5) Wait until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.
6) Select CPU BOARD and press the [OK] key.
7) Turn off the power, but not before making sure that "Power off" appears on the display.
8) Turn on the power.
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
4-29
Chapter 4
4.3.14 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit

0028-9713
This section explains how to open the cap and ink supply valve.
To move the carriage with the power off, you need to release the carriage lock pin and cap.
a) Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock Pin by service mode

After entering the service mode, execute the following mode.
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > FUNCTION > CR UNLOCK
b) Opening the Cap/Releasing the Carriage Lock Pin/Moving the Wiper Unit manually
1) Remove right circle cover (L), right circle cover (S), right side cover and upper right cover.
2) Insert a Phillips screwdriver from the right side into hole [1] in the shaft of the lift unit in the purge unit and turn it counterclockwise. This will lower cap [2] and
lock pin [3], allowing the carriage to be moved.
The wiper unit will move in sync with the motion of the cap and lock pin.
[2] [3]
[1]
F-4-48
4-30
Chapter 4
4.3.15 Opening and closing ink supply valves

0014-8992
a) Opening and closing ink supply valves
1) Remove the ink tank cover unit.

2) Press valve lever [1] with a finger to open the ink supply valve.
[1]
F-4-49
- If the printhead fixer lever is released with the ink supply valve to an ink tube open while the tube is filled with an ink, the ink in the tube could flow backward to
the ink tank unit, leaking through the hollow needle in the ink tank.
- If an ink supply valve remains open, as on occurrence of an ink supply valve open/close error, remove the valve motor unit and (see Disassembly/Reassembly >
Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink Tank Units) and close the ink supply valve.
4-31
Chapter 4
4.3.16 Draining the ink

0025-0404
There are two ways to drain the ink passage of inks: automatic and manual.
Be sure to drain the ink from the ink passage to prevent ink leakage before disassembling any component of the ink passage or reshipping the printer.
1. Automatic Ink Drain

Execute Automatic Ink Drain by selecting [Set/Adj. Menu] > [Prep.MovePrinter] from the main menu.
Execute Automatic Ink Drain once again if the printer shuts down due to a power failure or any other trouble before the operation completes.
2. Manual ink drainage

Drain the ink passage of inks manually if any electrical component in the printer fails or firmware malfunctions or if the printer fails to be powered on.
1) Remove right circle cover (L), right circle cover (S), right side covers, left/ right the ink tank cover units. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on
Disassembly/Reassembly > External Covers.
2) Remove the ink tanks.
3) Move the carriage to above the platen. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Opening the caps and moving the wiper unit.
4) Release the printhead fixer lever.
5) Open the ink supply valves to allow the inks to flow into the subtanks.
3. Draining the ink in subtanks

1) Remove the ink tank units. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink Tank Unit.
2) Open the ink supply valve. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly > Opening and closing ink supply valves.
3) Drain the ink in the subtank from the ink tube [1] to the container while inclining the ink tank unit to the rear slowly.
[1]
F-4-50
MEMO:
When supplying the ink to the printer after the manual ink drainage, return the printer to the normal condition, and then turn ON the power supply without the
printhead installed. And according to the message, execute the installation of the printhead.
4-32
Chapter 4
4.4 Applying the Grease
4.4.1 Applying the Grease

0014-9023
Some parts require application of grease when replaced. Apply the grease(special tool) listed below.
Smear the grease lightly and evenly with a flat brush or the like.
For the printer disassembly/reassembly method, refer to "DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY" and "parts catalog".
Do not apply the grease to locations in which not designated grease may cause poor print quality. Take particular care that grease do not get onto the wiper, cap,
carriage shaft and the linear scale.
No. Location Grease Quantity Remarks

1 The joint base rail and rib of carriage unit FLOIL G-5000H Smear the grease
lightly.
2 Two feed roller backup FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 12mg Don't apply to central backup with
bearing.
Bushing FLOIL G-5000H Smear the grease
lightly.
3 Feed roller bearing FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 24mg Apply if remove bearing from a feed
roller.
4 Pinch roller release cam three points x 10 parts FLOIL G-5000H Smear the grease
lightly.
5 Upper cover stay shaft hole FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 24mg
The gear shaft of the upper cover stay gear FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 24mg
Upper cover stay shaft end FLOIL G-5000H Approx. 24mg
The gear tooth face of upper cover stay FLOIL G-5000H Smear the grease
lightly.
1. The joint base rail [1] and the rib [2] of the carriage unit.
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-51
4-33
Chapter 4
2. Two feed roller backup [1]/ bushing [2]

3. Feed roller bearing [3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-52
4. Pinch roller release cam [1] three points x 10 parts
[1]
F-4-53
4-34
Chapter 4
5. Upper cover stay shaft hole [1]/ gear shaft [2]/ shaft end [3]/ gear tooth face [4]
[1]
[2] [4] [3]

F-4-54
4-35
Chapter 4
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List

0023-5489
The following adjustment procedures need to be performed when parts have been replaced or removed and then reinstalled:
Adjustment item Adjustment timing

Multi sensor recalibration Multi sensor replacement/removal
Carriage unit replacement/removal
Adjusting feed roller eccentricity Feed roller
Feed roller encoder
Head management sensor recalibration Head management sensor replacement/removal
Carriage unit replacement/removal
Carriage motor recalibration Carriage unit replacement/removal
Carriage motor replacement/removal
Carriage belt replacement/removal
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor

0025-0406
a) Note on replacing the carriage unit and the multi sensor

- The multi sensor reference unit (QL2-8099: MOUNT, SENSOR ADJUSTING) must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi sensor is
being replaced.
b) Multi Sensor Recalibration

Because the distance between the multi sensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in each printhead) is varied from one unit to another, the printer has its optical
axis corrected and paper gap adjustment sensor gain and calibration adjusted prior to shipment. When the carriage unit or multi sensor has been replaced, they should
require adjustment.
1) Carry out the following service mode without media loading.

- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.
2) Load the following media.
Media type : Photo glossy paper
Media size : Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A2-size paper
3) Carry out the following service mode.
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS
c) Carriage Motor Adjustment

- After the carriage and carriage motor and carriage belt and linear encoder sensor has been removed or replaced, execute the following service mode.
Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > CR MOTOR COG
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder
0032-0782
Feed roller eccentricity is factory-adjusted (correction of variation in the paper feed amount per rotation). It is necessary to adjust feed roller eccentricity after re-
placing the feed roller or feed roller encoder.
In the service mode, perform automatic adjustment of feed roller eccentricity.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING
- Media type: Photo glossy paper
justment.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor

0013-7146
Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging
detection position. When you have replaced the head management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance be-
tween the head management sensor and the carriage unit, readjustment is required.
Perform the readjustment in the service mode.
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.
4-36
Chapter 4
4-37
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
Contents
Contents
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts ....................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Consumable Parts ...................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Periodic Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Chapter 5
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts

0012-6595
Level Periodic Replacement Part

User None
Service Personnel None
5.2 Consumable Parts
5.2.1 Consumable Parts

0030-4814
Consumables Service Mode

Life sheets/
Name Part number Q'ty PARTS xx States (Error Code)
A0
Service WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT QL2-2110 1 20000 Wia-1 OK/W1/E146-4001
WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT (L) QL2-2108 2 20000 Wia-3/Wia-4
WASTE INK ABSORBER UNIT (S) QL2-1650 1 20000 Wia-5
SUCTION FAN UNIT QM3-3069 1 20000 Wia-6
DUCT QL2-1663 1 20000
CARRIAGE UNIT QM4-8199 1 20000 CR-1/CR-2/ OK/W1/W2
CR-3
MOUNT, SENSOR ADJUSTING QL2-8099 1 20000 CR-1/CR-2/
CR-3/CR-5
SCALE, LINEAR QC3-1877 1 25000 CR-2
TUBE UNIT QM3-9943 1 20000 CR-4 OK/W1/E144-4047
MULTI SENSOR UNIT QM4-8018 1 20000 CR-5 OK/W1/W2
MS-1
PURGE UNIT QM3-7018 1 25000 PG-1 OK/W1/E141-4046
HEAD MANAGEMENT SENSOR QM3-1056 1 50000 HMa-1 OK/W1/E194-404A
MOTOR, CARRIAGE QK1-2868 1 28000 MT-1 OK/W1/W2
FEED MOTOR ASS'Y QM4-8113 1 50000 PL-1
FAN UNIT QM3-7025 2 50000 Mi-1 OK/W1/E146-4001
User See "Product Overview> Features> Consumables"
- Maintenance Kit
Kit name Parts number Life Counter name

MAINTENANCE KIT Wia QY6-1528 20000 Wia
MAINTENANCE KIT CR QY6-1531 20000 CR1/CR4
After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.
5-1
Chapter 5
5.3 Periodic Maintenance
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance

0012-6597
Level Periodic maintenance

User Cleaning of ink mist and other substances(about once each month
Service personnel None
a) Printer cleaning
To keep up with print quality and prevent troubles, clean the printer about once each month.
1) Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away any dirt or paper dust from the Paper Feed Slot [1], power cord plug, and so on. Dry these
parts with a dry cloth.
[1]
F-5-1
2) Open the Top Cover.
3) If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes on the Platen [1], the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves [2], or cutter guide [3], use the included Cleaning Brush
[4] to wipe it away.
[4]
[2] [3] [1]

F-5-2
MEMO:
If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.
5-2
Chapter 5
4) Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it. Wipe away any ink residue on the Top Cover Roller [1], all over
the Platen [2], the Pinch Roller Unit [3], the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves [4], the Ejection Guide [5], the cutter guide [6], the maintenance-jet tray [7], and so on.
[7]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2] [4] [6] [3]

F-5-3
5-3
Chapter 5
- Do not dry the interiors of the top cover with a dry cloth. Electrostatic charges could make the internal components susceptible to dirt, resulting in degraded print
quality.
- Do not use flammable solvents, such as thinner and benzine, on the printer. Solvents coming into contact with any electrical parts inside the printer could result
in fires or electrical shock hazards.
- Do not touch linear scale [1] and carriage shaft [2].
[1]
[2]
F-5-4
5-4
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
Contents
Contents
6.1 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement............................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Main controller PCB................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB................................................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.3 Head relay PCB...................................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.3 Version Up ................................................................................................................................................ 6-29
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool ............................................................................................................................................ 6-29
6.4 Service Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 6-34
6.4.1 Tool List .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-34
Chapter 6
6.1 Troubleshooting
6.1.1 Outline
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting

0013-1940
1. Outline
Troubles subject to troubleshooting are classified into those shown on the display (warning, error, and service call) and those not shown on the display.
The code of warning and error is shown by combining alphanumeric characters of eight digits and four digits.
The code of service call error is shown by the initial character of "E" and combining alphanumeric characters of three digits and four digits.
No code number is displayed when a warning occurs. Selecting [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] in service mode allows you to check the warning
log.
2. Precautions for Troubleshooting

1) Check the environmental conditions and the media used for printing.
2) Before performing troubleshooting, make sure that all connectors and cables are connected properly.
3) When servicing the printer with the external cover removed and the AC power supplied, be extremely careful to avoid electric shock and shorting electrical
devices.
4) In the following sections, the troubleshooting steps are described such that the component related to the most probable cause of the problem will be repaired or
replaced first, being followed by components with less problem probability. If multiple components have the same problem probability, the steps are described
beginning with the easiest one.
After performing each step, check to see if the problem has been resolved by making test prints. If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
5) After completion of the troubleshooting, check that all connectors and cables have been reconnected and screws have been tightened firmly.
6) Whenever you have performed replacement or repair services, make test prints to check whether the problem has been resolved.
7) When connecting with the printer by using the LAN cable at the service working, be sure to enter the service mode to recognize the printer correctly.
6-1
Chapter 6
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement
6.2.1 Main controller PCB

0025-0536
1 1
J3003
J3001
1 1
J3501 J3601
J1801
1 1
J3502 J3602 1
J2801
J3150 1
1
1 A1
J3910
J3401
1 J2501
B1
J1102
J2601
1
A1
J1001
1 J3201 J2402
1 A1
B1 1
1 1
J1202 J1201 J3301 J3002 J2502 J2702 J2701
1 1 1 1 B1
F-6-1
T-6-1
J1001
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Function
1 VBUS IN USB VBUS(+5V)
2 D- IN/OUT USB data(-)
3 D+ IN/OUT USB data(+)
4 AGND - USB GND
5 FGND - GND (Connector shell)
6 FGND - GND (Connector shell)
T-6-2
J1102
1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 GND - GND
4 +3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
10 N.C. - N.C.
11 GND - GND
12 /PME IN Power management enable signal
13 /INTA IN Interrupt signal
14 GND - GND
15 /RST OUT PCI Reset signal
16 CLK OUT PCI Clock signal
17 /GNT OUT Ground signal
18 GND - GND
19 /REQ IN Request signal
20 AD31 IN/OUT Address and data signal
24 GND - GND
6-2
Chapter 6
J1102
29 /CBE3 IN/OUT Bus command and byte enable signal
30 IDSEL OUT Inisharaization device select signal
31 GND - GND
32 GND - GND
37 GND - GND
42 /CBE2 OUT Bus command and byte enable signal
43 GND - GND
44 /FRAME IN/OUT Cycle frame signal
45 /IRDY IN/OUT Initiator ready signal
46 /TRDY IN/OUT Target ready signal
47 /DEVSEL IN/OUT Device select signal
48 GND - GND
49 /STOP IN/OUT Stop signal
50 /LOCK IN/OUT Lock signal
51 /PERP IN/OUT Parity error signal
52 /SERR IN/OUT System error signal
53 PAR IN/OUT Parity signal
55 GND - GND
56 GND - GND
61 GND - GND
67 GND - GND
72 GND - GND
77 GND - GND
78 HDD_LED - N.C.
79 +5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
85 GND - GND
86 GND - GND
87 GND - GND
88 GND - GND
6-3
Chapter 6
T-6-3
J1201
1 GND - GND
2 TXP OUT Transmission Data
3 TXN OUT Transmission Data
4 GND - GND
5 RXN IN Receive Data
6 RXP IN Receive Data
7 GND - GND
T-6-4
J1202
1 DASPN IN Access signal
2 +5V IN Power supply(+5V)
3 GND - GND
T-6-5
J1801
1 RGV20(+5V) IN Power supply(+5V)
4 GND - GND
5 GND - GND
6 GND - GND
7 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
8 VM IN Power supply(+32V)
9 VMGND - GND
10 VMGND - GND
11 VM_ENB OUT VM enable signal
12 AFCONT OUT Normal/Power saving switch signal
T-6-6
J2402
1 INKBENM2_AM OUT Left valve motor drive signal AM
2 INKBENM2_AP OUT Left valve motor drive signal AP
3 SNS3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
4 GND - GND
5 /INKBEN_OPEN_L IN Left valve open/close detection sensor output signal
6 /TANK_COVER_L IN Left ink tank cover switch output signal
7 GND - GND
8 SNS3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
9 GND - GND
10 /INKBEN_CAM_L IN Left ink tank agitation cam sensor output signal
11 N.C - N.C
T-6-7
J2501
A1 N.C - N.C
A2 N.C - N.C
A3 N.C - N.C
A4 SNS3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
A5 GND - GND
A6 /CR_HP IN Lift cam sensor output signal
A7 OUT_LIFTM_VM OUT Power supply
A8 OUT_LIFTM0_A OUT Lift motor drive signal A
A9 OUT_LIFTM2_AX_N0 OUT Lift motor drive signal AX
A10 OUT_LIFTM1_B OUT Lift motor drive signal B
A11 OUT_LIFTM3_BX_N1 OUT Lift motor drive signal BX
A12 /ATUKAIJO_IN IN Pressure release switch output signal
6-4
Chapter 6
J2501
A13 GND - GND
B1 PUMPM1_AM OUT Purge motor drive signal AM
B2 PUMPM1_AP OUT Purge motor drive signal AP
B3 GND - GND
B4 PUMPR_ENCA IN Pump encoder sensor output signal A
B5 SNS5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
B6 PUMPR_ENCB IN Pump encoder sensor output signal B
B7 SNS3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
B8 GND - GND
B9 /CONTROL_CAM_R IN Pump cam sensor output signal
B10 GND - GND
B11 /MEDIA_R IN Media sensor output signal
B12 SNS5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
B13 N.C - N.C
T-6-8
J2502
1 INKBENM1_AM OUT Right valve motor drive signal AM
2 INKBENM1_AP OUT Right valve motor drive signal AP
3 SNS3V OUT Power supply(+3V)
4 GND - GND
5 /INKBEN_OPEN_R IN Right valve open/close detection sensor output signal
6 /TANK_COVER_R IN Right ink tank cover switch output signal
7 GND - GND
9 GND - GND
10 /INKBEN_CAM_R IN Right ink tank agitation cam sensor output signal
T-6-9
J2601
1 POWER_ON IN Power switch signal
2 GND - GND
3 RGV20(+5V) OUT Power supply(+5V)
4 BUZZER OUT Buzzer control signal
5 PDO OUT Panel IC control signal
6 RGV29(+5V) OUT Power supply(+5V)
7 PDI OUT Panel IC data signal
8 HDD_LED OUT HDD lamp control signal
9 /PRESET OUT Panel reset signal
10 GND - GND
11 PCK OUT Panel IC clock signal
12 PANEL_5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
13 /PCS OUT Panel IC chip select signal
T-6-10
J2701
A1 GND - GND
A2 LF_ENCB IN Feed roller encoder sensor output signal B
A3 LF_ENC_+5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
A4 LF_ENCA IN Feed roller encoder sensor output signal A
A5 SNS3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
A6 GND - GND
A7 /LF_HP IN Feed roller HP sensor output signal
A8 N.C - N.C
A9 N.C - N.C
A10 N.C - N.C
A11 N.C - N.C
B1 VM_26V OUT Power supply(+26V)
B2 KYUINFAN_ALARM_IN IN Suction fan alarm signal
B3 KYUINFAN_PWM_ON OUT Suction fan duty control signal
B4 GND - GND
6-5
Chapter 6
J2701
B5 VM_26V OUT Power supply(+26V)
B6 MISTFAN_R_ALARM IN Mist fan(R) alarm signal
B7 GND - GND
B8 MISTFAN_VM_26V OUT Power supply(+26V)
B9 MISTFAN_L_ALARM IN Mist fan(L) alarm signal
B10 GND - GND
B11 N.C - N.C
T-6-11
J2702
Pin Number Signal name IN/OUT Fuction
1 VM 26V OUT Power supply(+26V)
2 /DCOVER_SOL_L OUT Upper cover lock solenoid(L) drive signal
3 VM 26V OUT Power supply(+26V)
4 /DCOVER_SOL_R OUT Upper cover lock solenoid(R) drive signal
5 N.C - N.C
6 N.C - N.C
T-6-12
J2801
1 OUT_LFSP_A OUT Feed motor drive signal A
2 OUT_LFSP_VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
3 OUT_LFSP_AB OUT Feed motor drive signal AB
4 OUT_LFSP_BB OUT Feed motor drive signal BB
5 OUT_LFSP_VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
6 OUT_LFSP_B OUT Feed motor drive signal B
T-6-13
J3001
1 RGV18(VM_CR) IN Upper cover lock switch output signal
2 - - -
3 - - -
4 RGV16(VM) OUT Power supply(+32v)
T-6-14
J3002
1 TH IN Thermister output signal
2 GND - GND
3 Vout IN Temperature/humidity sensor output signal
4 +5V OUT Power supply(+5v)
T-6-15
J3003
1 /MAKITORI_UNIT IN Media take-up paper detection sensor
2 /MAKITORI_LOCK_SENS IN Media take-up on/off sensor output signal
3 /MAKITORI_VCC_ON OUT Power supply ON signal
4 MAKITORI_VM_ON OUT Power supply(+26V)
5 /MAKITORI_ENB OUT Media take-up drive enable signal
6 PHOTO_SENS_OUT IN Media take-up paper detection sensor output signal
7 VM_26V OUT Power supply(+26V)
9 VMGND - GND
10 VMGND - GND
12 N.C. - N.C
13 N.C. - N.C
14 N.C. - N.C
6-6
Chapter 6
T-6-16
J3150
1 IN 3+ IN Hole sensor input signal 3+
2 IN 3- IN Hole sensor input signal 3-
7 VM_GND - GND
8 +5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
9 OUT B OUT Motor output signal B
10 OUT B OUT Motor output signal B
11 OUT A OUT Motor output signal A
12 OUT A OUT Motor output signal A
13 OUT C OUT Motor output signal C
14 OUT C OUT Motor output signal C
T-6-17
J3201
A1 TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal
A2 GND - GND
A3 OUT_TANK_DAT2 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 2
A4 TANK_+3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
A7 GND - GND
A8 OUT_INK_DETECT0 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 0
A17 GND - GND
B1 TANK_CLK OUT Ink tank clock signal
B2 GND - GND
B3 OUT_TANK_DAT8 IN/OUT Ink tank data signal 8
B4 TANK_+3.3V OUT Power supply(+3.3V)
B7 GND - GND
B8 OUT_INK_DETECT6 IN Ink detection sensor output signal 6
B17 n.c - n.c
T-6-18
J3301
1 MENT_SDA IN/OUT Maintenance cartridge ROM control signal (data)
2 MENT_SCL IN/OUT Maintenance cartridge ROM control signal (clock)
3 GND - GND
4 +3.3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
5 GND - GND
6 /FUTO_CLMP OUT Head management sensor clamp signal
7 /FUTO_ON OUT Head management sensor ON signal
6-7
Chapter 6
J3301
9 /FUTO_CMP IN Head management sensor ink detection signal
T-6-19
J3401
1 VMGND - GND
2 VMGND - GND
3 VMGND - GND
4 VH_MONI1 IN VH controll signal 1
6 VMGND - GND
8 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
14 VM OUT Power supply(+32V)
22 VMGND - GND
23 VMGND - GND
24 VMGND - GND
25 VMGND - GND
T-6-20
J3501
1 GND - GND
2 H1-C-DATA-4-OD_OUT OUT Odd head(L) data signal 4(C)
3 GND - GND
4 H1-A-DATA-1-OD_OUT OUT Odd head(L) data signal 1(A)
5 GND - GND
6 H1-B-HE-2_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 2(B)
7 GND - GND
8 H0-D-DATA-7-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 7(D)
9 GND - GND
10 H0-E-HE-8_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 8(E)
11 GND - GND
12 H0-E-DATA-8-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 8(E)
13 GND - GND
14 H0-F-DATA-10-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 10(F)
15 GND - GND
17 GND - GND
18 H0-F-HE-10_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 10(F)
19 GND - GND
21 GND - GND
23 GND - GND
24 H0-F-DATA-11-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 11(F)
25 GND - GND
27 GND - GND
29 GND - GND
6-8
Chapter 6
J3501
30 H0-E-DATA-9-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 9(E)
31 GND - GND
32 H-DASH_LICC2_B OUT Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal
33 GND - GND
34 H0-A-DATA-0-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 0(A)
35 GND - GND
37 GND - GND
38 H0-B-HE-2_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 2(B)
39 GND - GND
40 H0-B-DATA-2-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 2(B)
41 GND - GND
43 GND - GND
44 H0-C-HE-4_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 4(C)
45 GND - GND
46 H0-C-DATA-4-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 4(C)
47 GND - GND
48 H0-A-HE-0_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 0(A)
49 GND - GND
50 VHT_MONI IN VHT controll signal
T-6-21
J3502
1 GND - GND
3 OUT_ENB OUT Head data enable signal
4 H0-D-HE-7_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 7(D)
5 GND - GND
6 H0-D-DATA-7-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 7(D)
7 GND - GND
9 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
13 GND - GND
15 GND - GND
17 GND - GND
18 H0-DSOUT2 OUT Head(R) temperature output signal 2
19 GND - GND
21 GND - GND
22 H0-DLD_LICC2 OUT Head(R) analogue switch latch signal
23 H0-DATA_LICC2 OUT Head(R) analogue switch data signal
24 H0-DASLK_LICC2 OUT Head(R) analogue switch clock signal
25 GND - GND
26 H0_CLK_B OUT Head(R) clock signal
27 GND - GND
28 H0_LT_B OUT Head(R) latch signal
29 GND - GND
30 H0-C-DATA-5-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 5(C)
31 GND - GND
32 LIFT_CAM_IN IN Lift cam sensor output signal
33 GND - GND
35 GND - GND
37 GND - GND
38 H0-B-DATA-3-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 3(B)
39 GND - GND
6-9
Chapter 6
J3502
41 GND - GND
42 H0-A-DATA-1-EV_B OUT Even head(R) data signal 1(A)
43 GND - GND
45 GND - GND
47 GND - GND
48 VH_CHARGE0 OUT VH leakage detection ON/OFF signal 0
50 GND - GND
T-6-22
J3601
1 GND - GND
2 ENCODER_B IN Carriage encoder output signal B
3 ENCODER_A IN Carriage encoder output signal A
4 /CR_COVER IN Carriage cover sensor output signal
5 GND - GND
7 GND - GND
9 GND - GND
10 /H1-E-HE-8_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 8(E)
11 GND - GND
13 GND - GND
14 H1-F-DATA-10-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 10(F)
15 GND - GND
17 GND - GND
18 /H1-F-HE-10_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 10(F)
19 GND - GND
20 /H1-F-DATA-11-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 11(F)
21 GND - GND
23 GND - GND
25 GND - GND
27 GND - GND
29 GND - GND
31 GND - GND
32 VH_DIS OUT VH selection signal
36 PWLED2_ON OUT Multi sensor LED2 drive signal
39 H3V_ON OUT Power supply
40 MLT_SENS_1IN IN Multi sensor signal 1
43 GND - GND
45 GND - GND
47 GND - GND
48 /H1-C-HE-4_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 4(C)
49 GND - GND
50 GND - GND
6-10
Chapter 6
T-6-23
J3602
1 GND - GND
2 IO-ASIC_SCL_B IN/OUT Head ROM controll signal(clock)
3 IO-ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM controll signal(data)
4 GND - GND
5 H1-DSOUT1 OUT Head temperature output signal 1
7 GND - GND
8 H1-E-DATA-8-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 8(E)
9 GND - GND
10 /H1-D-HE-7_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 7(D)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-D-DATA-7-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 7(D)
13 GND - GND
15 GND - GND
16 H1-D-DATA-6-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 6(D)
17 GND - GND
19 GND - GND
20 /H1-C-HE-5_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 5(C)
21 GND - GND
22 H1-C-DATA-5-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 5(C)
23 GND - GND
24 H1_CLK OUT Head(L) clock signal
25 GND - GND
26 /H1_LT_B OUT Head(L) latch signal
27 GND - GND
28 H1-C-DATA-5-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 5(C)
29 GND - GND
30 /H1-B-HE-3_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 3(B)
31 GND - GND
33 GND - GND
34 H1-B-DATA-3-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 3(B)
35 GND - GND
37 GND - GND
38 H1-A-DATA-1-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 1(A)
39 GND - GND
40 /H1-A-HE-1_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 1(A)
41 GND - GND
43 GND - GND
45 GND - GND
46 H1-A-DATA-0-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 0(A)
47 GND - GND
48 VHT_ENB OUT VHT enable signal
49 HV_ENB OUT HV enable signal
50 FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS - -
6-11
Chapter 6
6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB

0025-0539
1 1
J803 J703 1
1 1 J202
J802 J702
1 1
J801 J701
J105 J104 J101 J102 J103

J201
1 1 11 1 1
F-6-2
T-6-24
J101
1 VMGND - GND
2 VMGND - GND
3 VMGND - GND
4 VMGND - GND
15 GND - GND
18 GND - GND
20 VMGND - GND
23 VMGND - GND
24 VMGND - GND
25 VMGND - GND
T-6-25
J102
1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 /H1-C-HE-4_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 4(C)
4 GND - GND
6 GND - GND
8 GND - GND
12 H3V_ON OUT Power supply
6-12
Chapter 6
J102
19 VH_DIS OUT VH selection signal
20 GND - GND
22 GND - GND
24 GND - GND
26 GND - GND
28 GND - GND
30 GND - GND
31 /H1-F-DATA-11-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 11(F)
32 GND - GND
33 /H1-F-HE-10_B OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 10(F)
34 GND - GND
36 GND - GND
37 H1-F-DATA-10-OD_B OUT Odd head(R) data signal 10(F)
38 GND - GND
40 GND - GND
42 GND - GND
44 GND - GND
46 GND - GND
47 /CR_COVER IN Carriage cover sensor output signal
48 ENCODER_A IN Carriage encoder output signal A
49 ENCODER_B IN Carriage encoder output signal B
50 GND - GND
T-6-26
J103
1 FFC_SLANT_DET_SNS - -
2 HV_ENB OUT HV enable signal
3 VHT_ENB OUT VHT enable signal
4 GND - GND
5 H1-A-DATA-0-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 0(A)
6 GND - GND
8 GND - GND
10 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
16 GND - GND
18 GND - GND
20 GND - GND
21 /H1-B-HE-3_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 3(B)
22 GND - GND
24 GND - GND
25 /H1_LT_B OUT Head(L) latch signal
26 GND - GND
6-13
Chapter 6
J103
28 GND - GND
29 H1-C-DATA-5-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 5(C)
30 GND - GND
31 /H1-C-HE-5_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 5(C)
32 GND - GND
34 GND - GND
35 H1-D-DATA-6-OD_B OUT Odd head(L) data signal 6(D)
36 GND - GND
38 GND - GND
40 GND - GND
42 GND - GND
43 H1-E-DATA-8-EV_B OUT Even head(L) data signal 8(E)
44 GND - GND
47 GND - GND
48 IO-ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM controll signal(data)
49 IO-ASIC_SCL_B IN/OUT Head ROM controll signal(clock)
50 GND - GND
T-6-27
J104
1 VHT_MONI IN VHT controll signal
2 GND - GND
4 GND - GND
6 GND - GND
8 GND - GND
10 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
16 GND - GND
18 GND - GND
20 GND - GND
22 GND - GND
24 GND - GND
26 GND - GND
28 GND - GND
30 GND - GND
32 GND - GND
34 GND - GND
36 GND - GND
38 GND - GND
6-14
Chapter 6
J104
40 GND - GND
42 GND - GND
44 GND - GND
45 H1-B-HE-2_B OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 2(B)
46 GND - GND
47 H1-A-DATA-1-OD_OUT OUT Odd head(L) data signal 1(A)
48 GND - GND
49 H1-C-DATA-4-OD_OUT OUT Odd head(L) data signal 4(C)
50 GND - GND
T-6-28
J105
1 GND - GND
4 GND - GND
6 GND - GND
8 GND - GND
10 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
16 GND - GND
18 GND - GND
20 GND - GND
22 GND - GND
23 H0_LT_B OUT Head(R) latch signal
24 GND - GND
25 H0_CLK_B OUT Head(R) clock signal
26 GND - GND
30 GND - GND
32 GND - GND
34 GND - GND
36 GND - GND
38 GND - GND
40 GND - GND
42 GND - GND
44 GND - GND
46 GND - GND
48 OUT_ENB OUT Head data enable signal
6-15
Chapter 6
J105
50 GND - GND
T-6-29
J201
1 ENCODER_B IN Linear encoder sensor output signal B
2 GND - GND
3 ENCODER_A IN Linear encoder sensor output signal A
4 SNS_5V OUT Power supply(+5V)
T-6-30
J202
2 GND - GND
3 /CRCOVER IN Carriage cover sensor output signal
T-6-31
J701
1 H3V OUT Power supply
2 VH1_FB IN VH1 feed back voltage
3 VH1 OUT Power supply
9 GND - GND
10 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
13 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
15 GND - GND
23 VHT OUT Power supply
24 GND - GND
25 GND - GND
T-6-32
J702
1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 GND - GND
4 H1-B-DATA-3-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 3(B)
5 GND - GND
6 /H1-B-HE-3 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 3(B)
7 GND - GND
8 H1-C-DATA-4-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 4(C)
9 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
12 /H1-C-HE-5 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 5(C)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-C-DATA-5-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 5(C)
6-16
Chapter 6
J702
15 GND - GND
16 H1-D-DATA-7-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 7(D)
17 GND - GND
19 GND - GND
20 /H1-D-HE-6 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 6(D)
21 GND - GND
22 H1-D-DATA-6-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 6(D)
23 GND - GND
25 GND - GND
26 /H1-D-HE-7 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 7(D)
27 GND - GND
28 H1-E-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 8(E)
29 GND - GND
30 H1-E-DATA-9-EV Even head(L) data signal 9(E)
31 GND - GND
32 /H1-E-HE-9 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 9(E)
33 GND - GND
34 H1-F-DATA-10-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 10(F)
35 GND - GND
37 GND - GND
38 /H1-F-HE-11 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 11(F)
39 GND - GND
40 H1-F-DATA-11-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 11(F)
41 GND - GND
42 H1-F-DATA-10-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 10(F)
43 GND - GND
44 /H1-F-HE-10 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 10(F)
45 GND - GND
46 H1-E-DATA-9-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 9(E)
47 GND - GND
48 H1-E-DATA-8-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 8(E)
49 GND - GND
50 /H1-E-HE-8 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 8(E)
T-6-33
J703
1 GND - GND
2 GND OUT Power supply(+5V)
3 GND - GND
5 GND - GND
7 GND - GND
8 H1-C-DATA-4-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 4(C)
9 GND - GND
10 H1-C-HE-4 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 4(C)
11 GND - GND
12 H1-B-DATA-3-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 3(B)
13 GND - GND
14 H1-B-DATA-2-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 2(B)
15 GND - GND
16 H1-B-HE-2 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 2(B)
17 GND - GND
18 H1-A-DATA-1-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 1(A)
19 GND - GND
20 H1-A-DATA-0-OD OUT Odd head(L) data signal 0(A)
21 GND - GND
22 H1-A-HE-0 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 0(A)
23 GND - GND
24 H1-A-DATA-0-EV OUT Even head(L) data signal 0(A)
25 GND - GND
6-17
Chapter 6
J703
27 GND - GND
29 GND - GND
31 GND - GND
32 IO_ASIC_SDA IN/OUT Head ROM control signal(data)
33 GND - GND
34 IO_ASIC_SCL OUT Head ROM control signal(clock)
35 GND - GND
36 H1_LT OUT Head(L) latch signal
37 GND - GND
39 GND - GND
40 H1-DSOUT1 IN Head(L) temperature output signal 1
41 GND - GND
42 H1-DSOUT2 IN Head(L) temperature output signal 2
43 GND - GND
44 H1-DLD_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch latch signal
45 GND - GND
46 H1-DATA_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch data signal
47 GND - GND
48 H1-DASLK_LICC2 OUT Head(L) analogue switch clock signal
49 GND - GND
50 H-DASH_LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal
T-6-34
J801
1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
10 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
13 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
15 GND - GND
16 GND - GND
24 VHT OUT Power supply
25 H3V OUT Power supply
T-6-35
J802
1 GND - GND
2 H0-B-DATA-2-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 2(B)
3 GND - GND
5 GND - GND
6 H0-B-HE-3 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 3(B)
6-18
Chapter 6
J802
7 GND - GND
8 H0-C-DATA-4-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 4(C)
9 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
12 H0-C-HE-5 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 5(C)
13 GND - GND
14 H0-C-DATA-5-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 5(C)
15 GND - GND
16 H0-D-DATA-7-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 7(D)
17 GND - GND
19 GND - GND
20 H0-D-HE-6 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 6(D)
21 GND - GND
22 H0-D-DATA-6-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 6(D)
23 GND - GND
25 GND - GND
27 GND - GND
28 H0-E-DATA-8-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 8(E)
29 GND - GND
31 GND - GND
32 H0-E-HE-9 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 9(E)
33 GND - GND
34 H0-F-DATA-10-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 10(F)
35 GND - GND
37 GND - GND
38 H0-F-HE-11 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 11(F)
39 GND - GND
41 GND - GND
43 GND - GND
45 GND - GND
46 H0-E-DATA-9-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 9(E)
47 GND - GND
49 GND - GND
T-6-36
J803
1 GND - GND
3 GND - GND
4 PWLED4 OUT Multi sensor LED4 drive signal
5 GND - GND
7 GND - GND
9 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
12 H0-DASH LICC2 OUT Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal
13 GND - GND
15 GND - GND
17 GND - GND
6-19
Chapter 6
J803
19 GND - GND
20 H0-DSOUT1 IN Head(R) temperature output signal 1
21 GND - GND
22 H0-DSOUT2 IN Head(R) temperature output signal 2
23 GND - GND
25 GND - GND
27 GND - GND
28 H0-B-DATA-3-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 3(B)
29 GND - GND
31 GND - GND
33 GND - GND
34 H0-A-DATA-1-OD OUT Odd head(R) data signal 1(A)
35 GND - GND
37 GND - GND
38 H0-A-HE-0 OUT Head(R) heat enable signal 0(A)
39 GND - GND
40 H0-A-DATA-0-EV OUT Even head(R) data signal 0(A)
41 GND - GND
43 GND - GND
45 GND - GND
46 H0_LT OUT Head(R) latch signal
47 GND - GND
48 H0_CLK OUT Head(R) clock signal
49 GND - GND
6-20
Chapter 6
6.2.3 Head relay PCB

0028-6104
J201 J101
1 1
J202 J102 J501
J502 1 1
1 J203 J103 1
1
1 1
J602 1 1 J601
F-6-3
T-6-37
J101
1 GND - GND
2 GND - GND
3 VHT12 IN Power supply
5 VH2 IN Power supply
11 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
13 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
15 GND - GND
16 GND - GND
17 GND - GND
25 H3V IN Power supply
T-6-38
J102
Pin Number Siganal name IN/OUT Function
1 H1-E-HE-8 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 8(E)
2 GND - GND
3 H1-E-DATA-8-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 8(E)
4 GND - GND
5 H1-E-DATA-9-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 9(E)
6 GND - GND
7 H1-F-HE-10 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 10(F)
8 VH2 - GND
9 H1-F-DATA-10-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 10(F)
10 GND - GND
11 H1-F-DATA-11-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 11(F)
12 GND - GND
13 H1-F-HE-11 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 11(F)
14 GND - GND
15 H1-F-DATA-11-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 11(F)
16 GND - GND
17 H1-F-DATA-10-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 10(F)
18 GND - GND
19 H1-E-HE-9 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 9(E)
20 GND - GND
21 H1-E-DATA-9-EV 0 Even head(L) data signal 9(E)
6-21
Chapter 6
J102
Pin Number Siganal name IN/OUT Function
22 GND - GND
23 H1-E-DATA-8-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 8(E)
24 GND - GND
25 H1-D-HE-7 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 7(D)
26 GND - GND
27 H1-D-DATA-7-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 7(D)
28 GND - GND
29 H1-D-DATA-6-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 6(D)
30 GND - GND
31 H1-D-HE-6 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 6(D)
32 GND - GND
33 H1-D-DATA-6-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 6(D)
34 GND - GND
35 H1-D-DATA-7-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 7(D)
36 GND - GND
37 H1-C-DATA-5-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 5(C)
38 GND - GND
39 H1-C-HE-5 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 5(C)
40 GND - GND
41 H1-C-DATA-5-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 5(C)
42 GND - GND
43 H1-C-DATA-4-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 4(C)
44 GND - GND
45 H1-B-HE-3 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 3(B)
46 GND - GND
47 H1-B-DATA-3-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 3(B)
48 GND - GND
49 GND - GND
50 GND - GND
T-6-39
J103
1 H-DASH_LICC2 IN Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal
2 GND - GND
3 H1-DASLK_LICC2 IN Head(L) analogue switch clock signal
4 GND - GND
5 H1-DATA_LICC2 IN Head(L) analogue switch data signal
6 GND - GND
7 H1-DLD_LICC2 IN Head(L) analogue switch latch signal
8 VH2 - GND
9 H1-DSOUT2 OUT Head(L) temperature output signal 2
10 GND - GND
11 H1-DSOUT1 OUT Head(L) temperature output signal 1
12 GND - GND
13 H1_CLK IN Head(L) clock signal
14 GND - GND
15 H1_LT IN Head(L) latch signal
16 GND - GND
17 IO_ASIC_SCL IN/OUT Head ROM control signal(clock)
18 GND - GND
20 GND - GND
21 H1-B-DATA-2-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 2(B)
22 GND - GND
23 H1-A-HE-1 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 1(A)
24 GND - GND
25 H1-A-DATA-1-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 1(A)
26 GND - GND
27 H1-A-DATA-0-EV IN Even head(L) data signal 0(A)
28 GND - GND
29 H1-A-HE-0 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 0(A)
30 GND - GND
31 H1-A-DATA-0-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 0(A)
32 GND - GND
6-22
Chapter 6
J103
33 H1-A-DATA-1-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 1(A)
34 GND - GND
35 H1-B-HE-2 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 2(B)
36 GND - GND
37 H1-B-DATA-2-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 2(B)
38 GND - GND
39 H1-B-DATA-3-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 3(B)
40 GND - GND
41 H1-C-HE-4 IN Head(L) heat enable signal 4(C)
42 GND - GND
43 H1-C-DATA-4-OD IN Odd head(L) data signal 4(C)
44 GND - GND
45 MLT_SENS_1IN OUT Multi sensor signal 1
46 GND - GND
47 MLT_SENS_2IN OUT Multi sensor signal 2
48 GND - GND
49 SNS5V IN Power supply(+5V)
50 GND - GND
T-6-40
J201
1 H3V IN Power supply
2 VHT34 IN Power supply
3 VH4_FB OUT VH4 feed back voltage
10 GND - GND
11 GND - GND
12 GND - GND
13 GND - GND
14 GND - GND
15 GND - GND
16 GND - GND
24 GND - GND
25 GND - GND
T-6-41
J202
1 H0-E-HE-8 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 8(E)
2 GND - GND
3 H0-E-DATA-8-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 8(E)
4 GND - GND
5 H0-E-DATA-9-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 9(E)
6 GND - GND
7 H0-F-HE-10 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 10(F)
8 VH2 - GND
9 H0-F-DATA-10-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 10(F)
10 GND - GND
11 H0-F-DATA-11-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 11(F)
12 GND - GND
13 H0-F-HE-11 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 11(F)
6-23
Chapter 6
J202
14 GND - GND
15 H0-F-DATA-11-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 11(F)
16 GND - GND
17 H0-F-DATA-10-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 10(F)
18 GND - GND
19 H0-E-HE-9 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 9(E)
20 GND - GND
21 H0-E-DATA-9-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 9(E)
22 GND - GND
23 H0-E-DATA-8-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 8(E)
24 GND - GND
25 H0-D-HE-7 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 7(D)
26 GND - GND
27 H0-D-DATA-7-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 7(D)
28 GND - GND
29 H0-D-DATA-6-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 6(D)
30 GND - GND
31 H0-D-HE-6 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 6(D)
32 GND - GND
33 H0-D-DATA-6-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 6(D)
34 GND - GND
35 H0-D-DATA-7-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 7(D)
36 GND - GND
37 H0-C-DATA-5-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 5(C)
38 GND - GND
39 H0-C-HE-5 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 5(C)
40 GND - GND
41 H0-C-DATA-5-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 5(C)
42 GND - GND
43 H0-C-DATA-4-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 4(C)
44 GND - GND
45 H0-B-HE-3 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 3(B)
46 GND - GND
47 H0-B-DATA-3-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 3(B)
48 GND - GND
49 H0-B-DATA-2-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 2(B)
50 GND - GND
T-6-42
J203
1 LIFT_CAM_IN OUT Lift cam sensor output signal
2 GND - GND
3 H0_CLK IN Head(R) clock signal
4 GND - GND
5 H0_LT IN Head(R) latch signal
6 GND - GND
7 H0-A-HE-1 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 1(A)
8 VH2 - GND
9 H0-A-DATA-1-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 1(A)
10 GND - GND
11 H0-A-DATA-0-EV IN Even head(R) data signal 0(A)
12 GND - GND
13 H0-A-HE-0 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 0(A)
14 GND - GND
15 H0-A-DATA-0-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 0(A)
16 GND - GND
17 H0-A-DATA-1-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 1(A)
18 GND - GND
19 H0-B-HE-2 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 2(B)
20 GND - GND
21 H0-B-DATA-2-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 2(B)
22 GND - GND
23 H0-B-DATA-3-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 3(B)
24 GND - GND
6-24
Chapter 6
J203
25 H0-C-HE-4 IN Head(R) heat enable signal 4(C)
26 GND - GND
27 H0-C-DATA-4-OD IN Odd head(R) data signal 4(C)
28 GND - GND
30 GND - GND
32 GND - GND
33 H0-DASLK_LICC2 IN Head(R) analogue switch clock signal
34 GND - GND
35 H0-DATA_LICC2 IN Head(R) analogue switch data signal
36 GND - GND
37 H0-DLD_LICC2 IN Head(R) analogue switch latch signal
38 GND - GND
39 H-DASH LICC2 IN Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal
40 GND - GND
41 PWLED1_ON IN Multi sensor LED1 drive signal
42 GND - GND
44 GND - GND
46 GND - GND
48 GND - GND
49 SNS_5V IN Power supply(+5V)
50 GND - GND
T-6-43
J501
1 MEM-3.3V OUT Power supply (+3.3V)
2 SNS-GND - GND
3 SCL OUT Multi sensor LED control signal (clock)
4 SDA OUT Multi sensor LED control signal (data)
5 GAP-Far IN GAP detection signal 1
6 GAP-Near IN GAP detection signal 2
7 COLOR-SNS IN Color detection signal
8 EDGE-SNS IN Media detection signal
9 SNS-GND - GND
10 VCC-5V OUT Power supply (+5V)
11 SNS-REF OUT Reference voltage signal (+3V)
12 LED-GND - GND
T-6-44
J502
1 SNS5V_0 OUT Power supply(+5V)
2 GND - GND
T-6-45
J601
4 VHT12 OUT Head transistor drive power supply
9 H1-C-DIA1 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 1(C)
6-25
Chapter 6
J601
17 H1-F-HE-11 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 11(F)
18 H1-E-DIA1 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 1(E)
19 H1-D-DIA1 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 1(D)
20 H3V_1 OUT Power supply
27 H1-D-DIA2 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 2(D)
28 H1-E-HE-8 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 8(E)
29 H1-E-DIA2 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 2(E)
30 H1-F-DIA2 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 2(F)
31 H1-E-HE-9 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 9(E)
33 H1-D-HE-6 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 6(D)
37 H1-A-DIA2 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 2(A)
38 H1-B-DIA2 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 2(B)
42 H1-F-HE-10 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 10(F)
46 H1-C-DIA2 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 2(C)
48 H1-B-DIA1 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 1(B)
53 GND - GND
54 GND - GND
55 GND - GND
58 GND - GND
62 H1-A-DIA1 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 1(A)
64 GND - GND
65 GND - GND
66 GND - GND
67 GND - GND
69 H1-F-DIA1 IN Head(L) DI sensor signal 1(F)
70 H1-D-HE-7 OUT Head(L) heat enable signal 7(D)
71 GND - GND
73 H1_LT OUT Head(L) clock signal
76 GND - GND
6-26
Chapter 6
J601
77 GND - GND
78 GND - GND
T-6-46
J602
4 VHT34 OUT Power supply
9 H0-C-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(C)
18 H0-E-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(E)
19 H0-D-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(D)
27 H0-D-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(D)
29 H0-E-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(E)
30 H0-F-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(E)
37 H0-A-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(A)
38 H0-B-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(B)
46 H0-C-DIA2 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 2(C)
48 H0-B-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(B)
53 GND - GND
54 GND - GND
55 GND - GND
58 GND - GND
6-27
Chapter 6
J602
62 H0-A-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(A)
64 GND - GND
65 GND - GND
66 GND - GND
67 GND - GND
69 H0-F-DIA1 IN Head(R) DI sensor signal 1(F)
71 GND - GND
72 H0_CLK OUT Head(R) clock signal
73 H0_LT OUT Head(R) latch signal
76 GND - GND
77 GND - GND
78 GND - GND
6-28
Chapter 6
6.3 Version Up
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool

0020-1951
Use of the following tools allows you to update the firmware of the main controller incorporated in the printer from the computer.
- imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool (for user)

- L Printer Service Tool (for service)
1. imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool

This tool has the following function.
- Updating the firmware of printer
Connection method with the computer:

USB, Network
a) Operation
1) Make sure that the printer is the online mode.
2) Exit all other running programs.
3) Start the imagePROGRAF Firmware Update Tool.
4) According to the internet connection state of the computer, specify in the [Update Method Selection] dialogue box as shown in the followings.
4)-1 In case the computer is connected to the internet, select the [Connect to the internet to get the latest information], and then click [Next].
F-6-4
4)-2 In case the computer is not connected to the internet, select the [Specify the Firmware] and specify the firmware data that downloaded manually, and then click
the [Next].
F-6-5
5) The [Update Possible] is displayed in the [Status] field of the printers that a newer firmware is available.
F-6-6
MEMO:
The overwriting the same firmware version or the firmware downgrade can not execute.
6) Click the printer to update the firmware of to select it, and then click the [Start Update] icon.
F-6-7
6-29
Chapter 6
7) Click [Yes] in the [Update Confirmation] dialogue box.
F-6-8
8) The firmware data is transferred to the printer.
9) After the firmware data transference has completed, the [Finish Update] dialogue box is displayed. Click the [OK].
- When the firmware has been overwritten, the printer restarts.
F-6-9
2. L Printer Service Tool

This tool has the following function.
- Updating the firmware of printer
- Color check of multi sensor
- Displaying the printer information
Connection method with the computer:

USB, Network
a) Screen description
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-6-10
[1] Main menu
Choose the menu to execute.
[2] Main menu button
Choose the menu to execute between the [Information] and the [Firmware] and the [Files].
[3] Sub menu button
The sub menu button is displayed according to the menu chosen by main menu or main menu button.
[4] Printer information area
The information of the printer connected with computer is shown according to the chose menu.
[5] Message area
The message of executed menu is shown. And the message is saved as the text file when choosing the "[Service]-[Save Message]" of the main menu.
6-30
Chapter 6
b) Operation
1) Showing the information of the printer
The data of PRINT INF or status print is shown.
(1) Choose the [Information] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Information]" of the main menu.
F-6-11
(2) Choose the printer from the list shown to the printer information area.
MEMO:
- The list is refreshed when choosing the [Refresh] of the sub menu button or the "[View]-[Refresh]" of the main menu.
- The printer is searched according to the setting of the [Specify Search Range] dialogue box after choosing the "[View]-[Specify Search Range]" of the main menu
to display the dialogue box. The five IP addresses at the maximum can register when searching by the IP address.
F-6-12
(3)-1 Choose the [Display PRINT INF] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Display PRINT INF]" of the main menu when showing the PRINT INF.
- The data of PRINT INF is shown by the appointed application software.
(3)-2 Choose the [Display Status Print] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Display Status Print]" of the main menu when showing the Status Print.
- The data of Status Print is shown by the appointed application software.
(3)-3 Choose the [Color Check] of the sub menu button or the "[Information]-[Color Check]" of the main menu when executing the color check.
- This mode judges the OK or NG by checking the color check data that measured by the multi sensor.
- Before executing the color check, need the following media to set to the printer.
Roll media of more than 10 inch width, or cut sheet of more than A4-size.
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper 170gsm
- When executing the color check, the paper type that selected by the dialogue box must match with the paper type that set to the printer so that the check can
execute correctly.
6-31
Chapter 6
MEMO:
- The application software used to show the data and the folder used to store the files can change by the "[Service]-[Setup]" of the main menu.
[1]
[2]
F-6-13
[1] This menu can change the folder used to store the file.
[2] This menu can change the application software (NotePad or WordPad) used to show the data.
- The printer name can add by the "[Service]-[Add Printer]" of the main menu.
F-6-14
2) Updating the firmware of the printer

The firmware of printer can update according to the following procedure.
(1) Choose the [Firmware] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Firmware]" of the main menu.
F-6-15
(2) Choose the printer to update from the list of the printer shown to the printer information area.
6-32
Chapter 6
MEMO:
- The printer list is refreshed when choosing the [Refresh] of the sub menu button or the "[View]-[Refresh]" of the main menu.
- The printer is searched according to the setting of the [Specify Search Range] dialogue box after choosing the "[View]-[Specify Search Range]" of the main menu
to display the dialogue box. The five IP addresses at the maximum can register when searching by the IP address.
F-6-16
(3) Choose the [Specify Firmware] of the sub menu button or the "[Firmware]-[Specify Firmware]" of the main menu.
Specify the folder stored the file by the [Specify Firmware Folder] of the [Specify Firmware] dialogue box or specify the file (.jdl file) by the [Specify Firmware
File] of the dialogue box.
F-6-17
(4) Make sure that the printer is the online mode or the download mode.
The firmware of the printer is updated when choosing the [Transfer Firmware] of the sub menu button or the "[Firmware]-[Transfer Firmware]" of the main menu.
MEMO:
The Printer becomes the force transfer mode when choosing the "[Firmware]-[Force Transfer Mode]" of the main menu. Thereby, you can choose the [Transfer
Firmware] without concerning the status of the printer. And when transferring an incorrect file, as it may destroy the printer firmware, please take extra care.
3) Managing the information of the printer

The list of the PRINT INF or the status print gotten according to the procedure of "1) Showing the information of the printer" can manage.
(1) Choose the [Files] of the main menu button or the "[Service]-[Files]" of the main menu.
- The list of the PRINT INF or the status print gotten so far is shown in the printer information area.
F-6-18
(2) Choose the [Display] of the sub menu button or the "[Files]-[Display]" of the main menu after selecting the list that want to show in the printer information area.
The multiple selection from the lists is possible.
- The data of the selected PRINT INF or status print is shown.
MEMO:
- The user information can set to the list after choosing the [Input User Information] of the sub menu button or the "[Files]-[Input User Information]" of the main
menu. The input of max 511 characters is possible.
- In case of deleting the list, choose the "[Files]-[Delete Files]" of main menu after selecting the list which want to delete from the printer information area.
6-33
Chapter 6
6.4 Service Tools
6.4.1 Tool List

0012-6675
T-6-47
General-purpose tools Application

Long phillips scerewdriver Inserting and removing screw
Phillips scerewdriver Inserting and removing screw
Flat-head screwdriver Removing the E-ring
Needle-nose pliers Inserting and removing the spring parts
Hex key wrench Inserting and removing hexagonal screws
Flat brush Applying grease
T-6-48
Special-purpose tools Application

Grease FLOIL G-5000H Applying to specified locations
(FY9-6022)
Cover Switch Tool Pressing the cover switch
(QY9-0103)
Syringe Draining ink manually
(CK-0541)
Lint free paper Wiping off ink
(CK-0336)
Rubber gloves Preventing ink stains
(QC1-5547)
Penlight Assisting the manual cappings
(CK-0327)
6-34
Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE
Contents
Contents
7.1 Service Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1.1 Service Mode Operation.......................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode.......................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote..................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF ................................................................................................................................................ 7-38
7.2 Special Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 7-53
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing ................................................................................................................................... 7-53
Chapter 7
7.1 Service Mode
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation

0023-2922
a) How to enter the Service mode

Enter service mode according to the following procedure:
1) Turn off the printer power.

2) Turn on the power while pressing the [Load] key and [Navigate] key.
* Keep pressing the above keys until "Initializing" is displayed.
3) "S" appears at the top right of the display.
4) Press the key or key to choose the [Set./Adj. Menu] and press the [OK] key.
"SERVICE MODE" appears in the menu list and the MESSAGE LED flashes.
5) Press the key or key to choose "SERVICE MODE" and press the [OK] key.
* Service mode is added to the [Set./Adj. Menu]. Service mode can be entered even when an error occurs (an error message is displayed) by turning off the power
once and then pressing the above keys.
b) How to exit the Service mode

Turn off the printer.
c) Key operation in the service mode

- Selecting menus and parameters: or key
- Going to the next lower-level menu: key
- Going to the previous higher-level menu: key
- Determining a selected menu or parameter:[OK] key
7-1
Chapter 7
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode

0030-4816
The hierarchy of menus and parameters in the Service Mode is as shown below.
DISPLAY PRINTINF YES/NO : Select YES to print
SYSTEM S/N
TYPE
LF TYPE
TMP
RH
SIZE LF
SIZE LF
SIZE CR
SIZE CR
AFTER INST
HEAD S/N L
S/N R
LOT L
LOT R
INK PC
---
BK
WARNING 01
---
20
ERROR 01
---
20
JAM 01 1:
---
4:
---
05 1:
---
4:
INK CHECK 000000 00
I/O DISPLAY I/O DISPLAY 1
I/O DISPLAY 2
I/O DISPLAY 3
7-2
Chapter 7
ADJUST PRINT PATTERN NOZZLE 1 : Press the [OK] button to
execute
OPTICAL AXIS : Press the [OK] button to
execute
LF TUNING
LF TUNIG 2
HEAD ADJ. MANUAL HEAD ADJ EXTENSION : Press the [OK] button to
execute
DETAIL : Press the [OK] button to
execute
BASIC : Press the [OK] button to
execute
ADJ. SETTING A A-1 : Adjustment value entry
---
A-96 : Adjustment value entry
---
F F-1 : Adjustment value entry
F-2 : Adjustment value entry
SAVE SETTINGS YES/NO
RESET SETTINGS YES/NO
NOZZLE CHECK POS. YES/NO
GAP CALIB. YES/NO
CHANGE LF TYPE 0/1
ROUGH EXCUTE YES/NO
AUTO REG EXCUTE YES/NO
CR REG EXCUTE YES/NO
RESET YES/NO
CR MOTOR COG YES/NO
MARGIN ADJ TOP MARGIN ADJ -2.0 to 2.0
BTM MARGIN ADJ -2.0 to 2.0
PRINT PATTERN YES/NO
7-3
Chapter 7
FUNCTION CR UNLOCK YES/NO
CR LOCK YES/NO
PG CHECK YES/NO
CR AUTO SCAN YES/NO
CR SCAN COUNT 1 : Press the [OK] button to
set
---
30 : Press the [OK] button to
set
CR SCAN SIZE 1 : Press the [OK] button to
set
---
set
CR SCAN SPEED 1 : Press the [OK] button to
set
---
set
OPT SENS OUTPUT YES OUTPUT0
---
OUTPUT6
NO
NOZZLE CHK YES/NO
NOZZLE INF PC
---
BK
MEMORY CHK DDR YES/NO
EEP YES/NO
HEAD CNT CHK YES/NO
REPLACE L & R PRINTHEADS YES/NO
7-4
Chapter 7
COUNTER PRINTER LIFE TTL
LIFE ROLL
LIFE CUTSHEET
LIFE A
---
LIFE F
POWER ON
W-INK
CUTTER
WIPE
SLEEP ON
CARRIAGE PRINT
DRIVE
CR COUNT
CR DIST.
PRINT COUNT
PURGE CLN-A-1
CLN-A-2
CLN-A-3
CLN-A-6
CLN-A-7
CLN-A-10
CLN-A-11
CLN-A-15
CLN-A-16
CLN-A-17
CLN-A-TTL
CLN-M-1
CLN-M-4
CLN-M-5
CLN-M-6
CLN-M-TTL
CLEAR CLR-INK CONSUME
CLR-MTC EXC.
CLR-HEAD L EXC.
CLR-HEAD R EXC.
CLR Wia-1 EXC.
CLR Wia-3 EXC.
CLR Wia-4 EXC.
CLR Wia-5 EXC.
CLR Wia-6 EXC.
CLR CR-1 EXC.
CLR CR-2 EXC.
CLR CR-3 EXC.
CLR CR-4 EXC.
CLR CR-5 EXC.
CLR PG-1 EXC.
CLR HMa-1 EXC.
CLR MT-1 EXC.
CLR PL-1 EXC.
CLR Mi-1 EXC.
CLR MS-1 EXC.
CLR-FACTORY CNT.
7-5
Chapter 7
COUNTER EXCHANGE MTC EXC.
HEAD L EXC.
HEAD R EXC.
BOARD EXC.(M/B)
Wia-1 EXC.
Wia-3 EXC.
Wia-4 EXC.
Wia-5 EXC.
Wia-6 EXC.
CR-1 EXC.
CR-2 EXC.
CR-3 EXC.
CR-4 EXC.
CR-5 EXC.
PG-1 EXC.
HMa-1 EXC.
MT-1 EXC.
PL-1 EXC.
Mi-1 EXC.
MS-1 EXC.
DETAIL-CNT MOVE PRINTER
N-INK CHK(PC)
---
N-INK CHK(BK)
MEDIACONFIG-CNT
7-6
Chapter 7
COUNTER INK-USE1 INK-USE1(PC)
---
INK-USE1(BK)
INK-USE1(TTL)
LINK-USE1(PC)
---
LINK-USE1(BK)
LINK-USE1(TTL)
SINK-USE1(PC)
---
SINK-USE1(BK)
SINK-USE1(TTL)
N-INK-USE1(PC)
---
N-INK-USE1(BK)
N-INK-USE1(TTL)
INK-USE2 INK-USE2(PC)
---
INK-USE2(BK)
INK-USE2(TTL)
N-INK-USE2(PC)
---
N-INK-USE2(BK)
N-INK-USE2(TTL)
INK-EXC INK-EXC(PC)
---
INK-EXC(BK)
INK-EXC(TTL)
N-INK-EXC(PC)
---
N-INK-EXC(BK)
N-INK-EXC(TTL)
7-7
Chapter 7
COUNTER MEDIA 1 NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
---
MEDIA 7 NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
MEDIA OTHER NAME
TTL
TTL
ROLL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
CUTSHEET
MEDIASIZE1 ROLL P-SQ 44-60
P-SQ 44-60
P-SQ 36-44
P-SQ 36-44
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ -17
P-SQ -17
P-CNT 44-60
P-CNT 36-44
P-CNT 24-36
P-CNT 17-24
P-CNT -17
MEDIASIZE2 ROLL D-SQ 44-60
D-SQ 44-60
D-SQ 36-44
D-SQ 36-44
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ -17
D-SQ -17
D-CNT 44-60
D-CNT 36-44
D-CNT 24-36
D-CNT 17-24
D-CNT -17
7-8
Chapter 7
COUNTER MEDIASIZE1 CUT P-SQ 44-60
P-SQ 44-60
P-SQ 36-44
P-SQ 36-44
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 24-36
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ 17-24
P-SQ -17
P-SQ -17
P-CNT 44-60
P-CNT 36-44
P-CNT 24-36
P-CNT 17-24
P-CNT -17
MEDIASIZE2 CUT D-SQ 44-60
D-SQ 44-60
D-SQ 36-44
D-SQ 36-44
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 24-36
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ 17-24
D-SQ -17
D-SQ -17
D-CNT 44-60
D-CNT 36-44
D-CNT 24-36
D-CNT 17-24
D-CNT -17
HEAD DOT CNT. 1 PC1
---
BK
TTL
HEAD DOT CNT. 2 PC1
---
BK
TTL
PARTS CNT. COUNTER Wia-1 OK/W1/W2/E
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
---
COUNTER MS-1 OK/W1/W2/E
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
7-9
Chapter 7
SETTING Pth ON/OFF
RTC DATE yyyy/mm/dd
TIME hh:mm
PV AUTO JUDGE ON/OFF
NETWORK CERTIFICATE CA-CERTIFICATE VALIDITY yyyy/mm/dd
E-RDS E-RDS SWITCH ON/OFF
UGW-ADDRESS http://XXX
UGW-PORT XXXXX
COM-TEST YES
COM-LOG
HEAD DOT INF ON/OFF
INITIALIZE WARNIG : Press the [OK] button to
clear
ERROR : Press the [OK] button to
clear
JAM : Press the [OK] button to
clear
ADJUST : Press the [OK] button to
clear
W-INK : Press the [OK] button to
clear
CARRIAGE : Press the [OK] button to
clear
PURGE : Press the [OK] button to
clear
INK-USE CNT : Press the [OK] button to
clear
W-INK-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button to
clear
HEAD-CHG L CNT : Press the [OK] button to
clear
HEAD-CHG R CNT : Press the [OK] button to
clear
HDD BOX PASS. ALL FOLDERS : Press the [OK] button to
clear
FOLDER 1 : Press the [OK] button to
clear
---
FOLDER 29 : Press the [OK] button to
clear
PARTS-CHG CNT PARTS Wia ALL : Press the [OK] button to
clear
---
PARTS MS-1 : Press the [OK] button to
clear
PARTS COUNTER PARTS Wia ALL : Press the [OK] button to
clear
---
PARTS MS-1 : Press the [OK] button to
clear
USER SETTEING YES/NO
CA-KEY YES/NO
ERDS-DAT YES/NO
JOB LOG YES/NO
7-10
Chapter 7
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode

0030-4817
This section provides details of the Service mode menu.
a) DISPLAY
Displays and prints the printer information.
1) PRINF INF
Prints adjustment values in the User menu, [DISPLAY] and [COUNTER] parameters on A4-size or lager paper.
When roll media is used, the layout is optimized according to the media width.
2) SYSTEM
Displays the printer information shown below.
Display Description Unit

S/N Serial number of printer -
TYPE Type setting on main controller PCB -
* iPF8400S/8410S are represented by 44".
LF TYPE Feed roller type: 0 or 1 -
TMP Ambient temperature centigrade
degrees
RH Ambient humidity %
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction) mm/inch
0 is always detected for the roll media.
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction) mm/inch
AFTER Number of days since initial installation Days
INST.
3) HEAD
Displays the following EEPROM information of the printhead.
Display Description
S/N R Serial number of printhead R
S/N L Serial number of printhead L
LOT R Lot number of printhead R
LOT L Lot number of printhead L
4) INK
Displays the numbers of days passed since installation of the following ink tanks.

BK Number of days passed since the BK ink tank was installed Day(s)
MBK Number of days passed since the MBK ink tank was installed Day(s)
C Number of days passed since the C ink tank was installed Day(s)
M Number of days passed since the M ink tank was installed Day(s)
Y Number of days passed since the Y ink tank was installed Day(s)
PC Number of days passed since the PC ink tank was installed Day(s)
PM Number of days passed since the PM ink tank was installed Day(s)
GY Number of days passed since the GY ink tank was installed Day(s)
5) WARNING
Displays the warning history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.
6) ERROR
Displays the error history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.
7) JAM
Displays log of jams that have occurred (up to five events). The newest event has the smallest history number.
Indicates the date and time of jam and error code. "0000" is displayed if there is no log.
0 1 M M / D D H H : M M
X X X X - X X X X
F-7-1
Press the key to display detail information.

Press the key or key to navigate among detail information display 1 to 4.
Detail information display 1
J A M 0 1
1 : X X X X X X X X X X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
F-7-2
7-11
Chapter 7
J A M 0 1
2 : X X X X X X X X X
11
F-7-3
J A M 0 1
3 : X X X X
12
F-7-4
J A M 0 1
4 : X X X X X X X X
13
F-7-5
Display Description LCD display contents

1 Jam type 1:Carriage error, 2:Jam, 3:Feed failure (delay), 4:Cut failure, *:Unknown
2 Media 1:Roll media, 2:Cut sheet (manual feed from top), 3:Cut sheet (manual feed from front), 4:Cassette, *:Unknown
3 Jam timing 1:Feed, 2:Print, 3:Eject, *:Unknown
4 Media width detection 1:ON, 2:OFF, *:Unknown
5 Head height 0:SL (1.2mm), 1:L (1.4mm), 2:M1 (1.8mm), 3:M2 (2.0mm), 4:M3 (2.2mm), 5:H (2.6mm), *:Unknown
6 (Not Used) -
7 Cut mode setting 1:User cut, 2:Eject cut, 3:Auto cut, *:Unknown
8 Environment Display Media Information Tool's environment settings A to F according to Temperature/Humidity Detection Sensor
0: A, 1:B, 2:C, 3:D, 4:E, 5:F, *:Unknown
9 Borderless printing setting 1:Bordered printing, 2:Borderless printing, *:Unknown
10 (Not Used) -
11 Print mode Display print mode, *:Unknown
12 Media width Display media width, *:Unknown
13 Media name Display media name, *:Unknown
8) INK CHECK
Displays the number of times the remaining ink level detection function was turned off, to accommodate refilled ink cartridges in the order of PC, C, BK, MBK,
Y, M, PM and GY.
0: Never
1: Executed at least once
7-12
Chapter 7
b) I/O DISPLAY
The status of each sensor and switch is shown in the display.
Sensor and switch status is shown in the display.

ON = 1
OFF or not used = 0
Screen 1
I / O D I S P L A Y 1 (Upper row)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Lower row)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (Display position)
F-7-6
Screen 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Lower row)
F-7-7
Screen 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Lower row)
F-7-8
7-13
Chapter 7
Screen 1, Screen 2 and Screen 3 are selectable with the and keys.
These screens display the associated sensor status as listed in the table below.
Display
Sensor name LCD display contents
position
1 Pump Cam Sensor 0: Sensor ON, 1: Sensor OFF
2 Valve open/closed detection sensor (R) 0: Sensor ON, 1: Sensor OFF
3 Agitation cam sensor (L) 0: Sensor ON, 1: Sensor OFF
4 Agitation cam sensor (R) 0: Sensor ON, 1: Sensor OFF
5 (Not Used) -
6 Lift cam sensor 0: Sensor ON, 1: Sensor OFF
7 Feed roller HP sensor 0: Sensor ON, 1: Sensor OFF
8 Upper cover lock switch 0: Cover open, 1: Cover close
9 Carriage cover sensor 0: Cover open, 1: Cover close
10 Ink tank cover switch (R) 0: Cover open, 1: Cover close
11 Ink tank cover switch (L) 0: Cover open, 1: Cover close
12 (Not Used) -
13 (Not Used) -
14 (Not Used) -
15 (Not Used) -
16 (Not Used) -
17 (Not Used) -
18 (Not Used) -
19 (Not Used) -
20 (Not Used) -
21 (Not Used) -
22 Carriage HP sensor 0: Sensor ON, 1: Sensor OFF
23 Pressure release switch 0: Realeased, 1:Pressured
24 Media sensor 0: No media, 1: Media loaded
25 (Not Used) -
26 (Not Used) -
27 (Not Used) -
28 Media take-up unit detection 0: Undetected, 1: Detected
29 Media take-up sensor input signal 0: LO, 1: HI
30 Valve open/closed detection sensor (L) 0: Sensor ON, 1: Sensor OFF
31 (Not Used) -
32 (Not Used) -
33 (Not Used) -
34 (Not Used) -
35 (Not Used) -
36 (Not Used) -
37 (Not Used) -
38 (Not Used) -
39 (Not Used) -
40 (Not Used) -
41 (Not Used) -
42 (Not Used) -
43 (Not Used) -
44 (Not Used) -
45 Flexible cable connection detection 0: Connection, 1: Disconnection
(J3501, J3502, J3601, J3602)
46 (Not Used) -
47 (Not Used) -
48 (Not Used) -
7-14
Chapter 7
c) ADJUST
Performs adjustments and prints the adjustment and check patterns necessary for adjusting the printer parts.
1) PRINT PATTERN
Display Description
NOZZLE 1 Prints the nozzle check pattern by single direction/ single pass without using the non-discharging
back up.
It is used to check for the non-discharging nozzles.
- Media size: A4
- Media type: any
OPTICAL AXIS Prints the pattern and adjusts the optical axis of the multi sensor.
For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure
after replacing the carriage unit or multi sensor".
- Media type: photo glossy paper
LF TUNING Carry out automatic correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details, refer to
"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after Replacing the
Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder".
LF TUNING 2 Carry out manual correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details, refer to
"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after Replacing the
Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder".
2) HEAD ADJ.
Set or initialize the registration adjustment values of each printheads.
Display Description
MANUAL HEAD ADJ EXTENSION Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment at CR SCAN SPEED 2 (25inch/sec [high printing
mode]).
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the printed patterns and input the set
values.
Try adjustment in this mode if vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment when the printer driver
option "High-Precision Printing" or "Priority on dot placement accuracy" is selected.
DETAIL Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment at CR SCAN SPEED 3 and 4 (33.3, 40inch/sec).
values.
Try adjustment in this mode if "BASIC" does not improve printing.
BASIC Prints the basic patterns for the manual head adjustment at CR SCAN SPEED 1 to 4 (12.5 to 40inch/sec).
values.
ADJ. SETTING A to F A-1 to F-2 This mode is to input the registration adjustment values.
It is possible to return the values to the former one by printing the status print before changing the value.
SAVE SETTINGS Save the registration adjustment values that has been input.
RESET SETTINGS Initialize the registration adjustment values (to 0).
3) NOZZLE CHECK POS.

This mode is for adjusting the optical axis of the head management sensor. For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Pro-
cedure after replacing the head management sensor".
4) GAP CLIB.
This mode measures the gap between the printhead and media by using the multi sensor and corrects the calibration value.
5) CHANGE LF TYPE
Change the type of the feed roller.
0: Old feed roller
1: New feed roller
7-15
Chapter 7
6) ROUGH
Prints the pattern for auto head adjustment and adjust it (rough adjustment).
7) AUTO REG
Prints the pattern for auto head adjustment and adjust it.
8) CR REG
Executes automatic head adjustment.
Make this adjustment if the registration remains partially misregistered after user-mode head adjustment.
EXECUTE: Execute automatic head adjustment.
RESET: Reset the registration adjustment value (0).
- Applicable media size is A2 (17inch) or larger.

- Applicable media type is photo glossy paper.
If an error message appears when performing CR REG, check the following.

Replace the multi sensor if the error reoccurs after checking and performing CR REG again.
<CHECK>
1. Check for non-discharging of the printhead and dirty media, and replace the printhead and/or media if necessary.
2. Perform [Head Cleaning A].
3. Perform [Head Posi. Adj.]-[Auto].
9) CR MOTOR COG
Adjust the carriage motor rotation.
Perform in the following cases:
- When removing/attaching or replacing the carriage or carriage belt.
- When replacing the carriage motor or linear encoder sensor.
- When there is excessive load on the carriage (such as when jamming)
If the following error message appears when performing CR MOTOR COG, check that carriage and carriage belt are installed properly and clean the carriage shaft.
If the error still occurs, replace the carriage motor.
C R V I B R A T I O N
E R R O R
F-7-9
10) MARGIN ADJ

This mode is to perform the fine adjustment of the leading and trailing edge margin.
Display Description
TOP MARGIN ADJ Set the fine adjustment value of leading edge margin.
Range: -2.0 to 2.0mm (in 0.1mm increments)
BTM MARGIN ADJ Set the fine adjustment value of trailing edge margin.
Range: -2.0 to 2.0mm (in 0.1mm increments)
PRINT PATTERN Print the pattern for checking the margin.
After adjusting the margin, make sure of the margin by printing the pattern.
7-16
Chapter 7
d) FUNCTION
1) CR UNLOCK
Unlocks the carriage.
When CR UNLOCK is performed, the carriage lock pin is lowered and the carriage can be moved.
2) CR LOCK
Locks the carriage.
When CR LOCK is performed, the carriage lock pin is raised and the carriage is locked.
3) PG CHECK
Initializes the purge unit.
4) CR AUTO SCAN
The carriage scans.
When CR AUTO SCAN is performed, the carriage scans with the count, width, and speed set with CR SCAN COUNT/CR SCAN SIZE/CR SCAN SPEED.
5) CR SCAN COUNT
Sets the number of scans (1 to 30) to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.
Default:1
6) CR SCAN SIZE
Sets the scan width to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.
1:A4, 2:17inch, 3:24inch, 4:36inch, 5:44inch
Default:5
7) CR SCAN SPEED
Sets the speed of the scan to be performed with CR AUTO SCAN.
1:12.5, 2:25.0, 3:33.3, 4:40.0 (Unit: inch/sec)
Default:1
MEMO:
The settings made with CR SCAN COUNT, CR SCAN SIZE, CR SCAN SPEED are reset to default when the power is reset.
8) OPT SENS OUTPUT

Displays the values (analog value) multi sensor detected from the media.
You can confirm the amount of margin the media has with the values read with the multi sensor and the status of the multi sensor by comparing the values with the
threshold.
Press the key or key to navigate among OUTPUT 0 to 6 windows.

OUTPUT 0
O U T P U T 0
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5
F-7-10
OUTPUT 1
O U T P U T 1
6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10
F-7-11
OUTPUT 2
O U T P U T 2
11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15
F-7-12
OUTPUT 3
O U T P U T 3
16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20
F-7-13
OUTPUT 4
O U T P U T 4
21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 25
F-7-14
7-17
Chapter 7
OUTPUT 5
O U T P U T 5
26 26 26 27 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 30 30 30
F-7-15
OUTPUT 6
O U T P U T 6
31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 34 34 35 35 35
F-7-16
Display
Description
position
1 Media edge (diffuse reflection) media output (including outside light)
2 Media edge (diffuse reflection) outside light output (when LED is OFF)
3 Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output (excluding outside light)
4 Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain
5 Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value (Unit: X10mA)
6 Media edge (regular reflection) media output (including outside light)
7 Media edge (regular reflection) outside light output (when LED is OFF)
8 Media edge (regular reflection) platen output (excluding outside light)
9 Media edge (regular reflection) gain
10 Media edge (regular reflection) current value (Unit: X10mA)
11 GAP_Far media output (including outside light)
12 GAP_Far outside light output (when LED is OFF)
13 GAP_Far platen output (excluding outside light)
14 GAP_Far gain
15 GAP_Far current value (Unit: X10mA)
16 GAP_Near media output (including outside light)
17 GAP_Near outside light output (when LED is OFF)
18 GAP_Near platen output (excluding outside light)
19 GAP_Near gain
20 GAP_Near current value (Unit: X10mA)
21 Density (red) media output (including outside light)
22 Density (red) outside light output (when LED is OFF)
23 Density (red) platen output (excluding outside light)
24 Density (red) gain
25 Density (red) current value (Unit: X10mA)
26 Density (green) media output
27 Density (green) outside light output (including outside light)
28 Density (green) platen output (excluding outside light)
29 Density (green) gain
30 Density (green) current value (Unit: X10mA)
31 Density (blue) media output (including outside light)
32 Density (blue) outside light output (when LED is OFF)
33 Density (blue) platen output (excluding outside light)
34 Density (blue) gain
35 Density (blue) current value (Unit: X10mA)
MEMO:
- Displays all "?" if "GAP CALIB" is not performed.
- If the value exceeds 1000, 999 is displayed.
7-18
Chapter 7
1. Checking "OUTPUT 0" and "OUTPUT 1" when media (excluding clear film) is fed
[Check 1]
Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible with the multi sensor.
When "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value" are maximum values and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) media
output" is 186 or less, an error occurs.
Maximum value of "Media edge (diffuse reflection)" gain: 255
Maximum value of "Media edge (diffuse reflection)" current value: 320
When the multi sensor and media are normal, the following values are displayed:
Media edge (diffuse reflection) Media edge (diffuse reflection) Media edge (diffuse reflection)
gain current value media output
Plain paper About 10-35 About 200 About 500-600
Glossy paper About 8-25
Tracing paper About 30-100
[Check 2]
Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible with the multi sensor.
When the difference between "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output" is 100 or less, an error occurs.
When the multi sensor and media are normal, the difference is about 300-600.
[Check 3]
Check the effect of external diffuse light.
When the difference between "Media edge (diffuse reflection) external light output" and "Media edge (diffuse reflection) platen output" is 500 or more, the effect
of diffuse light is judged as being great.
When the effect is normal, the difference is about 50-300.
[Check 4]
Check whether the media is compatible.
When the result of "Media edge (regular reflection) gain"x"Media edge (regular reflection) current value" is five times as large as the result of "Media edge (diffuse
reflection) gain"x"Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value", the media is judged as being incompatible with the multi sensor.
If the media is compatible, the result is about 0.5 to 1.5 times for plain/glossy paper; about 1-3 times for tracing paper.
[Check 5]
Check whether the media is compatible.
When the result of "Media edge (diffuse reflection) gain"x"Media edge (diffuse reflection) current value" is in one of the following, the media may be incompatible
with the multi sensor.
- Nine or more times as large as that of plain paper (normally, 2000-7000)
- Ten or more times as large as that of glossy paper (normally, 1600-5000)
- Three or more times as large as that of tracing paper (normally, 6000-20000)
2. Checking "OUTPUT 0" when clear film is fed
[Check 1]
Check whether the multi sensor performance has degraded or whether the media is compatible.
When the "Media edge (regular reflection) gain" and "Media edge (regular reflection) current value" are maximum values and "Media edge (regular reflection)
media output" is 186 or less, an error occurs.
Maximum value of "media edge (regular reflection)" gain: 255
Maximum value of "media edge (regular reflection)" current value: 320
When the multi sensor and media are normal, the following values are displayed:
Media edge (regular Media edge (regular Media edge (regular

reflection) gain reflection) current value reflection) media output
Clear film About 10-60 About 200 About 500-600
[Check 2]
When the difference between "Media edge (regular reflection) gain" and "Media edge (regular reflection) platen output" is 100 or less, an error occurs.
When the multi sensor and media are normal, the difference is about 250-500.
[Check 3]
Check the effect of external diffuse light.
When the difference between "Media edge (regular reflection) external light output" and "Media edge (regular reflection) platen output" is 500 or more, the effect
of diffuse light is judged as being great.
When the effect is normal, the difference is about 50-300.
3. Checking "OUTPUT 2/OUTPUT 3" and "OUTPUT 4/OUTPUT 5/OUTPUT 6"
[Check 1]
When "GAP gain" and "GAP current value" are maximum values and "GAP media output" is 93 or less, an error occurs.
Maximum value of "GAP gain": 255
Maximum value of "GAP current value": 320
When the multi sensor and media are normal, "GAP gain" is about 30-250; "GAP current value" is about 200.
7-19
Chapter 7
[Check 2]
When "Density gain" and "Density current value" are maximum values and "Density media output" is 168 or less, an error occurs.
Maximum value of "Density gain": 255
Maximum value of "Density current value": 245
When the multi sensor performance and media are normal, "Density gain" is about 5-100; "Density current value" is about 200.
9) NOZZLE CHK
Checks for non-discharging nozzle with head management sensor.
10) NOZZLE INF

Displays the result of non-discharging nozzle check performed with "NOZZLE CHECK" by nozzle row of each ink color.
- Press the key or key to switch the ink color.
- AE:A-EVEN row, AO:A-ODD row, BE:B-EVEN row, BO:B-ODD row
C A E : O K A O : O K
B E : O K B O : O K
F-7-17
11) MEMORY CHK
Display Description
DDR Checks the DDR-SDRAM mounted on the Main Controller PCB.
EEP Checks the EEPROM.
12) HEAD CNT CHK

Confirms the contact status of the printhead.
e) REPLACE
1) L&R PRINTHEADS
Replaces printheads L and R.
f) COUNTER
Displays the life (operation frequency and time) of each unit, print counts for each media type, and else.
The count values can be printed from [PRINT INF].
1) PRINTER: Counters related to product life

LIFE TTL Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE ROLL Cumulative number of printed roll media (equivalent of A4) sheets
LIFE CUTSHEET Cumulative number of printed cut sheets (equivalent to A4) sheets
LIFE A-F Cumulative number of printed media for environments A to F sheets
POWER ON Cumulative power-on time (excluding the sleep time) Hours
W-INK Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge %
CUTTER Number of cutting operations (count as 1 by moving back and Times
forth)
WIPE Number of wiping operations Times
SLEEP ON Cumulative sleep-on time Hours
2) CARRIAGE: Counters related to carriage unit

PRINT Cumulative printing time Hours
DRIVE Cumulative carriage moving time Hours
CR COUNT Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back and forth) Times
CR DIST. Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving 210mm) Times
PRINT COUNT Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping) Times
7-20
Chapter 7
3) PURGE: Counters related to purge unit

CLN-A-1 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations Times
CLN-A-2 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level adjusting) operations Times
CLN-A-3 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling) operations Times
CLN-A-6 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal suction) operations Times
CLN-A-7 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging) operations Times
CLN-A-10 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling after secondary transportation) operations Times
CLN-A-11 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling after head replacement) operations Times
CLN-A-15 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count small suction) operations Times
CLN-A-16 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented ink agitation) operations Times
CLN-A-17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction) operations Times
CLN-A-TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations Times
CLN-M-1 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations Times
CLN-M-4 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from head after head replacement) operations Times
CLN-M-5 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from head and tube before transportation ) operations Times
CLN-M-6 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong suction) operations Times
CLN-M-TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations Times
4) CLEAR: Counters related to counter initialization
Display Description Unit Remarks

CLR-INK CONSUME Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount clearing Times
CLR-MTC EXC. Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count clearing Times
CLR-HEAD L EXC. Cumulative count of printhead L replacement count clearing Times
CLR-HEAD R EXC. Cumulative count of printhead R replacement count clearing Times
CLR Wia-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit Wia-1 (waste ink box unit) replacement count Times
clearing
CLR Wia-3 EXC. Cumulative count of unit Wia-3 (platen ink box unit) replacement count Times
clearing
clearing
clearing
CLR Wia-6 EXC. Cumulative count of unit Wia-6 (suction fan unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR CR-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-1 (carriage unit bushing) replacement count Times
clearing
CLR CR-2 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-2 (linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft Times
cleaner) replacement count clearing
CLR CR-3 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-3 (carriage height changing cam) replacement Times
count clearing
CLR CR-4 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-4 (ink tube unit/flexible cable unit) replacement Times
count clearing
CLR CR-5 EXC. Cumulative count of unit CR-5 (multi sensor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR PG-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit PG-1 (purge unit) replacement count clearing Times
CLR HMa-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit HMa-1 (head management sensor) replacement count Times
clearing
CLR MT-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit MT-1 (carriage motor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR PL-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit PL-1 (feed motor) replacement count clearing Times
CLR Mi-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit Mi-1 (mist fan) replacement count clearing Times
CLR MS-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit MS-1 (multi sensor) replacement count clearing Times Calibration error index, This counter
synchronizes with CLR CR-5 EXC.
CLR-FACTORY CNT. For factory Times
7-21
Chapter 7
5) EXCHANGE: Counters related to parts replacement

MTC EXC. Maintenance cartridge replacement count Times
HEAD L EXC. Printhead L replacement count Times
HEAD R EXC. Printhead R replacement count Times
BOARD EXC.(M/B) Main controller PCB replacement count Times
Wia-1 EXC. Wia-1 (waste ink box unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS Wia-1])
Wia-3 EXC. Wia-3 (platen ink box unit) replacement count Times
Wia-6 EXC. Wia-6 (suction fan unit) replacement count Times
CR-1 EXC. CR-1 (carriage unit bushing) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS CR-1])
CR-2 EXC. CR-2 (linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft cleaner) replacement count Times
CR-3 EXC. CR-3 (carriage height changing cam) replacement count Times
CR-4 EXC. CR-4 (ink tube unit/flexible cable unit) replacement count Times
CR-5 EXC. CR-5 (multi sensor) replacement count Times
PG-1 EXC. PG-1 (purge unit) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS PG-1])
HMa-1 EXC. HMa-1 (head management sensor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS HMa-1])
MT-1 EXC. MT-1 (carriage motor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS MT-1])
PL-1 EXC. PL-1 (feed motor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS PL-1])
Mi-1 EXC. Mi-1 (mist fan) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS Mi-1])
MS-1 EXC. MS-1 (multi sensor) replacement count Times
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS MS-1])
6) DETAIL-CNT: Other counters

MOVE PRINTER A(B,C,D,E) A: Number of times "MOVE PRINTER" on Main menu is executed Times
B: Number of times "LEVEL 1" is executed
C: Number of times "LEVEL 2" is executed
D: Number of times "LEVEL 3" is executed
E: "LEVEL" of previously executed "MOVE PRINTER"
N-INKCHK(XX) XX: Ink color Times
Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for each color
MEDIACONFIG-CNT Count of media registered by media editor Times
7) INK-USE1: Counters related to ink consumption

INK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink
INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of cumulative consumption of generic ink ml
LINK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative consumption amount of generic large ink
LINK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of cumulative consumption of generic large ink ml
SINK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative consumption amount of generic small ink
SINK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of cumulative consumption of generic small ink ml
N-INK-USE1(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink
N-INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of cumulative consumption of refilled ink ml
7-22
Chapter 7
8) INK-USE2: Counters related to ink consumption

INK-USE2(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tank.
INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml
N-INK-USE2(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tank
N-INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tanks ml
9) INK-EXC: Counters related to ink tank replacement

INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement
INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement ml
N-INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color ml
Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement
N-INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement ml
10) MEDIA x (x: 1 to 7): Counters related to media

One to seven media types are displayed individually in order with large cumulative print area.

NAME Media type -
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) Sq.m
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (metric) Sq.m
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (inch) Sq.f
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric) Sq.m
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
11) MEDIA OTHER: Counters related to media

Displays the total amount of cumulative print area of the other media type than the above-mentioned.

NAME Media type -
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric) Sq.m
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (metric) Sq.m
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media (inch) Sq.f
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric) Sq.m
CUT SHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch) Sq.f
12) MEDIASIZE1 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

P-SQ 44-60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
P-CNT 44-60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets
(physical size)
(physical size)
(physical size)
(physical size)
P-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets
7-23
Chapter 7
13) MEDIASIZE2 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing

D-SQ 44-60 Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
D-CNT 44-60 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 44 inches but less than 60 inches sheets
(data size)
(data size)
(data size)
(data size)
D-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets
14) MEDIASIZE1 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

P-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size) m2/Sq.f
(physical size)
(physical size)
(physical size)
(physical size)
P-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (physical size) sheets
15) MEDIASIZE2 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing

D-SQ -17 Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size) m2/Sq.f
(data size)
(data size)
(data size)
(data size)
D-CNT -17 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data size) sheets
16) HEAD DOT CNT.1: Counter related to dot count

XX XX: Ink color (x 1,000,000) dots
Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead
TTL Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead (x 1,000,000) dots
17) HEAD DOT CNT.2: Counter related to dot count

XX XX: Ink color (x 1,000,000) dots
Cumulative dot counts of each colors
TTL Total cumulative dot counts of each colors (x 1,000,000) dots
7-24
Chapter 7
18) PARTS CNT. : Counter related to consumable parts
C O U N T E R C R - 1
a a b b b b b
F-7-18
The displays are selectable with the and keys.

Counter of the consumable part (current)
1 : x x x x x
F-7-19
Life of the consumable part
2 : x x x x x
F-7-20
Use rate until part replacement
3 : x x x %
F-7-21
Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)
4 : x x x x x
F-7-22

COUNTER xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts Days
xx-x (For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Display the status (aa) and the days passed since the counter (bbbb) resetting.
- Status
OK: Use rate (until part replacement) of all consumable parts included in each unit
are below 90%.
W1: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in
each unit has reached 90% or more.
W2: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in
each unit has reached 100%, but no need to stop the printer.
E : Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts included in
each unit has reached 100%, and the printer needs to be stopped.
1: Unit number of consumable parts
Counter of the consumable part (current)
2: Life of the consumable part
3: Use rate until part replacement %
4: Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)
7-25
Chapter 7
g) SETTING
Make various settings.
1) Pth
Turn on or off the head pulse rank control function.
Default: OFF
2) RTC
Set RTC (real time clock) after replacing the lithium battery on the main controller PCB.
Display Description
DATE yyyy/mm/dd Set date
TIME hh:mm Set time
3) PV AUTO JUDGE
Sets ink saver mode.
Default: OFF
4) NETWORK
See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.
5) E-RDS
See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.
6) HEAD DOT INF
Select whether to display the message as the result of non-discharging nozzle detection or not.
Default: ON
Number of non-discharging
ON OFF
nozzle (nozzle/2,560-nozzles)
0-99 Displays a message to check the -
printing.
100-319 Displays a message to check the head. -
320 or more Displays a message to replace the head.
7-26
Chapter 7
h) INITIALIZE
Clear the [DISPLAY] histories, [ADJUST] settings, [COUNTER] values, and other parameters.
Display Description
WARNING Initialize the history of WARNING.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] will be initialized.)
ERROR Initialize the history of ERROR.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [ERROR] will be initialized.)
JAM Initialize the history of JAM.
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [JAM] will be initialized.)
ADJUST Initialize the value of band adjustment (by user) and head adjustment.
The automatically adjusted value will not be initialized.
W-INK Initialize the remaining capacity (%) of the maitenance cartridge.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PRINTER] > [W-INK])
CARRIAGE Initialize the counter related to carriage unit.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [CARRIAGE])
PURGE Initialize the counter related to purge unit.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PURGE])
INK-USE CNT Initialize the consumption amount of ink.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [INK-USE2], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-INK
CONSUME])
W-INK-CHG CNT Initialize the maintenance cartridge replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [MTC EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR]
> [CLR-MTC EXC.])
HEAD-CHG L CNT Initialize the printhead L replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [HEAD L EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] >
[CLEAR] > [CLR-HEAD L EXC.])
HEAD-CHG R CNT Initialize the printhead R replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [HEAD R EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] >
[CLEAR] > [CLR-HEAD R EXC.])
HDD BOX PASS. ALL FOLDERS Initialize the BOX password of all folders of the hard disk drive to factory default.
FOLDER xx Initialize the BOX password of FOLDER xx of the hard disk drive to factory default.
PARTS-CHG PARTS xx-x xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts
CNT (For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Initialize the consumable part replacement frequency.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [xx-x EXC], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR]
> [CLR xx-x EXC.])
PARTS PARTS xx-x xx-x: Unit number of consumable parts
COUNTER (For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")
Initialize the counter amount of the consumable parts.
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PARTS CNT.] > [COUNTER xx-x])
* After replacing the consumable part, be sure to execute this menu.
USER SETTING Initializes the user menu.
Same as executing the following mode in the user menu.
-[Set./Adj. Menu]-[System Setup]-[Reset PaprSetngs]
-[Set./Adj. Menu]-[Interface Setup]-[Return Defaults]
CA-KEY See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.
ERDS-DAT See "e-maintenance/imageWARE Remote" for detail.
JOB LOG Initialize the history of JOB LOG.
7-27
Chapter 7
7.1.4 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote

0023-1100
1. Overview
The e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system allows a customer's device information and status to be monitored via the Internet on a server called the UGW
(Universal Gateway) Server.
The following device information/ statuses can be monitored.

- Service mode counters
- Parts counters
- Mode counters
- Firmware information
- Service call errors log
- Jam log
- Alarm log
- Alert change statuses (Toner/ ink low/ out, etc.)
Device monitor information above is sent by the e-RDS (embedded Remote Diagnostic System), which is embedded in the devices.
Further, as the above is all customer information, https SOAP protocol is used for communication between the UGW and the device, providing enhanced security
(SSL client communication)
UGW
e-RDS
F-7-23
2. Feature and benefits
Device (e-RDS) embedded with network module can realize a front-end processing of the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system without attaching an extra
hardware equipment.
The e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote system can be implemented without imposing a burden on the users.
3. Settings procedures
3.1 Advance preparations
To monitor the device with e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote, the following settings are required.
1) Advance confirmation
Check with the UGW administrator whether the printer to be connected to the e-Maintenance/imageWARE remotely has been registered in the UGW.
2) Advance preparations
Interview the user's system administrator in advance to find out the following information about the network.
Information item -1
IP address setting methods
Check whether automatic setting or manual setting is to be used, and confirm the information below.
- Automatic setting: (DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) (ON/OFF selection)
or
- Manual setting: IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
Information item -2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
- Primary DNS server address
- Secondary DNS server address (optional)
Information item -3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
- Proxy server address
- Port number connected to proxy server
Information item -4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
- User name and password required for proxy authentication
3) Network settings
Make the network settings based on the information obtained in "2) Advance preparations."
Network settings are made in user mode. Therefore, it is assumed that the user has already set it. However, there are a few cautions as described below, and if
necessary, there may be cases in which the service technicians do it after obtaining an approval from user.
Caution point -1
Proxy server settings
Proxy server settings cannot be made in "Remote UI". Enter from the operation panel menu. In addition, the operation panel menu items for proxy server only appear
when e-RDS functions are enabled. Therefore, when you make proxy server settings, turn the "E-RDS SWITCH" setting to "ON" as described in later sections
beforehand.
Caution point -2
Validate the settings (restart the printer)
7-28
Chapter 7
The server address settings are activated only after you restart the printer. Make sure you always restart the printer after changing server address settings.
(1) How to enter Proxy server address
[1]
Server Address [a]
http://_
: Select [2]
Stop : Delete
Navi : a -> A -> 1
[OK:Set]
F-7-24
[1] Display to show enter mode

a: Small alphabet letter
A: Capital alphabet letter
1: Numerical character
[2] URL entry field (128 one-byte characters)
- Following symbols exist in each enter mode. (When you press the key, characters on the right hand side will appear.)
[a] Small alphabet letter mode: [Symbol] abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
[A] Capital alphabet letter mode: [Symbol] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
[1] Numerical character mode: [Symbol] 1234567890
- [Symbol] appears in the following order.
key key
F-7-25
- Within the URL entry field, you can use the or key to select a character, and the or key to move the cursor.
- The Stop key has the Delete function when there is a character at the cursor position. (The character at the position of the cursor is deleted, moving all following
characters one position toward freed place.)
If there is no character at the cursor position, it has the Backspace function. (The character at the left of the cursor is deleted, moving the cursor.)
- When you move the cursor to a position of a character and press the or key, you can insert characters.
(The character at the cursor position is moved to the right, and a new character is inserted.
- You can select the enter mode with the Navi key. (The default setting is small alphabet letter.)
(2) How to enter port number
Port Number
00001
(1-65535)
L / R
UP / DOWN
[ OK : S e t ]
F-7-26
- Possible to set between 1 and 65535 (The default display is 1).
- The top digit can be selected between 0 and 6. Other digits can be selected between 0 and 9.
- When OK key is pressed, and the value is over 65535, it is fixed on 65535.
- When OK key is pressed, and the value is 0, it is fixed on 1.
7-29
Chapter 7
(3) How to enter user name
Proxy User [a]
User Name Canon
: Select [1]
Stop : Delete
Navi : a -> A -> 1
[OK:Set]
F-7-27
[1] Entry filed (24 one-byte characters)
- It is the same as the entering method of proxy server address.
(4) How to enter password
Proxy Password [a]
: Select [1]
Stop : Delete
Navi : a -> A -> 1
[ OK : S e t ]
F-7-28
[1] Entry filed (24 one-byte characters)
- If a password has already been set, when you press the or key at any cursor position, all the "*" will disappear and the first letter will be entered as the first
character.
- Entered characters are visible until you press OK key. Once entering into the menu again, they will be changed to "*".
- Other information is the same as the entering method of proxy server address.
3.2 e-RDS settings

1) Enter the service mode.
- Turn off the printer power.
- Turn on the power while pressing the [Load] key and [Navigate] key.
* Keep pressing the above keys until "Initializing" is displayed.
- "S" appears at the top right of the display.
- Press the or key to choose the [Set./Adj. Menu]and press the [OK] key.
* "SERVICE MODE" appears in the menu list and the MESSAGE LED flashes.
- Press the key or key to choose "SERVICE MODE" and press the [OK] key.
2) Set the following e-RDS setting items No.1-4.

(If the result of the communication test (COM-TEST) is "NG", execute setting items No.5-6 to solve the problem.)
No. Item Type Description

1 E-RDS SWITCH 2 bytes OFF : Disable/ ON : Enable e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system to send device information,
meter data, and error statuses to the UGW.
Default value is OFF (not in use)
2 UGW-ADDRESS 129 bytes The UGW address by default : https://a01---.
(NULL The complete address is not provided in this document for security reason.
included, SJIS
not allowed)
3 UGW-PORT 4 bytes The UGW Port Number by default : 443
Validation : 1-65535
4 COM-TEST To perform Communication test with UGW and set "OK!"/ "NG!" as the result.
5 COM-LOG Detailed communication data log
Switches to display time when error occurred, error code, and error data up to now.
Max 30 loggings retained.
Max 128 characters (not containing NULL) for Error information.
6 ERDS-DAT Initialize e-RDS setting data
7-30
Chapter 7
3.3 Service Mode Menu Tree
DISPLAY
I/O DISPLAY
ADJUST
FUNCTION
REPLACE
COUNTER
SETTEING Pth
RTC
PV AUTO JUDGE
NETWORK CERTIFICATE CA-CERTIFICATE VALIDITY:*1 yyyy/mm/dd
E-RDS E-RDS SWITCH:*1 ON/OFF
UGW-ADDRESS:*1 http://XXX
UGW-PORT:*1 XXXXX
COM-TEST:*1 YES
COM-LOG:*1
HEAD DOT INF
INITIALIZE WARNING
ERROR
JAM
ADJUST
W-INK
CARRIAGE
PURGE
INK-USE CNT
W-INK-CHG CNT
HEAD-CHG CNT
HDD BOX PASS
PARTS-CHG CNT
PARTS COUNTER
USER SETTEING
CA-KEY:*1 YES/NO
ERDS-DAT:*1 YES/NO
JOB LOG YES/NO
* Press key to move to the next menu of the same layer, and press key to move to the menu of one layer deeper.
* The menus shown in '*1' are the e-RDS-related menus.
3.4 e-RDS Related Setting Details

1) e-RDS's Operation Mode [E-RDS SWITCH]
In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [E-RDS SWITCH] menu using key and key.
(1) Choose between [ON] or [OFF] using the and keys.
E - R D S S W I T C H
O F F
F-7-29
(2) Press [OK] key to determine the operation mode and go back to the previous screen.
E - R D S S W I T C H
= O N
F-7-30
- When the operation mode is determined, "=" will be displayed.
- OFF: When it is set to [OFF], e-RDS is not used. Default value is OFF.
- ON: When it is set to [ON], e-RDS is used.
7-31
Chapter 7
2) UGW Address [UGW-ADDRESS] and UGW port [UGW-PORT]

Usually, the default values set in advance are used for the setting value of [UGW-ADDRESS] and [UGW-PORT]. Unless there is a special instruction, the default
value should not be changed. If it should be changed, the communication with UGW may have an error. If [UGW-ADDRESS] and [UGW-PORT] are changed, the
new setting will be enabled after power OFF/ON.
Therefore, usually, the setup is not necessary.
* If you change under a special instruction, perform the following procedure.
(1) Setting address for UGW
- In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [UGW-ADDRESS] menu using key and key.
E - R D S
U G W A D D R E S S
F-7-31
- Press key to enter the Setup Mode. (A character indicating the input mode (in the upper right corner of the screen) and the cursor are displayed.)
Enter UGW address (URL).
U G W - A D D R E S S : a
h t t p : / /
F-7-32
Display to indicate an input mode
A: Alphabet capital letter
a: Alphabet small letter
1: Numerical character
- The cursor is shown at the first letter.
- Use and keys to select characters to enter.
- Press [Back] key to cancel what you entered and go back to the previous screen.
- Press [OK] key to determine what you entered and go back to the previous screen.
(2) Setting up the GW Port Number

- In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [UGW-PORT] menu using key and key.
E - R D S
U G W P O R T
F-7-33
- Press key to enter the Setup Mode. (A cursor is displayed.)

Enter a port number.
U G W - P O R T
0 0 0 0 0
F-7-34
- Use and keys to select characters to enter.

- Press [Back] key to cancel what you entered and go back to the previous screen.
- Press [OK] key to determine what you entered and go back to the previous screen.
* The actual setting value of UGW address [UGW-ADDRESS] and UGW port [UGW-PORT] are categorized as confidential information, so they are not described
in this manual.
3) Communication Test [COM-TEST]

(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [COM-TEST] menu using key and key.
C O M - T E S T
Y E S
F-7-35
(2) Press [OK] key to start the test. ("=" is displayed at the start of the test.)
C O M - T E S T
= Y E S
F-7-36
(3) During the communication test, "CHECK NOW" is displayed.
C O M - T E S T
C H E C K N O W . .
F-7-37
7-32
Chapter 7
- Once the communication test is started, it cannot be cancelled.(Other operation won't be accepted until the result is obtained.)
(4) If the communication test was successful, "CHECK RSLT:OK" is displayed.
C O M - T E S T
C H E C K R S L T : O K
F-7-38
- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-TEST] menu.
(5) If the communication test was failed, "CHECK RSLT:NG" is displayed.
C O M - T E S T
C H E C K R S L T : N G
F-7-39
- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-TEST] menu.
- If you cannot obtain the result after 30 seconds from the start of a communication test, the test is considered failed and the same screen will appear.
* When the communication test was successful, it is necessary to take the interval of 5 minutes before performing the next communication test.
4) Communication Log [COM-LOG]

Communication Error Information/Detailed Communication Error Information can be displayed on the screen at the time of a communication error with the Service
Center (including proxy server error). When a communication error occurs, you can refer to this information to study how to deal with the problem.
* For the countermeasure corresponding to each Communication Error Information or Detailed Communication Error Information, see the list of error message in
"4. Troubleshoot".
(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [COM-LOG] menu using key and key.
E - R D S
C O M - L O G
F-7-40
(2) Press key, and communication error information is displayed. On the upper line of the LCD, a log number (01-30) and an error code are shown; on the
bottom line, an occurrence date and time of the error is shown.
N o : 0 1 X X X X X X X X H
Y Y Y Y / M M / D D H H : M M
F-7-41
- COM-LOG information can be saved up to 30 cases.
- Use Right and Left keys to change logs to display.
- Logs are displayed in the sequence of the time of occurrence. (Log number 1 is the latest log.)
- Press key to exit this operation mode and go back to the top of [COM-LOG] menu.
* If the Communication Error Information is not saved, the screen below will appear.
C O M - L O G
N O L O G
F-7-42
- Press key to exit the communication error information screen and go back to the top of [COM-LOG] menu.
(3) Press key to display the Detailed Communication Error Information (maximum 128 characters).
1st-32nd characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
F-7-43
33rd-64th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.
F-7-44
7-33
Chapter 7
65th-96th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.
F-7-45
97th-128th characters of Detailed Communication Error Information are shown.
F-7-46
- Use and keys to move among Screen and Screen. (Detailed Communication Error Information can be made with maximum 128 characters, however, even
if the information is made up with 1 to 96 characters, all Screens are still displayed.)
- Press key to exit the Detailed Communication Error Information screen and go back to the Communication Error Information screen.
* If Detailed Communication Error Information does not exist, the screen below will appear.
N O E R R O R D E T A I L
F-7-47
- Press key to exit the Detailed Communication Error Information screen and go back to the Communication Error Information screen.
5) Initializing the e-RDS setting [ERDS-DAT]

Usually, the setup is not necessary.
Use this procedure when you want to reset the e-RDS settings to the factory default.
(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [ERDS-DAT] menu using key and key.
E - R D S D A T
N O
F-7-48
(2) Choose between YES/NO using and keys, and press [OK] key to set.
E - R D S D A T
= Y E S
F-7-49
- Press [OK] key, and "=" will appear and the initializing process will begin.
[NO]: Do not initialize the e-RDS setting. Default value is [NO].

[YES]: Initialize the e-RDS setting.
6) Displaying the CA Certificate Information [VALIDITY]

For the secure communication between the device (e-RDS) and the UGW, an authentication technology from a certification authority is used. A license has been
issued from the certification authority. For this reason, the devices are shipped with the CA (Certificate Authority) certificate enabled in advance to prove the license
obtained.
To confirm that this CA certificate is valid or how long it will be valid, you can display the expiration date of the CA certificate information.
(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [VALIDITY] menu using key and key.
C A - C E R T I F I C A T E
V A L I D I T Y
F-7-50
(2) Press key, and the expiration date of the CA certificate will be displayed.
V A L I D I T Y
Y Y Y Y / M M / D D
F-7-51
7-34
Chapter 7
- Press key to exit the CA certificate expiration date display screen and go back to the top of [VALIDITY] menu.
* If the CA certificate is deleted, the screen below will appear.
V A L I D I T Y
N O T I N S T A L L E D
F-7-52
- Press key to exit the CA certificate expiration date display screen and go back to the top of [VALIDITY] menu.
7) Deleting the CA Certificate [CA-KEY]

For the secure communication between the device (e-RDS) and the UGW, an authentication technology from a certification authority is used. A license has been
issued from the certification authority. For this reason, the devices are shipped with the CA (Certificate Authority) certificate enabled in advance to prove the license
obtained.
The device (e-RDS) uses this CA certificate to communicate with the UGW, thus CA must not be deleted.
* If you delete the CA certificate under a special instruction, perform the following procedure.
(1) In service mode, referring to the "Service Mode Menu Tree", go to [CA-KEY] menu using key and key.
C A - K E Y
N O
F-7-53
(2) Choose between YES/NO using and keys, and press [OK] key to set.
C A - K E Y
= Y E S
F-7-54
- Press [OK] key, and "=" will appear and the initializing process will begin.
[NO]: Do not delete the CA certificate. Default value is [NO].

[YES]: Delete the CA certificate.
7-35
Chapter 7
4. FAQ
No. Question Answer

Q1 Registration information of the device (E-RDS) is once When registration of the device (e-RDS) is deleted from the
deleted from the UGW server, and is re-registered after that. UGW, the status will be changed to the communication test
If a communication test is not not completed because related
carried out, then device information on UGW becomes information has lost from a database. Therefore, device
invalid. information will also become invalid if that condition persists
for seven days without carrying out the communication
test. Hence, to avoid the invalid condition, carry out the
communication test.
Q2 The communication test with the UGW server results NG! The comunication test might become NG in the following
cases.
- 1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name
or DNS server has been halted.
- 2. Network cable is blocked off. Network cable is broken.
- 3. Proxy server settings are not correct.
Q3 Could you describe the timing of data transmitting from the The schedule of data transmitting, and the start time are
device (e-RDS) to the UGW, and what data size is sent to the determined by settings in the UGW side. The timing is once
UGW? per 16 hours by default, and counter data size is maximum
1400 bytes.
Q4 Can I turn the device power off during the device (e-RDS) While operating the device (e-RDS), the power of the printer
operation? and network equipment such as HUB must be ON. If power
OFF is needed, do not leave it OFF for a long time.
An error such as "Device is busy, try later"could occur if the
power supply of network
equipment is made prolonged OFF.
5. Troubleshooting
No. Condition detected Action

1 The communication test has failed. Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
- Check the communication log from COM-LOG. -> Execute "Remedy" in the "Error
message list".
- Check whether RGW-ADDRESS or RGW-PORT settings have changed.
7-36
Chapter 7
6. Error message list

Details of the errors and their remedies are as described below.
(The meaning of server indicates the UGW in this section)
No. Error Code Error Message Cause Remedy

1 0500 0003 SUSPEND: E-RDS has been booted up (device reboot) with E- Perform the communication test [COMTEST] in service mode.
Communication test is not RDS SWITCH = ON but the
performed communication test had not yet been performed.
2 8600 0002 Event Registration is Failed Event Registration is Failed Processing (event Turn the device OFF/ ON. If the error persists, replace the
8600 0003 processing) within the device has failed. device system software (firmware).
8600 0101 (Upgrade)
8600 0201
8600 0305
8600 0401
8600 0403
8600 0414
8600 0415
3 8xxx 2001 URL Scheme error (not https) The header of the URL of the registered UGW is Check that the value of UGW-ADR has been entered correctly
not in https format. A "https://" input error. as https://a01---.
4 8xxx 200A Server connection error An UGW connection error. Displayed in the event Check the network-related settings according to "No.1:
of a TCP/IP communication fault. Communication test is not performed" in "Troubleshooting".
5 8xxx 2002 URL server specified is illegal A URL different to that specified by the UGW has Check that the value of UGW-ADR has been entered correctly
been set. An URL address setting error. as https://a01---.
6 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection error Cannot connect to proxy server. Check proxy server address and re-enter if necessary.
Displayed when unable to connect to proxy server.
7 8xxx 201E Proxy authentication error Displayed when the authentication to the proxy Check the user name and password required in order to login
server has failed. to the proxy, and re-enter if necessary.
8 8xxx 2028 Server certificate error Device's route certificate is unavailable. Reinstall the latest device system software (firmware).
(Upgrade)
9 8xxx 2046 Server certificate expired The route certificate registered with the device has Check that the device time and date are correctly set. If the
expired. device time and date are correct, upgrade to the latest system
software (firmware).
10 8xxx 2058 Unknown error Some other kind of communication error has Try again after a period of time. If the same error occurs again,
occurred. check the UGW status with the UGW administrator.
11 8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault SOAP communication error has occurred. Check that the value of UGW-PORT is 443.
12 8xxx 0101 Server response error (NULL) A UGW response error (when UGW error code Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists,
processing has failed). check the UGW status with the UGW administrator.
A HTTPS communication error.
13 8xxx 2004 Server response error A UGW response error. Check an error code (hexadecimal) returned from the UGW,
(Hexadecimal) Displayed when communication with UGW has then retry after a period of time.
[Error detailed in the UGW]:*1 been successful, but an error of some sort has
prevented UGW from responding.
14 xxxx xxxx Device internal error An internal device error. An error due to the device Switch the device OFF/ ON. Or, replace the device system
side. software. (Upgrade)
15 8xxx 0201 Server schedule is invalid During the communication test, there has been When the error occurs, report the details to the support
8xxx 0202 some kind of error in the schedule values passed department. Then, after the UGW side has responded, retry the
8xxx 0203 from UGW. communication test.
8xxx 0204
8xxx 0206
16 8xxx 2047 Server response time out UGW response time out. If this error occurs when the communication test is being run,
Due to network congestion, etc., the response from wait some time and rerun the test.
UGW does not come within the specified time.
17 8xxx 2048 Server not found There is a mistake in the UGW URL, and UGW Check that the value of Service mode > E-RDS/RGW-ADR is
cannot be accessed. https://a01---.
18 84xx 0003 E-RDS switch is set OFF E-RDS is disabled. Set E-RDS SWITCH = ON, and run COM-TEST in service
mode.
19 0xxx 0003 Server schedule is not exist Server schedule does not exist. Check the device settings status with the UGW administrator.
Blank schedule data has been received from UGW.
20 8xxx 2003 Network is not ready, try later Network-related settings have not been made for Make network-related settings properly for the device
the device. (printer).
21 8xxx 2052 URL error A URL setting error. Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https://a01---.
Non-URL text string entered in URL field.
22 8xxx 2015 Proxy address resolution error A proxy server address resolution error. Check that the proxy server name is correct.
23 8xxx 2029 Server certificate verify error The server certificate verification (URL check) Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https://a01---.
error.
24 8xxx 200B Server address resolution error UGW address resolution has failed. Check that the value of UGW-ADR is https:// a01---.
*1:[Hexadecimal] indicates an error code returned from the UGW in hexadecimal.
7. Service cautions
After performing the following service actions, it is necessary to perform the resetting of the e-RDS.
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become unusual.
- System software (firmware) upgrade

- After replacing the main controller board, the following settings in service mode must not be changed unless there are specific instructions to do so. Changing
these values will cause error in communication with the UGW.
(Initial values)
UGW-PORT: 443
UGW-ADDRESS: https://a01---.
7-37
Chapter 7
7.1.5 Viewing PRINT INF

0026-6836
a) PRINT INF item detail

The details of each PRINT INF item displayed when performing [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [PRINTINF] are as follows:
Print item Print content Printed value

SYSTEM S/N Serial number of printer characters/numerals of 8-byte
TYPE Type setting on main controller PCB 44
LF TYPE Feed roller type 0: old type roller
1: new type roller
TMP Ambient temperature Unit: Centigrade degree
RH Ambient humidity Unit: %
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction) mm (0 is always detected for the roll media.)
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction) mm
AFTER INST. Number of days since initial installation Unit: Day(s)
HEAD S/N L Serial number of printhead L characters/numerals (8 digits)
S/N R Serial number of printhead R characters/numerals (8 digits)
LOT L Lot number of printhead L characters/numerals (8 digits)
LOT R Lot number of printhead R characters/numerals (8 digits)
INK BK, MBK, C, M, Number of days passed since the ink tank was installed Unit: Days
Y, PC, PM, GY
WARNING 01 to 20 Warning history (up to 20 events) Number: Lowest is the most recent
Date: mm/dd
Time: mm/ss
Code: Last 4 digits
Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4)
ERROR 01 to 20 Error history (up to 20 events) Number: Lowest is the most recent
Date: mm/dd
Time: mm/ss
Code: Last 4 digits
Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4)
7-38
Chapter 7

JOB CONDITION 01-05 Job history (up to 5 events) Number: Lowest is the most recent
1 Print mode 1: [Image]-[Highest] (Image high-precision)
2: [Image]-[Highest] (Line dwawing and text high-
precision)
3: [Image]-[Highest]
4: [Image]-[High] (Line dwawing and text high-
precision) or [Line Drawing/Text]-[High]
5: [Image]-[High]
6: [Image]-[Standard] (Line dwawing and text high-
precision) or [Line Drawing/Text]-[Standard]
7: [Image]-[Standard]
8: [Line Drawing/Text]-[Draft]
9: [Image]-[Draft]
10: [Image]-[Draft] (Economy) or [Office Document]-
[Standard]
11: Exception mode
2 Head height a(n)
- Description of "a"
A: Automatic setting
H: Fixed setting
- Description of "n"
0: SL(1.2mm)
1: L(1.4mm)
2: M1(1.8mm)
3: M2(2.0mm)
4: M3(2.2mm)
5: H(2.6mm)
*: Unknown
3 Temperature and humidity
4 Media type Display media name
*: Unknown
5 Printing date & time
6 Job name Name stored to the HDD
7 Registration condition A: The gap used to the printing matches with the gap of
inner registration adjustment value.
B: The gap used to the printing don't match with the gap
of inner registration adjustment value.
C: There is no registration adjustment value.
HEAD 01-05 Adjustment history (up to 5 events) Number: Lowest is the most recent
ADJUSTMENT 1 Adjustment type manu: Manual adjustment
auto(d): Automatic adjustment (detail)
auto(s): Automatic adjustment (standard)
auto(e): Automatic adjustment (expansion)
2 Head height a(n)
- Description of "a"
A: Automatic setting
H: Fixed setting
AE: Adjustment error (automatic setting)
HE: Adjustment error (fixed setting)
- Description of "m"(Gap1) and "n"(Gap2)
0: SL(1.2mm)
1: L(1.4mm)
2: M1(1.8mm)
3: M2(2.0mm)
4: M3(2.2mm)
5: H(2.6mm)
-: Not executed
*: Unknown
3 Temperature and humidity
*: Unknown
5 Printing date & time
6 Gap distance between head and media
7-39
Chapter 7

JAM 01 to 05 JAM log (5 records) Number: Lowest is the most recent
Date: mm/dd
Time: mm/ss
Jam code
1 Jam type 1: CR error
2: Jam
3: Feed failure (delay)
4: Cut failure
*: Unknown
2 Media format 1: Roll media
2: Cut sheet (manual feed from top)
3: Cut sheet (manual feed from front)
4: Cassette
*: Unknown
3 Jam timing 1: Feed
2: Print
3: Eject
*: Unknown
4 Width detection OFF mode 1: ON
2: OFF
*: Unknown
5 Head height 0: SL (1.2mm)
1: L (1.4mm)
2: M1 (1.8mm)
3: M2 (2.0mm)
4: M3 (2.2mm)
5: H (2.6mm)
*: Unknown
6 (Not Used)
7 Cut mode 1: User cut
2: Eject cut
3: Auto cut
*: Unknown
8 Media passing environment 0: A(temperature 15 to 25 degrees centigrade/humidity
40 to 60%)
1: B(temperature 25 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity
40 to 60%)
2: C(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity
10 to 40%)
3: D(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity
60 to 80%)
4: E(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity 0
to 10%, or 15 degrees centigrade or less and 30 degrees
centigrade or more/humidity 0 to 50%[low humidity is
out of guarantee.])
5: F(temperature 15 to 30 degrees centigrade/humidity
80 to 100%, or 15 degrees centigrade or less and 30
degrees centigrade or more/humidity 50 to 100%[high
humidity is out of guarantee.])
*: Unknown
9 Borderless/Bordered 1: Bordered printing
2: Borderless printing
*: Unknown
10 (Not Used)
11 Print mode label No. Display print mode
*: Unknown
12 Media width Display media width (Unit: mm)
*: Unknown
*: Unknown
INK CHK BK, MBK, C, M, Refill log 0: Disable remaining ink detection was never set
Y, PC, PM, GY Print whether disable remaining ink detection was 1: Disable remaining ink detection was set at least once
previously set
7-40
Chapter 7

COUNTER PRINTER POWER ON Cumulative power-on time Unit: hours
SLEEP ON Cumulative sleep-on time Unit: hours
CUTTER Number of cutting operations Unit: times
WIPE Number of wiping operations Unit: times
W-INK Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge Unit: %
PDL Cumulative number of printed media according to PDL GARO: xx sheets
HP-GL/2: xx sheets
CARRIAGE PRINT Cumulative printing time Unit: hours
DRIVE Cumulative carriage moving time Unit: hours
CR-COUNT Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back Unit: times
and forth)
CR-DIST. Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving Unit: times
210mm)
PRINT-COUNT Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping) Unit: times
PURGE CLN-A Cumulative number of automatic cleaning operations
1 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal Unit: times
suction) operations
2 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level
adjusting) operations
3 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling)
operations
6 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal
suction) operations
7 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging)
operations
8 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 8 (flashing)
operations
10 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling
after secondary transportation) operations
11 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling
after head replacement) operations
15 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count
small suction) operations
16 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented
ink agitation) operations
17 Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction)
operations
TTL Total number of automatic cleaning operations
CLN-M Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 operations
1 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) Unit: times
operations
4 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from
head after head replacement) operations
5 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from
head and tube before transportation ) operations
6 Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong
suction) operations
TTL Total number of manual cleaning operations
7-41
Chapter 7

COUNTER CLEAR INK CONSUME Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount Unit: times
clearing
MTC EXC. Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement
count clearing
HEAD L EXC. Cumulative count of printhead L replacement count clearing
HEAD R EXC. Cumulative count of printhead R replacement count clearing
PARTS Wia-1 Cumulative count of unit Wia-1 (waste ink box unit)
EXC. replacement count clearing
PARTS Wia-3 Cumulative count of unit Wia-3 (platen ink box unit)
PARTS Wia-6 Cumulative count of unit Wia-6 (suction fan unit)
PARTS CR-1 Cumulative count of unit CR-1 (carriage unit bushing)
PARTS CR-2 Cumulative count of unit CR-2 (linear encoder sensor/linear
EXC. scale/shaft cleaner) replacement count clearing
PARTS CR-3 Cumulative count of unit CR-3 (carriage height changing
EXC. cam) replacement count clearing
PARTS CR-4 Cumulative count of unit CR-4 (ink tube unit/flexible cable
EXC. unit) replacement count clearing
PARTS CR-5 Cumulative count of unit CR-5 (multi sensor) replacement
EXC. count clearing
PARTS PG-1 Cumulative count of unit PG-1 (purge unit) replacement
EXC. count clearing
PARTS HMa-1 Cumulative count of unit HMa-1 (head management sensor)
PARTS PL-1 Cumulative count of unit PL-1 (carriage motor) replacement
EXC. count clearing
PARTS PS-1 EXC. Cumulative count of unit PS-1 (feed motor) replacement
count clearing
PARTS Mi-1 Cumulative count of unit Mi-1 (mist fan) replacement count
EXC. clearing
PARTS MS-1 Cumulative count of unit MS-1 (multi sensor) replacement
EXC. count clearing
FACTORY CNT. For factory
7-42
Chapter 7

COUNTER EXCHANGE MTC EXC. Maintenance cartridge replacement count Unit: times
HEAD L EXC. Printhead L replacement count
HEAD R EXC. Printhead R replacement count
BOARD EXC.(M/ Main controller PCB replacement count
B)
PARTS Wia-1 Wia-1 (waste ink box unit) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS Wia-3 Wia-3 (platen ink box unit) replacement count
EXC.
EXC.
EXC.
PARTS Wia-6 Wia-6 (suction fan unit) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS CR-1 CR-1 (carriage unit bushing) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS CR-2 CR-2 (linear encoder sensor/linear scale/shaft cleaner)
EXC. replacement count
PARTS CR-3 CR-3 (carriage height changing cam) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS CR-4 CR-4 (ink tube unit/flexible cable unit) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS CR-5 CR-5 (multi sensor) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS PG-1 PG-1 (purge unit) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS HMa-1 HMa-1 (head management sensor) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS PL-1 PL-1 (carriage motor) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS PS-1 EXC. PS-1 (feed motor) replacement count
PARTS Mi-1 Mi-1 (mist fan) replacement count
EXC.
PARTS MS-1 MS-1 (multi sensor) replacement count
EXC.
DETAIL-CNT MOVE PRINTER Count of secondary transportation Unit: times
MEDIACONFIG- Count of media registered by media editor
CNT
N-INKCHK BK, Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for
MBK, C, M, Y, each color
PC, PM, GY
7-43
Chapter 7

COUNTER INK-USE1 INK BK, MBK, C, Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink Unit: ml
M, Y, PC, PM, GY
TTL Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic ink
LINK BK, MBK, Cumulative consumption amount of generic large ink
C, M, Y, PC, PM,
GY
TTL Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic
large ink
SINK BK, MBK, Cumulative consumption amount of generic small ink
C, M, Y, PC, PM,
GY
TTL Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic
small ink
NINK BK, MBK, Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink
C, M, Y, PC, PM,
GY
TTL Total amount of the cumulative consumption of refilled ink
INK-USE2 INK BK, MBK, C, Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed Unit: ml
M, Y, PC, PM, GY ink tank.
TTL Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently
installed ink tanks
NINK BK, MBK, Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed
C, M, Y, PC, PM, ink tank
GY
TTL Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently
installed ink tanks
INK-EXC INK BK, MBK, C, Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement Unit: times
M, Y, PC, PM, GY
TTL Total amount of the cumulative count of generic ink tank
replacement
NINK BK, MBK, Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement
C, M, Y, PC, PM,
GY
TTL Total amount of the cumulative count of refilled ink tank
replacement
7-44
Chapter 7

COUNTER MEDIA 1-7 NAME Media type
TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut Unit: square/meter, square/feet
sheet
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media
CUTSHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet
MEDIA NAME OTHER OTHER
OTHER TTL Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut Unit: square/meter, square/feet
sheet
ROLL Cumulative print area of roll media
CUTSHEET Cumulative print area of cut sheet
MEDIA 44-60 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 44 Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets
SIZE1 ROLL inches but less than 60 inches (physical size) (equivalent of A4)
P-SQ/P-CNT 36-44 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 36
inches but less than 44 inches (physical size)
24-36 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 24
0-17 Cumulative print area of roll media less than 17 inches
(physical size)
MEDIA 44-60 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 44 Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets
SIZE2 ROLL inches but less than 60 inches (data size) (equivalent of A4)
D-SQ/D-CNT 36-44 Cumulative print area of roll media equal to or larger than 36
inches but less than 44 inches (data size)
0-17 Cumulative print area of roll media less than 17 inches (data
size)
MEDIA 44-60 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 44 Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets
SIZE1 CUT P- inches but less than 60 inches (physical size) (equivalent of A4)
SQ/P-CNT 36-44 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 36
24-36 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 24
0-17 Cumulative print area of cut sheet less than 17 inches
(physical size)
MEDIA 44-60 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 44 Unit: square/meter, square/feet, sheets
SIZE2 CUT inches but less than 60 inches (data size) (equivalent of A4)
D-SQ/D-CNT 36-44 Cumulative print area of cut sheet equal to or larger than 36
0-17 Cumulative print area of cut sheet less than 17 inches (data
size)
HEAD DOT BK, MBK, C, M, Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead Unit: (x 1,000,000) dots
CNT.1 Y, PC, PM, GY
TTL Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed
printhead
HEAD DOT BK, MBK, C, M, Cumulative dot counts of each colors Unit: (x 1,000,000) dots
CNT.2 Y, PC, PM, GY
TTL Total cumulative dot counts of each colors
7-45
Chapter 7

HEAD INF.1 1 Date & time installed (last 4 times) YY/MM/DD
[Installed head] Display order: Installed date (last) -> Installed date (2nd
to last) -> Installed date (3rd to last) -> Installed date
(initial)
2 Removal date & time (last 3 times) YY/MM/DD
Display order: Last -> 2nd to last -> 3rd to last
3 Main unit serial No. (last 3 times) Display order: Last -> 2nd to last -> 3rd to last
4 CLN_A (auto) count Unit: Times
5 CLN_A (manual) count
6 Cleaning B (auto/left cap) count
7 Cleaning B (auto/right cap) count
8 CLN_B (manual) count
9 Head replacement ink drain count
10 Secondary transport ink drain count
11 Secondary transport ink fill count
12 Ink filling after head replacement count
13 Recovery suction
14 Number of sheets printed Unit: Sheets (A4 equivalent sheets)
15 Error log YY/MM/DD xxxx (last 4 digits)
01: Last, 02: 2nd to last, 03: 3rd to last, ..., 20: 20th to last
16 Refill tank usage log (per chip) A: x, B: x, C: x, D: x, E: x, F: x
17 Firmware version (last 3) XX.XX YY/MM/DD
18 Head highest temperature (per chip) A: xxx, B: xxx, C: xxx, D: xxx, E: xxx, F: xxx
19 Number of non-discharging nozzles (per nozzle row) chip A AA: xxx, AB: xxx, BA: xxx, BB: xxx, CA: xxx, CB:
row A, chip A row B to chip F row A, chip F row B xxx, DA: xxx, DB: xxx, EA: xxx, EB: xxx, FA: xxx, FB:
xxx
20 EEPROM format Ver
HEAD INF.2 1 Date & time installed (last 4 times) YY/MM/DD
[Head installed 2nd to Display order: Installed date (last) -> Installed date (2nd
last] to last) -> Installed date (3rd to last) -> Installed date
(initial)
2 Removal date & time (last 3 times) YY/MM/DD
3 Main unit serial No. (last 3 times) Display order: Last -> 2nd to last -> 3rd to last
4 CLN_A (auto) count Unit: Times
5 CLN_A (manual) count
6 Cleaning B (auto/left cap) count
7 Cleaning B (auto/right cap) count
8 CLN_B (manual) count
9 Head replacement ink drain count
10 Secondary transport ink drain count
11 Secondary transport ink fill count
12 Ink filling after head replacement count
13 Recovery suction
14 Number of sheets printed Unit: Sheets (A4 equivalent sheets)
15 Error log YY/MM/DD xxxx (last 4 digits)
01: Last, 02: 2nd to last, 03: 3rd to last, ..., 20: 20th to last
16 Refill tank usage log (per chip) A: x, B: x, C: x, D: x, E: x, F: x
17 Firmware version (last 3) XX.XX YY/MM/DD
18 Head highest temperature (per chip) A: xxx, B: xxx, C: xxx, D: xxx, E: xxx, F: xxx
19 Number of non-discharging nozzles (per nozzle row) chip A AA: xxx, AB: xxx, BA: xxx, BB: xxx, CA: xxx, CB:
row A, chip A row B to chip F row A, chip F row B xxx, DA: xxx, DB: xxx, EA: xxx, EB: xxx, FA: xxx, FB:
xxx
20 EEPROM format Ver
7-46
Chapter 7

PARTS CNT. [Value of each Status OK/W1/W2/E
parts counter] Number of days after set Unit: Days
Count
Life threshold
Usage Unit: %
Cumulative count
COGFF CONDITION Cogging FF result 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Check required
3: Adjust reruired
PARAM0-F Parameters 1 REF: Motor error (6 digits)
PHASE: Phase (3 digits)
AMP: Amplitude (3 digits)
RATE: Decay rate (3 digits)
PARAM0-B Parameters 2 REF: Motor error (6 digits)
PHASE: Phase (3 digits)
AMP: Amplitude (3 digits)
RATE: Decay rate (3 digits)
LF SCALE LF-A LF8 pass
adjustment value (user LF-B LF1 pass
value)
SCALE-A Scale clean
SCALE-B Scale fast
PV AUTO JUDGE Ink reduction mode ON (NORMAL/LOW only when ON)/Number of times
OFF is entered
7-47
Chapter 7
b) Sample Layout
PRINT INF layout is shown below.
1/ 5
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT IN F
Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.xx
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/dd
SYSTEM
S/N:xxxxxxxx TYPE:12 -LF:1 TMP:xx RH:xx SIZE-LF:xxxxx.x -CR:xxxxx.x AFTER INST:xxxx x
HEAD INK
S/N:xxxxxxxx LOT:xxxxxxxx C:xxxxxx M:xxxxxx Y:xxxxxx MBK:xxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxx BK:xxxxxx
WARNING
01:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx 02:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx
ERROR
JAM
01:MM/DD HH:MM xxxx xxxxxxxx
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
09:x 10:xxx 11:media_sizexxxxxx 12:media_namexxxxxx
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
x
01:x 02:x 03:x 04:x 05:xx 06:x 07:x 08:x
F-7-55
7-48
Chapter 7
2/5
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxx PRINT INF
Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.xx
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/dd
INK CHECK
C:x M:x Y:x MBK:x MBK2:x BK:x
COUNTER
PRINTER
LIFE-TTL:xxxxxx LIFE-ROLL:xxxxxx LIFE-CUTSHEET:xxxxxx
LIFE A:xxxxxx B:xxxxxx C:xxxxxx D:xxxxxx E:xxxxxx F:xxxxxx
POWER-ON:xxxxxx SLEEP-ON:xxxxxx CUTTER:xxxxxx WIPE:xxxxxx W-INK:xxxxxx
PDL: GARO:xxxxxx HP-GL/2:xxxxxx
CARRIAGE
PRINT:xxxxxx DRIVE:xxxxxx CR-COUNT:xxxxxx CR-DIST.:xxxxxx PRINT-COUNT:xxxxxx
PURGE
CLN-A : 1:xxxxx 2:xxxxx 3:xx 6:xxxx 7:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 15:xxx 16:xxxxx 17:xxxxx TTL:xxxxxx
CLN-M : 1:xxxxx 4:xxx 5:xx 6:xxxxx TTL:xxxxx
CLEAR
INK CONSUME:xxx MTC EXC.:xxx HEAD EXC.:xxx
PARTS CR1 EXC.:xx PARTS CR2 EXC.:xx PARTS CR3 EXC.:xx PARTS CR4 EXC.:xx PARTS CR5 EXC.:xx
PARTS SP1 EXC.:xx PARTS PG1 EXC.:xx PARTS HMa1 EXC.:xx PARTS MT1 EXC.:xx PARTS PL1 EXC.:xx
PARTS Mi1 EXC.:xx PARTS CT1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF2 EXC.:xx
FACTORY CNT.:xx
EXCHANGE
MTC EXC.:xxx HEAD EXC.:xxx BOARD EXC.(M/B):xx
PARTS CR1 EXC.:xx PARTS CR2 EXC.:xx PARTS CR3 EXC.:xx PARTS CR4 EXC.:xx PARTS CR5 EXC.:xx
PARTS SP1 EXC.:xx PARTS PG1 EXC.:xx PARTS HMa1 EXC.:xx PARTS MT1 EXC.:xx PARTS PL1 EXC.:xx
PARTS Mi1 EXC.:xx PARTS CT1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF1 EXC.:xx PARTS WF2 EXC.:xx
DETAIL-CNT
MOVE PRINTER:xxx MEDIACONFIG-CNT:xxx
N-INKCHK: C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx
INK-USE1
INK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml
TTL:xxxxxx.xml
NINK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml
TTL:xxxxxx.xml
INK-USE2
INK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml
TTL:xxxxxx.xml
NINK C:xxxxx.xml M:xxxxx.xml Y:xxxxx.xml MBK:xxxxx.xml MBK2:xxxxx.xml BK:xxxxx.xml
TTL:xxxxxx.xml
INK-EXC
INK C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx
TTL:xxxxx
NINK C:xxxx M:xxxx Y:xxxx MBK:xxxx MBK2:xxxx BK:xxxx
TTL:xxxxx
F-7-56
7-49
Chapter 7
3/5
Firm:xx.xx Boot:xx.xx MIT(DBF):x.xx MIT(DB):x.x x
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/d d
MEDIA 1 MEDIA 2
NAME : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx NAME : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x
TTL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f TTL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f
ROLL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f ROLL : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f
CUTSHEET : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f CUTSHEET : xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f
MEDIA 3 MEDIA 4
MEDIA 5 MEDIA 6
MEDIA 7 MEDIA OTHE R
MEDIA SIZE1 ROLL P-SQ/P-CN T

36-44: xxxxxxx.x m2 xxxxxxx.x sq.f 0
MEDIA SIZE2 ROLL D-SQ/D-CN T
MEDIA SIZE1 CUT P-SQ/P-CN T
MEDIA SIZE2 CUT D-SQ/D-CN T
F-7-57
7-50
Chapter 7
4/5
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyy/mm/d d
HEAD DOT CNT. 1

C:xxxxxxxxx M:xxxxxxxxx Y:xxxxxxxxx MBK:xxxxxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxxxxx BK:xxxxxxxx x
TTL:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx x
HEAD DOT CNT. 2
C:xxxxxxxxx M:xxxxxxxxx Y:xxxxxxxxx MBK:xxxxxxxxx MBK2:xxxxxxxxx BK:xxxxxxxx x
TTL:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx x
HEAD INF. 1
1:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD 2:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/D D
3:xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x
4:xxxxx 5:xxxxx 6:xxxxx 7:xxxxx 8:xxx 9:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 12:xx x
13:xxxxxxxx 19: 1
14: 1:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 2:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 3:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
4:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 5:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 6:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
19:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 20:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
15:A:x B:x C:x D:x E:x F: x
16:XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/D D
17:A:xxx B:xxx C:xxx D:xxx E:xxx F:xx x
18:AA:xxx AB:xxx BA:xxx BB:xxx CA:xxx CB:xxx DA:xxx DB:xxx EA:xxx EB:xxx FA:xxx FB:xx x
HEAD INF. 2
1:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD 2:YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/D D
3:xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x
4:xxxxx 5:xxxxx 6:xxxxx 7:xxxxx 8:xxx 9:xxx 10:xxx 11:xxx 12:xx x
13:xxxxxxxx 19: 1
14: 1:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 2:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 3:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
19:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxxx 20:YY/MM/DD xxxxxxxx-xxx x
15:A:x B:x C:x D:x E:x F: x
16:XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/DD XX.XX YY/MM/D D
17:A:xxx B:xxx C:xxx D:xxx E:xxx F:xx x
18:AA:xxx AB:xxx BA:xxx BB:xxx CA:xxx CB:xxx DA:xxx DB:xxx EA:xxx EB:xxx FA:xxx FB:xx x
F-7-58
7-51
Chapter 7
5/5
S/N:xxxxxxxx Date:yyyyy/mm/d d
PARTS CNT .
PARTS CR1 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS CR2 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS CR3 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS CR4 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS CR5 : OK 0 0.0 0.0 0% 0. 0
PARTS SP1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS PG1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS HMa1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS MT1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS PL1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS Mi1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS CT1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS WF1 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
PARTS WF2 : OK 0 0 0 0% 0
COGFF
CONDITION : 0
PARAM0-F : REF: xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx PHASE: xxx xxx xxx xx x
AMP: xxx xxx xxx xxx RATE: xxx xxx xxx xx x
PARAM0-B : REF: xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx PHASE: xxx xxx xxx xx x
AMP: xxx xxx xxx xxx RATE: xxx xxx xxx xx x
LF-A
ROLL LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X
CUT LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X
LF-B
ROLL LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X
CUT LARGE : XXX.XXXX MIDDLE : XXX.XXXX SMALL : XXX.XXXX SMALLER : XXX.XXX X
SCALE-A
ROLL LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X
CUT LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X
SCALE-B
ROLL LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X
CUT LARGE : XXX MIDDLE : XXX SMALL : XXX SMALLER : XX X
PV AUTO JUDGE : ON(NORMAL) , 0
F-7-59
7-52
Chapter 7
7.2 Special Mode
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing

0023-3043
This printer supports the following special modes in addition to the service mode:
- PCB replacement mode

- Download mode
- Counter display mode
1. PCB replacement mode
This mode is used when replacing the main PCB or MC relay PCB.
By executing this mode,
- Backup data of the settings and counter values stored in the MC relay PCB are moved to the new main PCB.
- The data such as the settings and counter values are copied to the MC relay PCB.
a) Entering the PCB replacement mode

Follow the same procedure as that for entering the service mode.
(With the [Load] button and [Navigate] button pressed down, turn on the [Power] button.)
When the printer starts up, compare the serial number memorized in the main PCB's EEPROM with that memorized in the MC relay PCB's EEPROM. If they do
not match, or no serial number is memorized in either EEPROM, enter the PCB replacement mode.
b) Procedure
Select "CPU BOARD" or "MC BOARD" using the [ ] and [ ] buttons, and then press the [OK] button to determine it.
- CPU BOARD
Select this after replacing the main PCB.
The data in the MC relay PCB is copied to the main PCB.
- MC BOARD
Select this before replacing the MC relay PCB.
The data in the main controller PCB is copied to the MC relay PCB.
c) Exiting the PCB replacement mode

Turning off the [Power] button of the printer allows you to exit the PCB replacement mode.
For details on how to replace the PCB, see DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > PCBs.
2. Download mode
Use this mode only when updating the firmware without performing initialization.
This mode can update the firmware even if the printhead and ink tanks have not been installed to the printer.
Reference:
a) Entering the download mode

1) Turning off the [Power] button of the printer.
2) With the [Stop] and [Navigate] buttons pressed down, turn on the [Power] button of the printer.
* Keep pressing the above buttons until "Initializing" appears on the display.
b) Procedure
When "Download Mode/Send Firmware" is shown on the display, transfer the firmware.
When downloading of the firmware is completed, the printer is turned off automatically.
3. Counter display mode

Use this mode to view only printer counter information.
a) Invoking counter display mode

1) Press the [MENU] button to keep [Printer Info] > [System Info] selected.
2) Press the [ ] button whole holding down the [MENU] button + [OK] button to invoke counter display mode.
b) How to view counter display mode
- S/N: Unit serial number
- CNT: Number of copies printed in A4 terms (unit: copies)
7-53
Chapter 7
7-54
Chapter 8 ERROR CODE
Contents
Contents
8.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error ................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Code Table .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-2
Chapter 8
8.1 Outline
8.1.1 Outline
0023-3204
The printer indicates errors using the display and LEDs.

If an error occurs during printing, the printer status is also displayed on the status monitor of the printer driver.
The following three types of errors are displayed on the display:
- Warning
Status where the print operation can be continued without remedying the cause of the problem. This can, however, adversely affect the printing results.
- Error
Status where the print operation is stopped, and the regular operation cannot be recovered until the cause of the problem is remedied.
- Service call error

When a service call error occurs, the error is not cleared and the error indication remains on the operation panel even if the printer is powered off and on again.
(Occurrence of the service call error is indicated again at power-on.)
This measure is taken to prevent user's recovery of the service call error and damages to the printer.
Service call errors can be cleared, however, by starting up the printer in the service mode.
The codes of warning and error and service call error are common in all models.
Note that some of the warnings, errors, and service call error described in the following tables may not appear in this printer.
In addition, the message that appears on the screen may not be the same as what is described in the table.
The first 4 digits of Warning and Error code show the following description.
The first 2 digits of code Description

01xxxxxx-xxx Warning
03xxxxxx-xxx Error
The next 2 digits of code Description

xx01xxxx-xxxx Jam-related
xx03xxxx-xxxx Cover-related
xx06xxxx-xxxx Media-related
xx13xxxx-xxxx Controller-related
xx1Axxxx-xxxx HDD-related
xx32xxxx-xxxx Media-related
xx34xxxx-xxxx PDL-related
xx80xxxx-xxxx Printhead-related
xx81xxxx-xxxx Inktank-related
xx83xxxx-xxxx Inktank-related
xx84xxxx-xxxx Maintenance cartridge-related
xx86xxxx-xxxx Print-related
xx87xxxx-xxxx Cutter-related
xx89xxxx-xxxx Media take-up unit-related
xx8Bxxxx-xxxx Stacker-related
xx90xxxx-xxxx Version up-related
8-1
Chapter 8
8.2 Warning/Error/Service Call Error
8.2.1 Code Table

0032-0886
Code
Panel display Panel display
(last 4 digits) Explanation/Detection sequence Remedial Action
(Large LCD) (Small LCD)
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Printing on cut sheet is not functional
is selected, but Print data having a cut sheet print with a media take-up unit in use.
a roll is loaded. specification has been received with media
take-up unit use being selected.
- Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
compatible with Please Cancel Cassette pickup has been specified for paper type.
cassette. Cas Cannot Feed paper that does not support cassette pickup.
Check Media Type. Please Check
Stop: Stop Printing

- Regular printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
is selected, but Print data having a manual feed print paper type.
a roll is loaded. specification has been received at the
completion of roll paper pickup.
Press OK,
remove the roll,
and load sheets.
- Papr Type Mismatch PaprTyp Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) This is a warning and allows continued
(1) Mismatch following the selection of printing.
any of the following menu choices:
- [Warning Indication] has been selected
for [Paper Mismatch Detection].
- [ON] has been selected for [Paper Error
Skip].
(2) On forced printing following a
mismatch resulting from the selection of
the following menu option:
- [Pause] has been selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection].
- Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (both type and size) This is a warning and allows continued
Skip].
- Papr Size Mismatch PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) This is a warning and allows continued
Skip].
- Cannot print Paper mismatch (size) Replace the paper with appropriate
as specified. When performing internal printing, paper one.
loaded is smaller than the size specified for
Lift the release each print purpose.
lever and replace
paper with XXX [XXX]: appropriate paper size
(vertical) or larger
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
data having a cut sheet specification is
Press Load/Eject received. (Paper type /size not determined)
and load sheets.
- Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
received.
(Paper type /size not determined)
- Paper Pos Wrong Paper Pos Wrong Invalid paper loading position
Paper is invalidly positioned on the platen.
- Turn on the media Printing has started with the media take-up Switch on the media take-up unit.
take-up unit. unit setting of [Use] and with the media
take-up unit switched off. *A measure for a third-party media
take-up unit that is not connected to the
main unit.
8-2
Chapter 8
Code
- Media take-up unit Media take-up unit use has been set to [Do 1. Press the [Online] button to set the
ready. not use] at the start of printing when the media take-up unit use setting to force
media take-up unit is active. [Use] and print.
Online: Print 2. Press the [Stop] key to cancel
Stop: Stop Printing printing.
- End of paper feed. Feed Limit.. Forced feed limit The message clears automatically 2
Cannot feed Paper being manually fed in the return seconds later.
paper more. direction (back-feeding) has reached the Check the Paper detection sensor/
pinch roller position. Media sensor sensor (I/O mode).
- Close Ink Tank Ink tank cover open while printing The message clears when the ink tank
Cover On a model having a subtank, the ink tank cover is closed.
cover opened while printing. (Printing is Check the sensor (I/O mode).
allowed to continue.)
- The roll feed unit The roll unit has been pulled out during Close the roll unit.
is loose. Push it standby or printing on the lower roll paper
all the way in. or cut sheet A3 or less.
- Prepare for parts W Level 1 Durable parts replacement due soon Check the parts counter and prepare
replacement. Consumables Low Any of the parts counters has reached the target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
Call for service. warning level 1. Initialize the parts counter for the
- Parts replacement W Level 2 Durable parts replacement due soon target unit after the replacement.
time has passed. Repl Consumables Any of the parts counters has reached
Call for service. warning level 2.
1000 Ink Level: Check Ink Lvl: Chk XX Ink tank near-empty (continued use 1. Replace the tank (continued usage
to Not much ink is allowed) allowed).
100C left. Prepare to The remaining volume of ink is 2. If the problem persists after the tank
replace the ink. diminishing (below the pin check level). has been replaced, the remaining ink
(XX: Target color display) detection system is at fault. (Replace
the supply unit or check catching wire
Last 2 digits of error code: or connection status of harness.)
00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C, 04:PM, 05:PC,
06:MBk1, 07:MBk2, 08:GY, 09:PGY,
0A:R, 0B:B, 0C:G
100F End of paper feed. End of paper feed. The limit of forced paper feeding. The The message is cleared automatically
Cannot feed media reached to a pinchroller at feeding after displaying for 2sec.
paper any more. backfeed media manually. Confirmation of Paper detection
(not an error or a failure) sensor/ Media sensor sensor (I/O
mode)
1010 Problem with CheckPrintout:LR Head non-ejection warning (Check 1. Check image quality. (Unless there
Printhead L/R printout/ possible to continue printing) are problems with the image quality,
Chk printing results there is no need to replace the
Check printed Check Printout See 280C for detection criteria. printhead.)
document. 2. Replace the printhead.
1012 Problem with CheckPrintout:R Printhead R non-ejection warning (double-

Printhead R head model)
Chk printing results (Check printout/ possible to continue
printing)
See 280C for detection criteria.

1013 Problem with CheckPrintout:L Printhead L non-ejection warning (double-
Printhead L head model)
Chk printing results (Check printout/ possible to continue
printing)
See 280C for detection criteria.

1015 This type of paper GL2: Unsup. papr HP-GL2 error: out of the scope of paper When [Warning Indication] is selected
is not compatible GL2: Incompatible paper support Replace with appropriate paper.
with HP-GL/2. type [Warning Indication] or [Pause] have been
Press Online Starts printing selected for [Paper Mismatch Detection]. When [Pause] is selected
1. Press the [Online] button to force
The paper that is being fed does not support printing.
HP-GL/2 printing; that is, a paper type that Caution) Due to use of image process
does not have a required print mode has table (LUT) defined for HP-GL/2
been set. compatible paper different from the
specified paper, you might have a
problem in quality of image.
2. Press the [Stop] button to cancel
printing.
1021 Papr Type Mismatch MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Continued printing is allowed.
With [Warning Indication] is selected for Check driver setting.
[Paper Mismatch Detection], the type of Replace with appropriate paper.
loaded paper mismatches the specified
type. Or, with [Pause] is selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection], the [Online] button
was pressed to execute forced printing.
1022 Papr Type Mismatch MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Continued printing is allowed.
With [Warning Indication] is selected for Check driver setting.
[Paper Mismatch Detection], the type of Replace with appropriate paper.
loaded paper mismatches the specified
type. Or, with [Pause] is selected for [Paper
Mismatch Detection], the [Online] button
was pressed to execute forced printing.
8-3
Chapter 8
Code
1030 GARO W1221 GARO W1221 (Image mode)Unknown command 1. Identify the model.
A character that is located within bounds of 2. If the error has occurred with RIP,
a group character or end parameter try with the printer driver.
character but that is not defined as a 3. Try in an alternative environment (I/
command has been detected during Image F, PC).
mode command decoding.
1031 GARO W1222 GARO W1222 (Image mode) Invalid parameter count (no
parameters)
A numeric field has not been identified as
being numeric during Image mode
command decoding.
1032 GARO W1223 GARO W1223 (Image mode) Required item missing
A character out of bounds has been
detected where a group or end parameter
character ought to exist, during Image
mode command decoding.
1034 GARO W1225 GARO W1225 (Image mode)Other warning
A character other than <ESC> has been
detected right after the image mode
analysis module entered Image mode or
when the decoding of a single command
ended.
1035 GARO W1231 GARO W1231 (Setup mode)Unknown command
A command character string other than
RESET, SET, OPCMT0 and OPCMT2 has
been detected in a PJL command.
1036 GARO W1232 GARO W1232 (Setup mode)Invalid parameter count
Too many or too few parameters have been
detected during Setup mode command
decoding.
1037 GARO W1233 GARO W1233 (Setup mode) Required item missing
The exit parameter is missing in the
EnterGAROMode command and the
UniversalExitLanguage command used in
Setup mode.
1038 GARO W1234 GARO W1234 (Setup mode)Data out of bounds
A character string that is not defined as an
environmental variable has been detected.
An unknown environmental variable has
been detected.
A character string that is not defined as an
environmental variable value has been
detected.
The value of an unknown environmental
variable has been detected.
1039 GARO W1235 GARO W1235 (Setup mode) Other warning
A character string other than the @PJL
prefix has been detected while the analysis
module was idle.
103A GARO W1226 GARO W1226 (Image mode) Image processing table error 1. Retransmit.
No image processing table is being 2. Check with a different interface
transmitted, a required image processing choice.
table is unavailable, or an image processing 3. Try by printing other data.
table contains a value out of bounds. 4. With RIP, print from the print
driver.
Supplement: If this error occurs, the
print result would appear blank.
1040 GL2: W0501 GL2: W0501 HP/GL2 error; Insufficient memory 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. capacity 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
The size of drawing data exceeds the manipulation with On The Fly*.
processing capacity.
*: On The Fly: The method to transmit
data in sequence from paper. The
software that generates HP-GL/2 data
has this option to specify. Select this
option to save the memory usage of the
printer.
1041 GL2: W0502 GL2: W0502 HP/GL2 error; invalid parameter Verify the data and fix it.
The parameter is out Data having an invalid number of types of
of range. parameters that follow the command has
been detected.
1043 GL2: W0504 GL2: W0504 HP/GL2 error; Invalid command Verify the data and fix it.
This command is not A command that is not defined in HP-GL/2
supported. or HP RTL is included.
1047 GL2: W0903 GL2: W0904 HP/GL2 error; replot buffer overflow 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. Data storage buffers have run short. 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
manipulation with On The Fly*.

printer.
8-4
Chapter 8
Code
1048 GL2: W0904 GL2: W0903 HP/GL2 error; polygon buffer overflow 1. Reduce the size of rendering data.
The memory is full. The size of drawing data exceeds the 2. Replace with HP RTL data for
processing capacity. manipulation with On The Fly*.

printer.
1049 Before borderless When print data with borderless printing Open the platen shutter.
printing, move the specification has been received, platen
blue platen switch. shutter was closed.
1050 Blue platen switch Cleaning of platen shutter is necessary. Clean the platen shutter.
is dirty. Please
clean the switch. When reading the platen shutter in
multisensor, borderless printing data has
been received in unstable output condition.
1051 Paper Too Small Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
Size clip warning Check driver settings.
With [Warning Indication] selected for Replace with appropriate paper.
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, the size of paper loaded is smaller
than that of specified from driver.
1052 Borderless printng Borderless printing not available Replace with appropriate paper.
not possible. Check (unsupported size)
supported paper.
With [Warning Indication] selected for
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, borderless printing data is
received, but roll paper not supporting
borderless printing has been loaded.
1053 Paper position not Borderless printing not available (physical) Reload/ replace the roll paper.
suitable for With [Warning Indication] selected for
borderless printing. [Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu
settings, borderless printing data is
received, but roll paper loaded is more than
1mm off the predefined position for the
pre-ejection opening at the counter-HP
side.
1053 Borderless printng Reload/ replace the roll paper.
not possible. Check Check the borderless spacer.
pap. pos. or spacer
1054 PaprWidth Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
With [Warning Indication] selected for Check driver settings.
[Paper Mismatch Detection] in the menu Replace with appropriate paper.
settings, the width of roll paper loaded and
that of specified by data do not match.
1056 Move the blue The multisensor detected that the platen Move the platen shutter relevant to the
to platen switch No.XX shutter used for pre-ejection was closed. message to the right, to open it.
1062 to the right. Detection timing:
-At paper loading
-At start of first printing (after upper cover
is opened and closed, or recovery from
sleep mode, or the power is turned on with
paper loaded)
The following list shows the last 2 digits of

error codes and the corresponding
messages.
56:No.2, 57:No.3, 58:No.459:No.5,
5A:No.6, 5B:No.75C:No.8,
5D:No.9, 5E:No.105F:No.11, 60:No.12,
61:No.13, 62:No.14
1100 Prepare for MTCart Full Soon Maintenance cartridge near-full (continued Prepare a maintenance cartridge.
maint cart usage allowed)
replacement. Near-full has been detected from the dot
count and the usage period (drying time).
<Maintenance cartridge detection timings>

The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
detected at the following timings:
1. Before printing/during printing (twice
per second)/at the end of printing/ between
pages
2. Before a recovery operation/during a
recovery operation (twice per second)/
before opening of the ink supply valve
3. When the cartridge is removed and
inserted following the occurrence of an
error or warning.
1101 Replace part soon. Mist Full Soon Mist count near-full Check the parts counter and replace the
Waste ink near-full has been detected from target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
the dot count. Initialize the parts counter for the
target unit after the replacement.
8-5
Chapter 8
Code
1400 No ink left. Ink tank empty (continued use allowed) 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and The ink tank has run out of ink, but a 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
140C replace ink tank. certain volume of ink is reserved in the system.
Ink tank is empty. subtank. (The reserved volume of ink is put (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace the ink to use after the remaining ink falls below bundled wires.)
tank. the pin check level.)
Displayed only on models having a
subtank.
(XX: Display applicable colors)
Last 2 digits: 00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C,
04:PM, 05:PC, 06:MBk1, 07:MBk2,
08:GY, 09:PGY, 0A:R, 0B:B, 0C:G
1410 No ink tank Ink tank not installed (continued use 1. Mount the tank.
to loaded. allowed) 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
141C Check ink tank. The ink tank is not installed but a sufficient system.
volume of ink is left in the subtank. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Displayed only on models having a bundled wires.)
subtank.
This occurs in cases such as when the ink
tank cover is opened during printing, and
the ink tank is removed. (XX: Displays
applicable colors)
Last 2 digits: 10:Bk, 11:Y, 12:M, 13:C,
14:PM, 15:PC, 16:MBk1, 17:MBk2,
18:GY, 19:PGY, 1A:R, 1B:B, 1C:G
200A Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Press Load/Eject Please Reload Cannot detect the paper width (poorly
and reload the Size Undetected positioned paper).
paper.
Paper size not
detected. Reload paper.
Paper size not
detected. Press OK and
reload the paper.
200B Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Reload paper. Please Reload Paper is invalidly positioned on the platen.
Size Undetected
200C Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure
detected. Please Reload Cannot detect the leading edge of the
Press Load/Eject Size Undetected paper.
and reload the The leading edge of paper has been located
paper. by coarse detection but not by a second
Paper size not round of fine detection (up to 300 mm)
detected. (semi-transparent paper).
Reload paper. (This is the message when the release lever
operation is not necessary.)
Paper size not Papr Size Paper size detection failure
detected. Undetected Cannot detect the leading edge of the
Lift the release Press Online Key paper.
lever and reload and Reload The leading edge of paper has been located
the paper. by coarse detection but not by a second
round of fine detection (up to 300 mm)
(semi-transparent paper).
200D Paper size not Paper Paper size detection failure 1. Check to see if roll paper are not
detected. Please Reload Cannot detect the trailing edge of the paper. loaded in the cut sheet mode.
Press Load/Eject Size Undetected -Cannot detect the trailing edge of the cut 2. Load cut sheet.
and reload the sheet loaded after they have been fed 50
paper. mm.
Leading edge -Cannot locate the trailing edge of the
detection error. paper that has been found by coarse
Lift the release detection.
lever and align
leading edge
with orange line.
Paper size not
detected.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper size not
detected.
Reload paper.
200E This paper Paper Size Paper is too small 1. Check paper conditions (soiling,
cannot be used. Please Check The width and length of paper detected are tear-offs, residual paper chips, residual
Check supported Paper Too Small shorter than the supported size (1.5% trimming cuts, folds)/size.
paper sizes. margin). 2. Has the paper been fed successfully
This paper Paper Size (without slippage under a load or any
cannot be used. Please Check influence)?
Check supported Paper Too Small 3. Has the LF adjustment value set
paper sizes. Press Online Key correctly?
Load/Eject: Change Paper 4. Hasn't the loaded paper shrunk to
below its margin in the particular
environment?
8-6
Chapter 8
Code
200F This paper Paper Size Paper mismatch (size) 1. Check paper conditions (soiling,
cannot be used. Please Check Paper is too large tear-offs, residual paper chips, residual
Check supported Paper Too Large -The width and length of paper detected are trimming cuts, folds)/size.
paper sizes. longer than the supported size (1.5% 2. Has the paper been fed successfully
This paper Paper Too Large margin). (without slippage under a load or any
cannot be used. Please Check -Cannot detect the leading edge of paper influence)?
Check supported Press Online Key even when the paper has been fed by 1300 3. Has the LF adjustment value set
paper sizes. and Reload mm for roll paper and by the size correctly?
Load/Eject: Change Paper mentioned above for cut sheet. 4. Hasn't the loaded paper shrunk to
-Cannot detect the width of paper even below its margin in the particular
when the paper is fed by the size mentioned environment?
above.
2010 Paper loaded askew. Paper Askew Skew (skewed right) Reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject Please Reload
and reload the Paper Skew Paper is determined skewed as its edge is
paper. read by the multisensor.
Paper loaded askew. Paper Loaded
Reload the paper. Crooked
Press Online Key
and Reload
Paper loaded askew. Paper loaded
Lift the askew.
release lever. Remove paper
Paper loaded askew.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper loaded askew.
Press OK and
reload the paper.
Paper loaded askew
Lift the release lever.
2015 Cannot cut paper. <When small LCD 1> Cutting failure/jam detected due to a
Press Load/Eject Cutting Error cutting failure
and reload the Please Cut Papr An idle cutter unit or a cutter blade that is
paper. too blunt to cut sheet has been detected by
Cannot cut paper. <When small LCD 2> the paper leading edge detection sequence.
Reload the paper. Press (upper arrow) Key
to Release Paper
Cannot cut paper.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper cutting
failed. Lift the
release lever.
2016 No sheets. Sheets Paper loosened out of position while Reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject Please Load printing
and reload the Sheet Not Loaded The trailing edge of paper has been
paper. detected at least 20 mm shorter than the
No sheets. length of cut forms detected.
Lift the release
lever and reload the sheets.
The paper is too
small.
Check paper size.
Sheet removed.
Lift the release
lever.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press Load/Eject and reload Press (upper arrow) Key on paper reload the paper.
the (A sequence of removing jams with the 2. Remove the paper once and then
paper. pinch roller released is required) refeed it.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Virtually all recovery errors that could
Manually rewind roll Press (upper arrow) Key occur in connection with paper pickup are
all the way. Paper Eject Err handled.
Paper jam. Remove Paper

Manually rewind roll
all the way
and press OK.
Cannot feed paper
Lift the release
lever and reload paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Reload the paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
8-7
Chapter 8
Code
2017 Paper size not detected. Paper Paper (right) side detection error
Lift the release Please Reload 1. Multisensor error on light quantity
lever and reload Size Undetected adjustment
the paper. Press (upper arrow) Key 2. The read reference paper edge is 5 mm or
more apart from its theoretical position.
Paper size is undetected. Papr Size 3. Cannot locate the edge of reference
Reload paper. Undetected paper.
Paper size not Press Online Key

detected. and Reload
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
Paper size not
detected. Lift the
release lever.
Could not detect
paper size. Push
release lever back, then pull
out the
cut sheet.
Could not detect
paper size.
Press OK, then Insert roll
paper straight into feed
slot..
2018 Paper size not detected. Papr Size Paper (left) side detection error
Lift the release Undetected The non-reference edge of paper has been
lever and reload Press Online Key located by coarse detection but not by a
the paper. and Reload second round of fine detection.
Paper size not detected.
Reload paper.
Paper size not detected. Paper
Press Load/Eject Please Reload
and reload the Size Undetected
paper. Press (upper arrow) Key
Paper size not detected.
Lift release lever.
Could not detect
paper size. Push
release lever back, then pull
out the
cut sheet.
Could not detect
paper size.
Press OK, then insert roll
paper
straight into feed
slot.
2019 Cannot cut paper. Cutting failure/jam detected due to a
Lift the release cutting failure
lever and reload An idle cutter unit or a cutter blade that is
the paper. too blunt to cut sheet has been detected by
Cannot cut paper. the paper leading edge detection sequence.
Reload the paper. Or, cutter unit home position detection was
failed.
Paper cutting
failed. Lift the
release lever.
Paper cutting
failed. Remove the paper
after cutting at the
top of feed slot. Push the
release
lever back.
201A Paper not aligned When loading cut sheet, paper (right) side The error is cleared by releasing the
with right guide. detection was failed. release lever. After that, load paper to
Press OK and the correct position.
then reload the
roll paper.
Paper not aligned
with right guide. Push the
release
lever back, then
reload the paper.
201B Roll paper is not When loading roll paper, paper (right) side Paper is ejected automatically, and by
securely in contact detection was failed. pressing the [OK] button the error is
with roll holder. cleared. After that, load paper to the
Press OK, then correct position.
re-attach the roll
paper.
8-8
Chapter 8
Code
201C Paper jam While printing, paper width was detected By releasing the release lever, move to
Push the release to have fluctuated beyond the predefined the loading sequence, and load paper
lever back. value. to the correct position.
Failure of detecting right edge of the paper
(cut paper, in printing).
201D Paper jam While printing, paper width was detected 1. Cut the paper near the feed slot, and
Remove the paper to have fluctuated beyond the predefined remove the paper.
after cutting at the value. 2. Release the release lever, and load
top of feed slot. Push the Failure of detecting right edge of the paper the paper to the correct position.
release (cut paper, in printing).
lever back.
201E Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
Stop: Stop Printing
2405 Borderless printng Roll Paper Chk Invalid paper loading position (borderless Reload the roll paper.
not possible. Check Width/Spcr printing) Check spacers
Lift the release Borderless Prtng The position at which paper is loaded is
lever and reload Not Possible unfit for borderless printing.
the paper. Data with a borderless print specification
has been received while the left or right
Online: Print edge of roll paper was off the center of the
Bordless Printing borderless print idle ejection port at the
not possible. Lift completion of roll paper pickup.
release lever and
reload the paper.
Bordless Printing
not possible. Lift
release lever and
reload the paper
Online: Not bordrlss
Stop: Stop Printing
Paper position not
suitable for
borderless printing
Borderless printng
not possible. Check
roll position.
Online: Print
Load/Eject: Change Paper
Borderless printng
not possible. Check
roll width and
spacers.
Online: Print
Load/Eject: Change Paper
2406 Borderless printng Check Supported Borderless print data not printable (logic) Reset the driver and RIP.
not possible. Check paper Paper. Borderless print data was received at the
size setting. No Borderless w/ start of printing and one or more of the
Online: Print This Roll Paper following requirements are met at the same
Load/Eject: Change Paper time:
Borderless printng -A feeder slot other than one for roll paper
not possible. Check has been specified in the data.
supported paper. -A paper type that does not support
borderless printing has been set on the data.
-Banner printing has been specified on the
data at the same time.
-A paper size that does not support
borderless printing has been specified in a
job for which paper had already been fed.
2407 Borderless printng It occurs when all of the following Reset /replace the roll paper.
not possible. Paper conditions are met at start of printing. Confirm and explain usage
stretched or shrank. environment.
Confirm usage cond. -Borderless printing data has been
of the paper. received.
-Roll paper has been loaded, and its paper
width and edge position recognized at
loading are within the supported range of
borderless printing.
-As a result of right/left side edge detection
after start of print processing, it was
detected as beyond the supported range of
borderless printing.
2408 Borderless printng At the start of borderless printing, roll Replace with appropriate paper.
not possible. Check paper whose size doesn't support
supported paper. borderless printing has been loaded.
Bordless Printing
not possible. Lift
release lever and
reload the paper.
8-9
Chapter 8
Code
2409 Paper position is not Invalid paper loading position (suspended Reload/ replace the roll paper.
suitable for job/ borderless printing) Check roll paper.
borderless printing. All of the following conditions were met. 1) Select "Normal printing. (No
Check paper position. -Borderless printing data has been borderless printing)" and enforce
Print to normal printing. received. printing.
Stop printing. -Roll paper whose paper loading position is Borderless print setting is ignored.
not suitable for borderless printing has Print with default margin.
been loaded. Default margin depends on selected
-The right or left edge of roll paper is more feeding trays and media type.
than 1mm off the prescribed position of the 2) Select "Stop printing" or press "stop
pre-ejection opening. button"to stop printing.
240A Borderless printing is Borderless printing is not possible 3) Select "replace printing" or release
not possible. Check (suspended job/ unsupported size). All of releasing lever.
supported paper. the following conditions are met.
Check paper position. -Borderless printing data has been
Print to normal printing. received.
Stop printing. -Roll paper not supporting borderless
printing has been loaded.
2500 Ink tank is empty. No Ink Left Ink tank empty (continued use not allowed) 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) The ink tank has run out of ink. (The 2. If the problem persists after the tank
250C replace ink tank. reserved volume of ink is put to use after has been replaced, the remaining ink
No ink left. the remaining ink falls below the pin check detection system is at fault (replace the
Replace ink tank. level.) supply unit or check the bundled
(In the small LCD, the lower arrow points wires).
to the color in question.)
The last 2 digits signify applicable colors.

00:Bk, 01:Y, 02:M, 03:C, 04:PM, 05:PC,
06:MBk1,
07:MBk2, 08:GY, 09:PGY, 0A:R, 0B:B,
0C:G
2510 Ink level is Online Key Remaining ink level unknown (continued Replace the ink tank.
to unknown. Press To Print use allowed)
251C Check ink level. Ink Lvl Unknown The level of ink remaining in the tank is
Press Online to start Press Online detected when the tank cover is closed.
printing. Consumption has exceeded the original ink
capacity (mismatch detected).
Refill ink may have been used.
(In the small LCD, the lower arrow points

10:Bk, 11:Y, 12:M, 13:C, 14:PM, 15:PC,
16:MBk1,
17:MBk2, 18:GY, 19:PGY, 1A:R, 1B:B,
1C:G
2520 No ink tank Ink Tank Ink tank not installed (continued use not 1. Remove and then reinstall the tank.
to loaded. Check XX allowed) 2. Replace the tank.
252C Press OK and No Ink Tank On a model that is furnished with a 3. Failure of remaining ink detection
check ink tank. Check Ink Tank subtank, this error is indicated if the system.
No ink tank subtank has run out of ink and the state of (Replace the supply unit /check the
loaded. an ink tank not being installed is detected. bundled wires.)
Check ink tank.
20:Bk, 21:Y, 22:M, 23:C, 24:PM, 25:PC,
26:MBk1,
27:MBk2, 28:GY, 29:PGY, 2A:R, 2B:B,
2C:G
2540 Ink tank error. Ink Tank Ink tank ID error 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and Replace BK The type of ink tank is wrong. 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
254C replace ink tank. Ink Tank Error system.
Wrong ink tank. Repl. Ink Tank The last 2 digits signify applicable colors. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. 40:Bk, 41:Y, 42:M, 43:C, 44:PM, 45:PC, bundled wires.)
46:MBk1,
Wrong ink tank. 47:MBk2, 48:GY, 49:PGY, 4A:R, 4B:B,
Press OK and 4C:G
replace ink tank.
2560 Ink tank error. Ink Tank Ink tank EEPROM error 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and Replace BK There is an error in tank EEPROM. 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
256C replace ink tank. Ink Tank Error system.
Repl. Ink Tank The last 2 digits signify applicable colors. (Replace the supply unit /check the
60:Bk, 61:Y, 62:M, 63:C, 64:PM, 65:PC, bundled wires.)
66:MBk1, 67:MBk2, 68:GY, 69:PGY,
6A:R, 6B:B, 6C:G
8-10
Chapter 8
Code
2570 Ink insufficient. Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the tank.
to Press OK and A suction operation was attempted, but 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
257C replace ink tank. there is not enough ink left in the tank for system.
the operation (iPF8000 series, iPF9000 (Replace the supply unit /check the
series). bundled wires.)
Reference)
About 5 mL to 40 mL of ink may have been
left in the tank when this warning occurs.
70:Bk, 71:Y, 72:M, 73:C, 74:PM, 75:PC,
76:MBk1, 77:MBk2, 78:GY, 79:PGY,
7A:R, 7B:B, 7C:G
2580 Ink insufficient. Not Enough Ink Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the ink.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) A suction operation was attempted, but 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
258C replace ink tank. Replace ink tank there is not enough ink left in the tank for system.
Ink insufficient. orOnline to prnt the operation. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. (In the small LCD, the lower arrow points bundled wires.)
Reference)
80:Bk, 81:Y, 82:M, 83:C, 84:PM, 85:PC,
86:MBk1, 87:MBk2, 88:GY, 89:PGY,
8A:R, 8B:B, 8C:G
2590 Ink insufficient. Not Enough Ink Ink tank short on ink 1. Replace the ink.
to Press OK and (lower arrow) A print operation was attempted, but there 2. Failure of remaining ink detection
259C replace ink tank. Replace ink tank is not enough ink left in the tank for the system.
(*1) Ink insufficient. orOnline to prnt operation. (Replace the supply unit /check the
Replace ink tank. (In the small LCD, the lower arrow points bundled wires.)
Reference)
90:Bk, 91:Y, 92:M, 93:C, 94:PM, 95:PC,
96:MBk1, 97:MBk2, 98:GY, 99:PGY,
9A:R, 9B:B, 9C:G
(*1) 259C: 03810208-259C
259C Ink insufficient. Ink insufficientPress (lower Ink insufficient in inktank. 1. Replace inktank
(*2) Press OK and arrow) key. The amount of ink left in the inktank is 2. Failure of detecting the ink amount
to replace ink tank. Replace inktank or start insufficient for printing. (In the small LCD, leftintheinktank.
25A8 Ink insufficient. printing online. the lower arrow points to the (Replace the supply unit /check the
Press OK and correspondence color.) bundled wires.)
replace ink tank.
Reference)
There are the cases that about 5ml to 40ml
ink is left in a inktank at warning occurs.
9C:Bk,9D:C,9E:M,9F:Y,A0:PC,A1:PM,A
2:MBk1,A3:MBk2,
A4:GY,A5:PGY,A6:R,A7:G,A8:B
(*2) 259C: 03810104-259C
25B7 Close the ink tank The remaining ink falls below the pin Close the ink tank cover.
cover. Unable to detect ink check level while ink tank cover is open.
level correctly. Note) It does not recover if the cover is
Unable to detect ink level open when replacing the ink tank with
correctly. a valid one.
If removing the ink tank with lower ink

remains (LIR) than Supply Pin in this
situation, an error is detected.
Also when keeping printing in this
situation, if empty subtank
corresponding to the ink tank with LIR
is detected, the error shifts from ink
tank with LIR to empty subtank.
260E Hardware error. Power On Gap detection failure 1. Check to see if the multisensor
03130031-260E Again Carriage gap calibration has not been reference plate (white patch for batch
Gap Detect Err carried out, or gap detection is disabled by correction) is not soiled and perform
Turn off printer, corrupt calibration data. GAP CALIB (if soiled, adjust the part
wait, then after replacing it).
turn on again. 2. Replace the multisensor and
perform GAP CALIB.
3. Replace the carriage unit and
perform GAP CALIB.
260F Gap error. Power On Gap reference plane error Check the multisensor reference plate
Again Request to replace an abnormal reference (for soiling and faulty mounting).
Turn off printer. Gap Error plane sheet (only in Service mode).
2618 Hardware error. Vh voltage error
03130031-2618
Turn off printer,

wait, then
turn on again.
8-11
Chapter 8
Code
2800 No printhead Printhead Printhead [X] non-existing 1. Check the status of the printhead
Install printhead. Please Check mounted.
No Printhead [X]: Double-head model : The R-head does 2. Mount the long flexible cable and
Check Printhead not exist. check the status of the cable being
Single-head model: The head does not exit. locked.
2801 Printhead error Printhead Printhead [X] DI correction failure Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace
replace the Printhead Error [X]: Double-head model: R head DI
printhead. Replace Printhd correction failure
Single-head model: Head DI correction
failure
2802 Printhead error Printhead An invalid printhead has been mounted in Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace [X]. (An error has occurred but the
replace the Printhead Error printhead itself is not damaged, so
printhead. Replace Printhd [X]: Double-head model: Invalid head communication has been maintained
mounted on the R-side properly.)
Single-head model: Invalid head mounted
2803 Printhead error Printhead Printhead [X] EEPROM error Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and Please Replace
replace the Printhead Error [X]: Double-head model: R head
printhead. Replace Printhd EEPROM error
Single-head model: Head EEPROM error
2804 PHeads: wrong pos. Printhead Printheads mounted in L/R opposite Replace with a valid printhead. (An
Open top cover and Check Printhead positions error has occurred but the printhead
check the L/R Heads Revrsd L printhead is mounted on R side. itself is not damaged, so
printhead positions. Check Printheads communication has been maintained
properly.)
The L/R printheads cannot be
interchanged.
2805 Printhead error. The specified time has been passed in 1. Acclimate to room temperature.
lower printhead temperature than the 2. Replace the printhead.
Open top cover and replace specified temperature. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
the printhead. 4. Replace the CR board.
2807 PHeads: wrong pos. Printhead Printhead mounted in L/R opposite Replace with a valid printhead. (An
Open top cover and Check Printhead positions. error has occurred but the printhead
check the L/R Heads Revrsd R printhead is mounted on L side. itself is not damaged, so
printhead positions. Check Printheads communication has been maintained
properly.)
The L/R printheads cannot be
interchanged.
2808 No left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L non-existing 1. Check the status of the printhead
Install left Chk L Printhead mounted.
printhead. No Left Printhd 2. Mount the long flexible cable and
Chk L Printhead check the status of the cable being
locked.
2809 Left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L DI correction failure Replace the printhead.
error Replace Printhd
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err
replace the left Replace Printhd
printhead.
280A Left printhead Printhead Left Invalid printhead L has been mounted. Replace with a valid printhead.
error Replace Printhd (An error has occurred but the
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
printhead. properly.)
280B Left printhead Printhead Left Printhead L EEPROM error Replace the printhead.
error Replace Printhd
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err
replace the left Replace Printhd
printhead.
280C PHead needs Printhead (R) Printhead R non-ejection warning (Check 1. Check image quality. (Unless there
280D cleaning. Check Nozzles printhead) Printing paused/ continued are problems with the image quality,
280E Press Online to clear error. Online Key printing allowed there is no need to replace the
The printhead Press To Print printhead.)
requires cleaning. The level of error is decided as shown in 2. Replace the printhead.
the table below, based on the number of
The printhead non-ejecting nozzles per color (per chip)
requires cleaning. and the number of nozzles unable to back
Online=Print up.
Stop=Stop Printing
Execute printhead Depending on the firmware version, the
cleaning. If this specifications vary as shown in the table
message is still below.
displayed, replace
the printhead.
1. Initial firmware
No. of nozzles impossible to back up

Less than 30 30 or over
8-12
Chapter 8
No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than --- Check printout

nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check head
than 200
200 or over Check head Check head
2. Running change firmware

The specifications have been changed from the versions shown below.
iPF500/600/5000/700: Ver.1.33, iPF510/610/710/8000/9000: Ver.1.36
iPF8100/9100/8000S/9000S: Ver.1.37, iPF810/820/6000S: Ver.1.03
iPF605/6200: Ver.1.02, iPF5100/6100: Ver.1.38, iPF720:Ver.1.10
You can choose A:(default setting) or B:(if you want to use automatic stop) from Service mode.
A: (default setting) No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than ---

nozzles 320
1 color (per chip) 320 or over Head replacement
B: (If you want to use No. of nozzles impossible to back up
automatic stop) less than 30 30 or over
nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check printhead
than 320
320 or over Replace printhead Replace printhead
3. iPF650/750 series, iPF6300/6350/8300 and later model

You can choose A:(default setting) or B:(if you want to use automatic stop) from User mode.
A (Default setting) No. of non-ejecting more than 0, less than ---

nozzles 320
1 color (per chip) 320 or over Head replacement
B (if you want to use No. of nozzles impossible to back up
automatic stop) less than 30 30 or over
nozzles 100
1 color (per chip) more than 100, less --- Check printhead
than 320
320 or over Replace printhead Replace printhead
Error code Applicable printhead

Check printout 1010 LR or single-head
model
1012 R printhead
1013 L printhead
Check printhead 280C LR or single-head
model
280D R printhead
280E L printhead
Replace printhead 2827 LR or single-head
model
2828 R printhead
2829 L printhead
Code
2811 Printhead Printhead Replace Printhd Incompatible printhead version Replace with a valid printhead.
error Printhd Err (An error has occurred but the
Open top cover and Replace Printhd printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left communication has been maintained
Wrong printhead.
Open top cover and

replace the
printhead.
2812 Right printhead Printhead Right Incompatible printhead R version Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Right Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the right Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
2813 Left printhead Printhead Left Incompatible printhead L version Replace with a valid printhead.
Open top cover and Left Printhd Err printhead itself is not damaged, so
replace the left Replace Printhd communication has been maintained
8-13
Chapter 8
Code
2816 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge EEPROM error Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge problem. Replace Cart Communication is enabled but the
Maint Cart Error information is corrupted.
Replace Replace Cart
the maintenance <Maintenance cartridge detection timings>
cartridge. The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
Maintenance detected at the following timings:
cartridge problem. 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
Hold base of maint per second)/at the end of printing/ between
cart firmly. Keep it pages
level during removal 2. Before a recovery operation/during a
error or warning.
2817 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge ID error Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge problem. Replace Cart A maintenance cartridge for another model (The maintenance cartridge was
Maint Cart Error has been mounted. capable of normal communication
Replace Replace Cart when the error occurred.)
Wrong maintenance detected at the following timings:
cartridge. 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
Hold base of maint per second)/at the end of printing/ between
cart firmly. Keep it pages
level during removal 2. Before a recovery operation/during a
error or warning.
2818 No maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge not found Remove and reinstall, or replace the
cartridge. Load Cartridge Cannot communicate, or cannot detect a maintenance cartridge.
No Maint Cart maintenance cartridge.
Check Load Cartridge
Insert new maint detected at the following timings:
cart and push in 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
fully per second)/at the end of printing/ between
pages
error or warning.
2819 Maintenance Maint Cartridge Maintenance cartridge full Replace the maintenance cartridge.
cartridge full. Replace Cart Maintenance cartridge full is detected from
Maint Cart Error the dot count and the usage period (drying Reference) The absorber may appear
Replace Replace Cart time). whitish or weigh light, depending on
the maintenance the usage conditions.
cartridge. <Maintenance cartridge detection timings>
Maintenance The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
cartridge full. detected at the following timings:
Hold base of maint 1. Before printing/during printing (twice
cart firmly. Keep it per second)/at the end of printing/ between
level during removal pages
error or warning.
281A Prepare for MTCart Full Soon Maintenance cartridge near-full (continued Prepare a maintenance cartridge.
maint cart usage allowed)
replacement. Near-full has been detected from the dot
count and the usage period (drying time).
<Maintenance cartridge detection timings>

The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
detected at the following timings:
pages
error or warning.
8-14
Chapter 8
Code
281B No MaintenanceCartridge Maint Cartridge The maintenance cartridge before cleaning Replace the maintenance cartridge.
capacity. Replace Cart does not have an enough capacity The maintenance cartridge can be put
Replacethe Maint Cart Error (reusable). to reuse after the end of cleaning.
maintenancecartridge. Replace Cart Near-full has been detected from the dot
No MaintenanceCartridge count and the usage period (drying time). Reference) The absorber may appear
capacity. whitish or weigh light, depending on
Hold base of maint <Maintenance cartridge detection timings> the usage conditions.
cart firmly. Keep it The presence of a maintenance cartridge is
level during removal detected at the following timings:
pages
error or warning.
2820 Cannot adjust Online Key Head registration unadjustable Check the nozzle check pattern
printhead. and recalibrate The adjustment value has gone out of
Printhd Adj Err bounds during automatic head adjustment.
Press Online to Please Readjust
clear the error
and readjust
printhead.
2821 Cannot adjust Online Key LF unadjustable 1. Adjustment is not possible with
band. and recalibrate A detected value has gone out of bounds transparent/semi-transparent paper.
Band Adj Error while performing automatic band Replace with paper having similar
Press Online to Please Readjust adjustment. substrate and perform automatic band
clear the error adjustment or manual adjustment.
and readjust 2. Make detailed band adjustment
the band. (automatic).
Cannot adjust 3. Check the nozzle check pattern.
paper feed. 4. Initialize the system settings/paper
preferences and then add additional
Press OK to clear paper and perform automatic band
the error and adjustment (detailed). If the paper
readjust printhead. preferences are initialized, all the
paper setting would be reset to their
factory defaults.
2822 Cannot adjust OnlineKey: Press Eccentricity uncorrectable (which does not 1. Check the paper type: Replace with
eccentric. To Clear Error occur when in User mode) photo glossy paper (UF120).
Eccent Adj Error A detected value has gone out of bounds 2. Check the paper for soiling, tear and
Press Online to while making adjustment. other defects.
clear the error. Having run LF tuning, update the
Cannot adjust additional paper.
eccentric.
2823 Hardware error. Power On Head check error
03010000-2823 Again
Invalid Head Chk
Turn off printer,
wait, then
turn on again.
2824 Cannot adjust OnlineKey: Press Optical axis unadjustable (which does not Check the paper (paper type check).
optic axis. To Clear Error occur when in User mode)
Optic Axis Adj An adjustment pattern has not been printed.
Press Online to Error The optical axis deviates from the correct
clear the error. position by -/+3 mm or more.
Cannot adjust
optic axis.
2825 This type of media Paper type not compatible with HP-GL/2 Check the paper.
is not compatible has been specified.
with HP-GL/2.
2826 LFNG XXX XXX XXX When executing LF unevenness auto Check the paper.
XXX diagnostic processing, the multisensor read Check the multisensor.
press OK key value has gone outside the predefined
(XXXX is a measured scope (Service mode only).
value.)
8-15
Chapter 8
Code
2827 Execute printhead Printhead non-discharge error 1. Execute cleaning.

2828 cleaning. If this (Replace printhead/ continued printing not 2. Replace printhead.
2829 message is still allowed)
displayed, replace
Printhead. At start of printing the number of non-
Execute printhead ejecting nozzles is more than 320 per color
cleaning. If this (1 chip).
message is still 2827: Both L and R, or single printhead
displayed, replace model
Printhead. 2828: R printhead
[Stop: Stop Printing 2829: L printhead
Execute printhead * For the detailed head non-ejection errors,

cleaning. If this see section 280C.
message is still (If Setting of SERVICE MODE >
displayed, replace SETTING >HEAD WARNING is off, the
printhead . error code is 280E.)
Printing stopped.
[OK]
282A CR MOTOR TUNING Carriage motor identification processing Error is cleared by OK button.
ERROR :PRESS OK (rotation adjustment) failed (for Service 1. Check installation of carriage or
mode) carriage belt.
2. Clean the carriage main rail (Do not
oil it.)
3. Replace the carriage motor.
282B CR VIBRATION When processing carriage motor Error is cleared by OK button.
ERROR :PRESS OK identification (rotation adjustment), 1. Check installation of carriage or
carriage vibration has been detected (for carriage belt.
Service mode). 2. Clean the carriage main rail (Do not
oil it.)
3. Replace the carriage motor.
282D Left printhead Printhead error detected (L head only). After restarting, replace the printhead
error. Displayed when an abnormal temperature L.
rise of printhead has been detected to
Turn off printer, prompt you to restart.
wait, then
turn on again.
282E !Printhead error Temperature rising detected by particular 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, ink pre-injection before printing was 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
wait, then judged abnormal.
turn on again.
2830 Left printhead Printhead error detected (L head only). Replace the printhead L.
error. Displayed when restarting after detection
of error 282D to prompt you to replace
Open top cover and printhead L.
replace the left
printhead.
2832 Hardware error VHT leak detection error of right printhead iPF6300/6400 Series
03130031-2832 or of a single printhead, in case of VHT iPF8300/8400/9400
Turn off printer, exceeds rated value or falls below the rated Series
wait, then value. Replace right or left
turn on again. printhead.
2833 Hardware error VHT leak detection error of left printhead,
03130031-2833 in case of VHT exceeds rated value or falls
Turn off printer, below the rated value.
wait, then
turn on again.
2834 !Unknown printhead. Open Printhead contact failure is detected after 1. Remove and reinstall the printhead.
top cover and re-install the 2. Replace the printhead.
printhead. printhead installation. 3. Replace the carriage unit.
4. Replace the main controller PCB.
2835 !Cannot recognize print Printhead contact failure is detected after 1. Remove and reinstall the printhead.
head R. the 2. Replace the printhead.
Open the top cover and re- printhead installation. 3. Replace the carriage unit.
insert the printhead R. 4. Replace the main controller PCB.
2836 !Cannot recognize print Printhead contact failure is detected after 1. Remove and reinstall the printhead.
head L. the 2. Replace the printhead.
Open the top cover and re- printhead installation. 3. Replace the carriage unit.
insert the printhead L. 4. Replace the main controller PCB.
2901 Mail box The available size of the permanent area of Reorganize data.
nearly full. the hard disk space has fallen to less than 1
Delete unwanted data GB.
The mail box is
nearly full. Delete
unwanted jobs.
2902 Mail box full. The hard disk has run out of free space, Reorganize data.
Now printing disabling copy printing or error recovery.
without saving data.
8-16
Chapter 8
Code
2905 Mail box full. A job save has been executed when the Reorganize data.
Delete unwanted data available size of the permanent area of the
on your computer hard disk space was lost.
to resume printing. Cancel the job.
Press Stop
to cancel printing.
The mail box
is full.
Delete unwanted data
from your computer
to continue.
2906 Mail box full. The 101st job has been received when 100 Reorganize data.
Cannot save. Delete jobs are already saved in the permanent
unwanted data on area of the hard disk space.
your computer to
resume printing.
Press Stop to cancel
printing.
Too many jobs for
mail box.
Delete unwanted data
from your computer
to continue.
2907 Mail box full. 100 jobs are already saved in the Reorganize data.
Delete unwanted data permanent area of the hard disk space
Maximum jobs (Warning).
stored. Delete
unwanted data.
2908 Hard disk error. HDD format error 1. Format as instructed by the on-panel
message.
Press OK to reformat 2. Replace the HDD.
Hard disk error.
Press OK to format
HDD and restart the
printer (Takes 40
min). This deletes
all HDD data.
(cannot be canceled)
Hard disk error.
Will format HDD and
restart the printer
(Takes 40 min). This
deletes all HDD data
(cannot be canceled)
2909 File read error. HDD file error Restart the printer.
(The file in error is deleted, but the
Turn off printer, printer will recover normally when it is
wait a while, and restarted.)
turn it on again.
Invalid files
will be deleted.
290A Hardware error. HDD not connected. Connect the HDD/ Check the harness.
03130031-290A HDD was not detected at startup. Replace the HDD.
Turn off printer,
wait, then
turn on again.
2918 Power On Cassette detection sensor detection failure 1. Check to see if the cassette itself is
Again (cassette presence/absence sensor) properly loaded.
Cassette Sensor No cassette has been detected during 2. Check and replace the sensor (I/O
Detection Error cassette pickup. mode).
291A Roll sensor Power On Roll sensor detection failure 1. Check the roll unit, and remove,
cannot detect. Again Could not detect the roll unit. install or replace the roll unit.
Roll Sensor 2. Check I/O mode (roll unit
Turn on printer Detection Error detection).
again.
291B Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-291B Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
Turn off printer, Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
wait, then 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
turn on again. 5. Faulty lift drive motor
291D Hardware error. Power On Spur cam sensor detection failure Check the spur cam sensor in I/O
03130031-291D Again mode.
Hardware Err 1 -If OK, check the lifter drive system.
Turn off printer, 03130031-291D -If NG, replace the sensor.
wait, then
turn on again.
8-17
Chapter 8
Code
2920 Media Take-up Cannot take up paper 1. Check to see if the media take-up
error. An error check has been made on paper unit is switched on with the lock lever
after the paper had been fed 1850 mm, but down.
Check the paper. the media take-up unit was not driven at all 2. Check the connection between the
Press Online to in that interval (up to about 3700 mm main unit and the media take-up unit.
clear error. [when run immediately after the start of 3. Check to see if the wait roller is
Media Take-up detection]). properly set.
error. 4. Check to see if the media take-up
detection sensor is shielded by paper
Check the paper. when it is presented.
5. Faulty media take-up detection
sensor
6. Faulty Media take-up motor
Media take-up unit Media take-up unit use has been set to [Do Press the [Online] button to set the
ready. not use] at the start of printing when the media take-up unit use setting to force
media take-up unit is active. [Use] and print.
Online: Print The media take-up unit settings are
Stop: Stop Printing checked only when executing external
printing.
2921 Rewinding error. Continued rewinding error 1. Check to see if any obstacle is
Check for jam at The media take-up unit has continued placed at the media take-up paper
indicated position. rewinding for 10 seconds, with the media detection sensor position.
Press Online to take-up paper detection sensor turned on, at 2. Faulty media take-up paper
clear error. printer power-on and at the start of detection sensor
Rewinding error. printing. 3. Faulty media take-up button
Check for jam at 4. Faulty media take-up motor
indicated position.
2930 Cutting Mode not Stacker is not ready. Continue or stop the print. If the
Automatic. Remove - The power supply is not supplied to the preparation of the stacker isn't
stacker and print stacker. performed, the error occurs again.
again or cancel and - The distance between the stacker and
change settings. printer is not appropriate.
- The stacker is not joined.
Print again - Stacker initial error
Cancel
2931 Cutting Mode not When the stacker is usable condition, the Print again after separating the
Automatic. Remove printing has been started at the setting of distance between the stacker and
stacker and print cut-off or cutline print or eject or manual printer enoughly, or cancel print.
again or cancel and mode.
change settings.
Print again
Cancel
2E00 Load Roll Media Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
No roll paper have been fed when a job
with a roll paper specification is received.
2E01 Roll printing Roll Selected Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
is selected. Load Roll Roll Paper have not been fed when an
internal print job having a roll paper
Press Load/Eject specification started (during internal
and load a roll. printing).
Roll printing
is selected.
2E02 Sheet printing Front paper feed Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. slot is selected. No cassette paper has been loaded when
Press Load/Eject Press Load/Eject and received.
and load sheets. load a sheet.
Manual printing
is selected.
Top paper feed
slot is selected.
Press OK and
load a sheet.
Top paper feed
slot is selected.
Press Load/Eject and

load a sheet.
Front paper feed
slot is selected.
Press OK and
load a sheet.
Front paper feed
slot is selected.

load a sheet.
8-18
Chapter 8
Code
2E03 Load Papr in Cas Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper as instructed by the on-
Press Online. Not cut sheet have been loaded in cassettes screen guidance.
when data having a cassette specification is
received.
2E04 Manual(Front) Load Front Tray Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper manually from the front as
(Paper type) No manually fed paper has been fed when instructed by the on-screen guidance.
(Paper size) a job having a front paper feed
Load Paper specification is received.
Stop Printing
2E05 Manual(Top) Load Top Tray Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Feed paper manually from the top as
(Paper type) No manually fed paper has been fed when instructed by the on-screen guidance.
(Paper size) a job having a top paper feed specification
Load Paper is received.
Stop Printing
Sheet printing Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Load cut sheet.
is selected. Not cut sheet have been loaded in cassettes
when data having a cassette specification is
received.(When paper type/ size is not
determined)
2E08 Wrong paper size. PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) (roll paper) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper size setting on Prnt:PressOnline The width of data and that of the actually on the printer and the paper size setting
computer. Loaded Papr Diff loaded paper do not match. of the driver.
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper size. Driver: Chk Papr
Check paper size setting in Size Setting
driver. Loaded Papr Diff
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
PaprWidth Mismatch
2E09 Insufficient paper for job Roll Paper Short on roll paper Replace the roll paper.
Online: Print Please Replace All of the following conditions have been
Stop: Stop Printing Paper Level Low met at the start of printing:
Load/Eject: Change Paper Replace Paper -[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
Roll Paper Detection].
-Among the paper size settings coded in the
print data, the paper length exceeds the
remaining length of roll paper.
2E0A Roll printing is Sheets Loaded Paper mismatch (roll paper) Check the paper that is actually loaded
selected, but sheets are Press (lower arrow) To Eject Print data having a roll paper print on the paper and the paper feed setting
loaded. Roll Selected specification has been received at the of the driver.
Load Roll completion of manual feed paper pickup.
remove the sheets.
Roll printing is
selected, but manual
paper is loaded.
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets are
loaded.
Press OK,
remove the sheets,
and load a roll.
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets
are loaded.
OK:Eject Sheets
Stop:Stop Printing
Roll printing is
selected, but sheets
are loaded.
2E0B Cassette printing Sheets Loaded Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the paper that is actually loaded
is selected. Press (lower arrow) To Eject Print data having a cassette print on the paper and the paper feed setting
Cassette Selectd specification has been received at the of the driver.
Press Load/Eject and Load Papr in Cas completion of manual feed paper pickup.
remove manually
loaded sheets.
8-19
Chapter 8
Code
2E0C Manual printing Tray Selected Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the paper that is actually loaded
is selected, but a roll is Press OK 1. Print data having a manual feed print on the paper and the paper feed setting
loaded. specification has been received at the of the driver.
completion of roll paper pickup.
Press Load/Eject and 2. Print data having a manual feed print
remove the roll. specification has been received when there
Sheet printing is roll paper printout.
is selected, but 3. Cut sheet data has been received when
a roll is loaded. the media take-up unit is in use.
Stop Printing
Sheet printing
is selected, but
a roll is loaded.
2E0E No Roll Feed Unit. Roll P Unit Roll paper unit not installed 1. Check the roll unit, and remove,
Please Check The unit has received print data having a install or replace the roll unit.
Turn printer off Power On roll paper print specification when it had 2. Check I/O mode (roll unit
and install roll Again started without a roll unit being connected detection).
feed unit. to it.
2E0F Top cover is open. Top Cover The top cover is abnormally open. Check the cover.
Please Close Check the sensor (I/O mode).
Turn off printer, Top Cover Open
wait a while, and Close Top Cover
turn it on again.
2E10 Ink tank cover Ink Tank Cover Ink tank cover error open (continued use Close the ink tank cover.
is open. Close Please allowed) Check the sensor (I/O mode).
Tank Cover Open The ink tank cover opened while
Turn off printer, Close Please performing any operation, such as printing
wait a while, and and suctioning.
turn it on again.
2E11 Carriage Cover is open. Carriage cover open error Close the carriage cover.
A carriage cover open has been detected. Check the sensor (I/O mode).
2E12 Rel lever is in Faulty release lever Push down the release lever.
wrong position. The state of the release lever up (released) Check the sensor.
Turn off printer, has been detected.
wait, then
turn on again.
2E14 Wrong paper size. PaprSiz Mismatch Paper mismatch (size or width) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper size setting on Prnt:PressOnline The paper size specified for the [Print to on the printer and the paper size setting
computer. Loaded Papr Diff meet the paper width] setting of the driver of the driver.
From Spfd Size on receiving print data and the width of the
Online: Print roll paper actually fed did not match.
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper size. Driver: Chk Papr
Check paper size Size Setting
setting in driver. Loaded Papr Diff
From Spfd Size
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
8-20
Chapter 8
Code
2E15 Wrong paper type. Paper mismatch Paper mismatch (type) (on adjustment) Equalize the paper types for the first
Press (lower arrow) To The second and subsequent sheets of paper and second sheets with each other in
Stop: Stop Printing Replace have been fed as a paper type different adjustment printing.
Load/Eject: (Paper Type) from the first sheet when LF adjustment
Change Paper (Paper Size) was made with cut sheet.
Wrong paper type. Loaded Paper
Check Type
Replace paper Switch Paper
in cassette. In Cassette
Wrong paper type. Loaded Paper
Lift the release Check Type
lever and reload Press (lower arrow) Key
the paper. and Reload
Stop: Stop Printing

Wrong paper type.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Wrong paper type.
Lift the release
lever and reload
the paper.
Paper mismatch
Make sure media type
and paper size match
for the adjustment
print.
Wrong paper type. Driver: Chk Papr Paper mismatch (type) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper type Type Setting At the start of printing, paper type specified on the printer and the driver paper type
setting in driver. Chk Paper Type in the job and the type of paper actually setting.
Press Online loaded do not match, and [Stop] has been
Online: Print selected for [Paper Mismatch Detection].
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper type. PaprTyp Mismatch
This type of media Prnt:PressOnline
is not compatible
with HP-GL/2.
Wrong paper feed Paper Feed Slot Paper mismatch (type) Check the feeder slot/cassette pick-up
slot for this paper SpcfdPapr NotFit A paper type that cannot be fed from the setting.
type. Press (lower arrow) Key specified feeder slot has been specified.
and Reload
Press Load/Eject
and reload the
paper.
Wrong paper feed
slot for this paper
type.
2E16 Wrong paper type. Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (type) Check the paper that is actually loaded
Check paper type setting on Prnt:PressOnline The data type defined in the data and the on the printer and the driver paper type
computer. Check Paper type of actually loaded paper do not match. setting.
Press Online Following the transmission of data in the
Online: Print GARO format, all of the following
Stop: Stop Printing conditions have been met at the start of
Wrong paper type printing:
and size. Check -The paper type that has been set in the job
paper type and size and the type of actually fed paper do not
setting on computer. match.
Online: Print -[Stop] has been selected for [Paper
Stop: Stop Printing Mismatch Detection].
Wrong paper type

and size. Check
paper type and size
setting in driver.
Online: Print
Stop: Stop Printing
2E17 No cassette Cassette Cassette not installed 1. Check to see if the cassette itself is
detected. Undetected properly loaded.
Check the cassette. Check Cassette 2. Check and replace sensor (I/O
Press Online mode).
2E18 Cannot load. Remove paper Paper not fed as far as the platen
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed
and reload the Press (upper arrow) Key
paper.
2E19 Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed LF out of synchronization for cut sheet
paper.
2E1A Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
paper.
8-21
Chapter 8
Code
2E1B The roll is empty. Roll Paper No roll paper available (trailing edge of roll 1. Replace the roll paper.
Load/Eject: Change Paper Please Replace paper detected) 2. Check paper sensor R (I/O mode).
The roll is empty. Paper Not Loaded -Trailing edge of paper has been detected 3. Is the paper fed successfully (under
Lift the release Press (upper arrow) Key by paper sensor in a roll paper operation. a negative load or any other
lever and replace -LF out of synchronization on roll paper. influence)?
the roll. (Detected the spool no longer rotating.)
The roll is empty.

The roll is empty.
Lift the release
lever and replace
the roll.
Out of roll paper.
Push the release
lever back, then
replace the roll.
2E1C Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while ejecting paper 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press Load/Eject Press (upper arrow) Key (A sequence of removing jams with the reload the paper.
and reload the pinch roller released is required) 2. Remove the paper once
paper. A jam has been detected while ejecting
paper.
2E1D Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error Refeed the paper.
paper.
2E1F Cannot print Paper Mismatch Paper mismatch (size) Check the paper that is actually loaded
as specified. ReplcPap:Press (lower The second and subsequent sheets of paper on the printer and the paper size setting
Press Load/Eject arrow) have been fed as a paper size different from of the driver.
and replace paper with A2/ the first sheet when adjustment was made
16.6"x23.4" with cut sheet.
(vertical) or larger
Cannot print as specified. Need A3 Vertical The paper size setting in effect at the start
Press Load/Eject and or Larger of an internal print session has fallen below
replace roll with 10 in. wide Press (lower arrow) Key the minimum size specified for that internal
or larger roll. and Reload print session.
Cannot print as specified. [XXX x YYY]: Required minimum size

Lift the release lever and
replace paper with [ XXX ] The second and subsequent sheets of paper
(vertical) or have been fed as a paper size different from
larger. the first sheet when adjustment was made
Cannot print with cut sheet.
as specified. [XXX x YYY]: Required minimum size
Lift the release
lever and replace
roll with 10 in.
wide or larger roll
Cannot print
as specified.
Replace paper with
[XXX] (vertical)
or larger.
The paper is too
small. Replace paper
with [XXX] (vertical) or
larger.
The paper is too
small. Replace roll
with 10 in. wide or
larger roll.
Cannot print as specified.
replace paper with [XXX]
(vertical) or larger.
Cannot print as specified.
replace roll with 10 in. wide
or larger roll.
2E20 Wrong paper type. Paper mismatch (type) (on adjustment) Equalize the paper types for the first
Lift the release The second and subsequent sheets of paper and second sheets with each other in
lever and reload have been fed as a paper type different adjustment printing.
the paper. from the first sheet when LF adjustment
was made from a cassette.
Stop: Stop Printing
Wrong paper.
Lift the release
lever and replace
the paper.
Paper mismatch
Make sure media type
and paper size match
for the adjustment
print.
8-22
Chapter 8
Code
2E21 Hardware error. Power On IEEE1394 interface error 1. Restart the printer.
03130000-2E21 Again Any error has been detected while 2. Remove and reinsert the IEEE1394
Turn off printer, IEEE 1394 Error initializing IEEE1394 at startup. board and then restart the printer.
wait, then Restart Printer 3. Replace the IEEE1394 board.
turn on again.
2E22 Media Type not Media Check Paper mismatch (cut sheet) Check the cassette pick-up setting/
Stop: Stop Printing

2E23 Hardware error. Power On Cutter unit failure 1. Remove paper slip (foreign matter)
03130031-2E23 Again At startup or completion of paper jam attached to the cutter home position
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 handling, when attempting to get the cutter sensor.
wait, then 03130031-2E23 which is in other position than HP back to 2. Check the cutter driving circuit and
turn on again. HP, the home position sensor timed out the cutter unit.
without response. When FU3902 blows out on PF510/
5100/610,
-Replace the main controller PCB
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300
series/ 6400 series
-Replace the main controller PCB.
2E24 Roll feed unit err Power On Faulty roll paper unit Check the roll cam sensor (I/O mode).
Turn off printer and check Again Failed to detect the cam in the roll unit
roll feed unit Roll Feed Unit while no paper was loaded.
Error
2E25 Cannot detect papr Can't DetectPapr Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing
Remove paper and press on paper (JAM2)
Load/Eject. Remove Paper
Press Online
Cannot feed paper. Remove paper
Remove paper and press Press Online
Load/Eject.
Cannot detect papr After loading of roll paper or cut sheet was
Remove paper and loaded successfully, Paper detection
press OK. sensor/ Media sensor sensor detected no
paper (JAM2).
2E27 Cannot load. Remove paper Feeding error (nip release required)
Press Load/Eject Cannot Feed LF out of synchronization (feed motor
and reload the Press (upper arrow) Key won't rotate) has been detected.
paper.
Cannot feed paper
Lift the release
lever and reload
paper.
Cannot feed paper.
Reload the paper.
Paper jam. Paper Jam Jam while picking up, ejecting or printing 1. Open and close the release lever to
Press (upper arrow) Key on paper reload the paper.
Press Load/Eject (A sequence of removing jams with the 2. Remove the paper once and then
and reload the pinch roller released is required)(JAM1) refeed it.
paper. Virtually all recovery errors that could
Paper jam. Lift occur in connection with paper pickup are
the release lever. handled.
Paper jam.
Push the release
lever back.
Paper jam.
all the way.
Paper jam.
all the way
and press OK.
2E30 The paper is Paper mismatch (size) Continued printing allowed.
too small. With [Pause] selected for [Paper Mismatch Check driver setting
Detection] in the menu setting, paper size Replace with appropriate paper.
for the paper loaded was smaller than the
size specified by data.
2E31 Insufficient paper All of the following conditions have been Replace the roll paper.
for job met at the start of external printing:
-[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
-Automatic roll feed to another roll paper
slot which is not the current feeding path,
out of the 2 slots the printer has, is not
available.
8-23
Chapter 8
Code
2E32 Insufficient paper All of the following conditions have been Replace the roll paper.
for job met at the start of external printing:
-[ON] has been selected for [Remaining
-Automatic roll feed to another roll paper
slot which is not the current feeding path,
out of the 2 slots the printer has, is not
available.
2E33 Roll Paper Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with 1. Select "load a roll" and follow
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received. instruction on the panel.
Load Roll Paper 2. Select "stop printing," or stop
Stop Printing printing by pressing stop button.
Roll 1(Upper) Paper mismatch (roll paper) 3. Release the release lever and load
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with the paper.
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When paper has not been loaded on either
and load a roll. upper or lower slot, and the feeding slot is
set to [Automatic] in the job setting, an
error of upper roll occurs.
2E34 Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
(Paper type) No roll paper has been fed when a job with
(Paper size) a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When no paper has been loaded on either
error of upper roll (2E33) occurs.
Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper)
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with
a roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject When no paper has been loaded on either
error of upper roll (2E33) occurs.
* This is a message that appears when
paper type/ size specification does not exist
due to HPGL format etc.
2E35 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when
Roll printing performing internal printing.
is selected.
Press Load/Eject
and load a roll.
2E36 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) (lower) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper was fed when internal
printing with the specified roll paper
Press Load/Eject (lower) was started.
and load a roll.
2E37 Roll printing Paper mismatch (roll paper) (Upper) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with 1. Select "load a roll" and follow
roll paper specification is received. instruction on the panel.
Roll 1 (Upper) Paper mismatch (roll paper) 2. Select "stop printing," or stop
is selected. No roll paper was fed when the job printing by pressing stop button.
specified with upper roll paper was 3. Release the release lever and load
Press Load/Eject received. the paper. (This step 3 is only for 800/
and load a roll. 8000/9000 series.)
2E38 Roll 2 (Lower) Paper mismatch (roll paper)(Lower) Load roll paper.
is selected. No roll paper has been fed when a job with
lower roll paper specification is received.
Press Load/Eject
and load a roll.
2E39 The Roll 2 (Lower) is No roll paper available (trailing edge of roll 1. Replace the roll paper
empty. paper detected) -Check paper sensor R (I/O mode).
Lift the release -Detected that cut sheet sized paper has 2. Is the paper fed successfully (under
lever and replace been fed at the roll paper feeding slot. a negative load or any other
the roll. -The trailing edge of paper was detected by influence)?
The roll (XX) is empty. the Paper detection sensor/ Media sensor
Press OK. sensor during operation in which roll paper
was used.
-The spool stopped rotating during paper
loading or printing
(XX: Upper roll paper/ Lower roll paper)
2E3A Roll1 jammed. Manually During upper roll paper feeding operation, Manually rewind the paper and reload.
rewind the the paper was fed with the roll feed sensor
roll all the way detecting the paper, but the paper detection
and press OK. sensor/ media sensor sensor could not
Roll1 (Uppr) jammed. detect the paper and the operation timed
Manually rewind the out.
roll all the way
and press OK.
8-24
Chapter 8
Code
2E3B Roll 2 (Lwr) jammed. During lower roll paper feeding operation, Manually rewind the paper and reload.
Manually rewind the the paper was fed with the roll feed sensor
roll all the way detecting the paper, but the paper detection
and press OK. sensor/ media sensor sensor could not
detect the paper and the operation timed
out.
2E3C Paper jam. Lift During operations with cut sheet, the state Reload the paper.
the release lever. of the paper detection sensor/ media sensor
sensor has become invalid.
2E3D Roll 1 (upper) jam During operations with upper roll paper, Reload the paper.
Lift the release the paper was fed with the roll paper
lever. detection sensor and the roll feeding sensor
detecting the paper, but the state of the
paper detection sensor/ media sensor
sensor became invalid.
2E3E Roll 2 (lower) jam During operations with lower roll paper, Reload the paper.
Lift the release the paper was fed with the roll paper
lever. detection sensor and the roll feeding sensor
detecting the paper, but the state of the
2E3F Paper jam. Lift When either upper or lower roll paper is in Reload the paper.
the release lever. operation, the states of the roll paper
detection sensor, roll feeding sensor, and
2E40 Cannot print as Print data having lower roll paper Remove the printout of upper roll, and
selected. Another specification has been received while print again.
roll is in use. upper roll printout remains.
[Stop]: Stop printing
2E41 Cannot print as Print data having upper roll paper Remove the printout of lower roll, and
selected. Another specification has been received while print again.
roll is in use. lower roll printout remains.
[Stop]: Stop printing
2E42 MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type/ restart printing of Continued printing allowed.
suspended job) Replace with appropriate paper.
It occurs when all of the following
conditions are met:
-[Stop] selected for [Paper Mismatch
Detection] in menu settings.
-[Change Paper] button was pressed for
suspended jobs from host.
-The paper type that has been set in the job
and the type of actually fed paper do not
match.
2E45 MediaType Mismatch Paper mismatch (type/ restart printing of Continued printing allowed.
suspended job) Check the driver settings.
It occurs when all of the following Replace with appropriate paper.
conditions are met:
-[Stop] selected for [Paper Mismatch
Detection] in menu settings.
-The paper width that has been set with
data and the paper width of actually fed
paper do not match.
2E47 Cutter Position Error Cut Failure Check around the cutter unit.
The cutter is not at home position when
restart from jam. Also paper feeding was
detected.
2F11 CR error Power On An operation order has been issued while
Again the carriage suffered a hardware error.
Call for Service. CR Error
2F12 LF error Power On LF error 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
Again -An operation order has been received sensor.
Call for Service. LF Error while the LF suffered a hardware error. 2. Replace the feed motor.
-The target position could not be reached <Supplement>
within a predicted operation time +3 -If the carriage travels heavily near the
seconds during an LF operation. stop position, a mechanical load error
-The sensor could not be detected during an may be suspected.
LF operation involving sensor detection. -If any other symptom is observed, a
feeding sensor may be at fault.
2F13 Hardware error. Power On A/D converter external trigger output stop
03130031-2F13 Again (Hardware error 1)
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1
wait, then 03130031-2F13
turn on again.
2F14 Hardware error. Power On ASIC register not writable (Hardware error Replace the main controller PCB.
03130031-2F14 Again 2)
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 2 Could not write to the ASIC register on the
wait, then main controller PCB.
turn on again.
8-25
Chapter 8
Code
2F16 Hardware error. Power On Mist fan error 1. Check the bundled wires in the mist
03130031-2F16 Again The rotation of the mist fan is not fan drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Mist Fan Error detectable. 2. Replace the mist fan unit.
wait, then 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F17 Hardware error. Power On Platen fan lock detection error 1. Check the bundled wires in the
03130031-2F17 Again The lock signal has been supplied platen suction fan drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Platen Fan Lock continuously for 3 seconds or longer, 10 2. Replace the platen suction fan unit.
wait, then Power On seconds after the platen fan started rotating. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. Again
Platen Fan Err
2F1F Hardware error. Power On Purge sensor error (recovery purge motor
03130031-2F1F Again HP detection error)
Turn off printer, Purge Motor The recovery system has been driven but
wait, then Sensor Error no sensor interrupt occurs.
turn on again. The recovery system has been driven to
close the cap, but the cap has not been
capped successfully.
2F20 Hardware error. Power On Cap motor cam positioning error
03130031-2F20 Again The recovery system has been driven but
Motor Cam Pos no sensor interrupt occurs.
Turn off printer, Error The recovery system has been driven to
wait, then close the cap, but the cap has not been
turn on again. capped successfully.
2F21 Rel lever is in Pinch roller open detected with the pinch 1. Restart with the pinch roller closed.
wrong position. roller locked. 2. Check the sensor in I/O DISPLAY
in Service mode (Check the pinch
Turn off printer, roller pressure release detection SW/
wait, then the release lever lock sensor.)
turn on again.
2F22 Hardware error. Power On Pump shift timeout <Supplement>
03130031-2F22 Again The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily towards
Turn off printer, Pump Motion within a predicted operation time +3 the stop position: A mechanical load
wait, then Timeout seconds during pump operation or no error may be suspected.
turn on again. sensor has been detected during a pump -Otherwise: The sensor in the purge
operation involving sensor detection. unit may be at fault.
2F23 Hardware error. Power On Purge motor error <Supplement>
03130031-2F23 Again A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 -If the motor could not be run at all or
Turn off printer, Pump Motion msec in a pump operation. has resulted in an error after moving by
wait, then Error a slight distance:
turn on again. A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
B. The motor or drive circuit may be at
fault.
-If the carriage has run more or less out
of control and resulted in an error:
A. The encoder sensor may be at fault.
2F24 Cannot cut paper. Cutting Error Cutter shift timeout
Lift the release Please Cut Papr The cutter failed to reach the home position
lever and reload Press (upper arrow) Key in time during a cutting operation
the paper. to Release Paper
2F24 Hardware error. Power On Cutter shift timeout error
03130031-2F24 Again No sensor has been detected during a cutter
Turn off printer, Cutter Timeout operation involving sensor detection.
wait, then
turn on again.
2F25 Hardware error. Power On Carriage motor HP not detectable Check the carriage HP sensor in I/O
03130031-2F25 Again Detected only for the wide format. mode.
Turn off printer, CR Position Err For the narrow format, the carriage motor <Supplement>
wait, then Restart Printer HP can be detected when the carriage hits -If the motor could not be run at all:
turn on again. the wall in a full scan following the A. A mechanical load error may be
detection of the HP. suspected.
fault.
-If the carriage has resulted in an error
after moving at a constant speed:
A. The carriage HP sensor may be at
fault.
A. The encoder sensor may be at fault.
2F26 Hardware error. Power On Carriage operation disabled <Supplement>
03130031-2F26 Again -A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 -If the motor could not be run at all or
Turn off printer, Carriage Motion msec in a carriage operation has resulted in an error after moving by
wait, then Error -A collision has been detected in a carriage a slight distance:
turn on again. operation (with the speed predicted from A. A mechanical load error may be
the PWM output value having a deviation suspected.
of 25 ips or more from the actual speed). B. The motor or drive circuit may be at
fault.
A. encoder sensor may be at fault.
8-26
Chapter 8
Code
2F27 Hardware error. Power On Carriage shift timeout <Supplement>

03130031-2F27 Again The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily towards
Turn off printer, Carriage Timeout within a predicted operation time +3 the stop position, a mechanical load
wait, then Restart Printer seconds during carriage operation. error may be suspected.
turn on again.
2F28 Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-2F28 Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Turn off printer, Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
wait, then Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
turn on again. 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
5. Faulty lift drive motor
2F29 Hardware error. Power On LF feeding motor timeout (cut sheet) 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
03030000-2F29 Again -The target position could not be reached sensor.
Turn off printer, LF Feed Timeout within a predicted operation time +3 2. Replace the feed motor.
wait, then Restart Printer seconds during an LF operation. <Supplement>
turn on again. -The sensor could not be detected during an -If the carriage travels heavily near the
LF operation involving sensor detection. stop position, a mechanical load error
may be suspected.
-If any other symptom is observed, a
feeding sensor may be at fault.
2F2A Hardware error. Power On Cannot detect the LF home position 1. Check the sensor (I/O mode check).
03130031-2F2A Again The LF home position could not be 2. Replace the feed roller encoder
Turn off printer, LF Position Err detected on LF homing during sensor.
wait, then Restart Printer initialization. 3. Replace the encoder film.
turn on again. 4. Replace the feed motor/belt/ adjust
the belt tension.
5. Replace the long flexible cable.
<Supplement>
-If the motor could not be run at all:
A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
fault.
-If the carriage has resulted in an error
after moving at a constant speed: The
feed roller HP sensor may be at fault.
of control and resulted in an error, the
encoder sensor may be at fault.
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300/
6400 series
2F2B Hardware error. Power On LF operation failure (LF operation 1. Replace the feed roller encoder
03130031-2F2B Again disabled) sensor.
Turn off printer, LF Motion A pump duty of 100% has lasted for 200 2. Replace the feed motor.
wait, then Error msec during LF operation. <Supplement>
turn on again. -If the motor could not be run at all or
has resulted in an error after moving by
a slight distance:
A. A mechanical load error may be
suspected.
fault.
of control and resulted in an error, the
encoder sensor may be at fault.
When FU2802 blows out on iPF6300/
6400 Series
2F2C Hardware error. Power On Cassette shift timeout <Supplement>
03130031-2F2C Again -The target position could not be reached -If the carriage travels heavily near the
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 within a predicted operation time + 3 stop position, a mechanical load error
wait, then 03130031-2F2C seconds during cassette operation. may be suspected.
turn on again. -No sensor has been detected during a -Otherwise, the cassette unit sensor
pump operation involving sensor detection. may be at fault.
2F2D Cassette not Power On Cassette operation disabled 1. Check the cassette motor and the
working. Again A PWM duty of 100% has lasted for 200 drive circuit.
Turn off printer, Cassette Motion msec in a cassette operation. 2. Check the cassette encoder sensor.
wait, then Error
turn on again.
2F2E Hardware error. Power On Roll shift timeout
03130031-2F2E Again No sensor has been detected during a roll
Turn off printer, Roll Motion operation involving sensor detection.
wait, then Timeout
turn on again.
8-27
Chapter 8
Code
2F2F Hardware error. Power On Non-ejection detection error 1. Check whether any foreign matter
03800500-2F2F Again As a result of nozzle checking made by the such as paper slip exists on the head
Turn off printer, Eject. Detect head management sensor unit: management sensor optical axis.
wait, then Err 1. All 640 nozzles in a nozzle line are non- 2. Light interception due to ink
turn on again. discharging. accumulation.-> Remove the ink/
2. At least 50 nozzles have been found Replace the unit.
mismatched in a nozzle line of 640 nozzles 3. Check the head management
since the last session of detection. sensor's connector connection
4. If Service mode nozzle check
pattern printing is no problem, replace
the head management sensor unit.
Reference 1) As for the detection

condition 1. above, in the iPF650/750,
iPF6300/6350, and iPF8300 series or
later, the error codes are broken up into
2F40,2F41,2F42,2F43,2F44, and 2F47
depending on the non-ejection
conditions.
Reference 2) Error
2F2F,2F40,2F41,2F42,2F43,2F44,
and 2F47 are detected in the following
order.
1. Determines signal level (2F47) of
head management sensor
2. Determines complete non-ejection
of all colors (2F40)
3. Determines multiple mismatches
(2F2F)
of a single color (2F41)
of one line (2F42)
of 640 nozzles (2F43)
7. Determines non-ejection of more
than 320 nozzles (2F44)
Reference 3) The amount of change

(between non-ejecting and ejecting
nozzle counts) from the last session of
nozzle checking is defined as the
amount of mismatch.
2F30 Hardware error. Power On Non-ejection detecting position error
03800500-2F30 Again No detectable region has been found during
Turn off printer, Eject. Detect non-ejection position adjustment.
wait, then Err
turn on again.
2F32 Multi-sensor error Power On Faulty multisensor 1. Retry the adjustment with the effect
Turn off printer, Again Light quantity adjustment of multisensor of outside light, such as that of the
wait a while, then Multi-sensor Err failed. afternoon sun, being removed.
turn it on again. Or, outside light entered during 2. Check the position at which the
multisensor light quantity adjustment. multisensor is installed.
3. Replace the multisensor.
2F33 Use another paper. Paper Type Unadjustable because of transparent paper Change to appropriate paper.
Press Online to Please Change Paper are unidentifiable on automatic
clear the error. Can't Adj Paper adjustment (transparent/semi-transparent
Chg Paper Type paper).
2F34 Cannot calibrate. Press OK Color calibration error 1. Check to see if the loaded paper
Press OK and try and recalibrate The adjustment value has gone out of permit calibration.
calibration again. Calibration Err bounds during calibration. 2. Check calibrated printed matter for
Cannot calibrate. Recalibrate soiling and other defects.
Try calibration 3. Check the nozzle pattern
again.
2F35 Calibration Calibration Faulty multisensor (on calibration) 1. Check the parts counter in service
There is a problem multi-sensor err A failure to calibrate has been detected mode and replace the multisensor unit.
with the Press OK from the parts counter. 2. Initialize the counter for the
multi-sensor. to cancel replacement unit mounted. (It is
Press OK to cancel recommended to estimate the usage
calibration. status of other units coming to the end
Calibration of their service life and replace them as
There is a problem needed.)
with the
multi-sensor.
Cancel calibration.
2F37 ERROR E173-2F37 ERROR E173-2F37 Linear scale error
Call for service. Call For Service No signal is available from the carriage
encoder when the printhead is driven.
2F38 Top cover is open. Ink Tank Cover The top cover is abnormally open. Check the cover.
Turn off printer, Close Please Check the sensor (I/O mode).
wait a while, and Tank Cover Open
turn it on again. Close Please
8-28
Chapter 8
Code
2F3A Hardware error. Power On Ink Supply Valve Open/Closed motor 1. Replace the ink supply unit.
03130031-2F3A Again timeout error 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
Turn off printer, Valve Motor Err
wait, then
turn on again.
2F3B Hardware error. Power On CS communication error 1. Remove and insert the ink tank, or
03130031-2F3B Again An irrecoverable communication error has replace the ink tank.
Turn off printer, Hardware Err 1 occurred communicating between the CS 2. Check bundled wires in the ink tank
wait, then 03130031-2F3B chip mounted on the ink tank and the main unit and the main controller PCB.
turn on again. unit. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
2F3C Hardware error. LF nip sensor error. Check the lift cam sensor/ pressure
03130031-2F3C When executing nip automatic operation, release switch (I/O mode)
Turn off printer, one of the following conditions is met.
wait, then -The sensor detected nip closed after the
turn on again. nip completed opening operation.
-The sensor detected nip open after the nip
completed closing operation.
2F3D Hardware error. HP pre-ejection pump motor overload error Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3D unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then
turn on again.
2F3E Hardware error. HP pre-ejection pump motor shift timeout Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3E unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then
turn on again.
2F3F Hardware error. An error other than overload error or shift Replace the HP maintenance jet tray
03130031-2F3F timeout error has been detected for the HP unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then pre-ejection pump motor.
turn on again.
2F40 Hardware error. When the result of non-ejection detection is
03800500-2F40 as follows.
Turn off printer,wait, then When non-ejection has been detected for
turn on again. all nozzles of all colors
-The error code assuming a problem in the
supply system/ purge system/ main
controller PCB (electric).
03800500-2F41 as follows:
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection of nozzles in 1
turn on again. to 5 chip(s).
(A line EVEN/ A line ODD/ B line
EVEN/ B line ODD
Total of 2560 nozzles x 1 to 5 chip(s)
complete non-ejection)
-Error code assuming a problem in the ink
supply system/ purge system.
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection of one line in
turn on again. 1chip.
(In either A line or B line, a complete non-
ejection of 1280 nozzles)
-Error code assuming broken flexible cable
or contact failure (heat enable line).
Turn off printer,wait, then Complete non-ejection (640 nozzles) of
turn on again. EVEN line or ODD line.
-Error code assuming broken flexible cable
or contact failure (data line).
Turn off printer,wait, then More than half of 640 nozzles in EVEN
turn on again. line or ODD line have non-ejection (more
than 320 nozzles).
-Error code assuming a head failure such as
broken heater board of head.
2F46 Hardware error. Only for iPF750 series The shutter HP sensor did not respond at Check the platen shutter HP sensor (I/
03130031-2F46 startup and at switching of platen shutter at O Display). Check/ replace the platen
Turn off printer,wait, then printing. shutter drive unit or sensor
turn on again.
8-29
Chapter 8
Code
2F47 Hardware error. Only for iPF750 series The optical axis of the head management 1. Check whether any foreign matter
3800500-2F47 sensor unit has been intercepted for some such as paper slip exists on the head
Turn off printer,wait, then reasons. management sensor optical axis.
turn on again. 2. Light interception due to ink
The amount of LED luminescence and the accumulation.-> Remove the ink/
level of detection signal of diode light Replace the unit.
receiving sensitivity has gone beyond the 3. Check connection of the head
predefined range. (determines the level of management sensor's connector.
APCCHK)(It's not a problem of printhead 4. Main controller PCB (Check the
or ink supply system.) fuse/ Replace the PCB.)
5. A large amount of ink mist has been
attached to optical element.
6. Replace the head management
sensor.
2F48 Hardware error. VHT (heater drive drive power supply for iPF6300 series
03130031-2F48 printhead) error 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, wait, then VHT has gone below or above the rating. 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. iPF8300 series
1. Replace the printhead.
2. Replace the CR relay board.
3. Check/ replace the long flexible
cable.
2F49 Hardware error. Printhead short-circuited detected. iPF6300 series
2F50 03130031-xxxx Prior to VH power on, it has been detected 1. Replace the printhead
2F51 Turn off printer, wait, then that the printhead had been damaged due to 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. paper jam etc, and ink went inside the iPF8300 series
terminal area causing near short-circuit. 1. Replace the printhead
2F49: L side printhead 2. Replace the CR relay board
2F50: R side printhead 3. Check/ replace the long flexible
2F51: LR both printhead cable.
2F4A Hardware error. iPF6300/830 or newer main controller PCB error. Replace the main controller PCB.
03130031-2F4A
Turn off printer, wait, then
turn on again.
2F4D Hardware error. Left printhead only. VHT leak detection error of left printhead, For iPF6400 series,
03130031-2F4D in case of VHT exceeds rated value or falls 1. Replace the printhead.
Turn off printer, wait, then Possible to occur on below the rated value. 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. iPFX400 or newer models. For iPF8400/9400 series,
2F4E Hardware error. Right printhead or a single VHT leak detection error of right 1. Replace the printhead.
03130031-2F4E printhead printhead, in case of VHT exceeds rated 2. Replace the CR relay board.
Turn off printer, wait, then value or falls below the rated value. 3. Check and replace the long flexible
turn on again. Possible to occur on cable printed circuit.
iPFX400 or newer models. 4. Replace the main controller PCB.
2F4F Hardware error. Possible to occur on VHT leak detection error of right and left
03130031-2F4F iPFX400 or newer models. printhead or a single printhead, in case of
Turn off printer, wait, then VHT exceeds rated value or falls below the
turn on again. rated value.
2F52 Hardware error. Detected that a carriage unit of a legacy Replace with an appropriate carriage
03130031-2F52 model has been mounted (iPF8300/6300/ unit.
Turn off printer, wait, then 6350 only). 1. Replace with an appropriate carriage
turn on again. unit.
2. Replace the printhead.
2F53 Hardware error. Supply valve motor error of the left ink iPF8400/9400 Series
03130031-2F53. tank. 1. Replace the left ink tank unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then Drove supply valve motor. The movement 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. was not detected.
2F54 Hardware error. Supply valve motor error of the right ink iPF8400/9400 Series
03130031-2F54. tank. 1. Replace the right ink tank unit.
Turn off printer,wait, then Drove supply valve motor. The movement 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again. was not detected.
2F60 !Spectrophotometer Unit Spectrophotometer unit won't return 1. Install spectrophotometer unit.
not connected. signals. 2. Replace signal line.
Turn off power and attach 3. Replace connection.
Spectrophotometer Unit. 4. Replace spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F61 Hardware error UART communication error. 1. Replace signal line.
038A0002-2F61 (Data transfer volume in consistency, 2. Replace connection.
Turn off printer, wait a checksum error etc.) 3. Replace spectrophotometer unit
while, then turn it on again. PCB
2F62 Hardware error When transmitting specified pulses to 1. Replace spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F62 spectrophotometer carriage motor, the PCB.
Turn off printer, wait a spectrophotometer carriage unit won't 2. Replace lines around
while, then turn it on again. respond to spectrophotometer carriage HP spectrophotometer carriage unit.
sensor. 3. Replace spectrophotometer carriage
motor.
8-30
Chapter 8
Code
2F63 Hardware error The spectrophotometer up-down unit 1. Replace spectrophotometer up-
038A0002-2F63 upper detection sensor won't respond when down unit motor.
Turn off printer, wait a a predefined pulse is sent to the 2. Replace spectrophotometer up-
while, then turn it on again. spectrophotometer up-down unit motor. down unit upper detection sensor.
3. Re-install delivery guide.
4. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F65 Hardware error When a predefined pulse is sent to the 1. Replace spectrophotometer up-
038A0002-2F65 spectrophotometer up-down unit motor, down unit motor.
Turn off printer, wait a the spectrophotometer up-down unit lower 2. Replace spectrophotometer up-
while, then turn it on again. detection sensor in spectrophotometer unit down unit lower detection sensor.
won't respond. 3. Re-install delivery guide.
PCB.
2F66 Hardware error Media dry fan won't return signals. 1. Replace fan
038A0002-2F66 2. Replace signal lines
Turn off printer, wait a 3. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
while, then turn it on again. PCB.
2F67 Hardware error Embedded FlashROM read/ write error Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F67 PCB.
Turn off printer, wait a
while, then turn it on again.
2F68 Hardware error Spectrophotometer EEPROM read/write Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F68 error PCB.
2F69 Hardware error Write/read error at RAM check Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F69 PCB.
2F6A Hardware error Firmware update failed. 1. Update firmware again
038A0002-2F6A 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
Turn off printer, wait a PCB.
2F6B Hardware error Initialization after power on of CPU at Replace the spectrophotometer unit
038A0002-2F6B spectrophotometer unit side failed. PCB.
2F6C Hardware error. Failed self-testing. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
03130031-2F6C. PCB.
Turn off printer, wait, then
turn on again.
2F70 Hardware error. Indication at ink priming error in both For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F70. subtanks. 1. Replace both of the inktank units.
Turn off printer, wait, then 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F71 Hardware error. Call for Service. Indication at ink priming error in the left For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F71. HW1 error subtank. 1. Replace the left inktank unit.
Turn off printer, wait, then 03130031-2F71 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F72 Hardware error. Call for Service. Indication at ink priming error in the right For iPF6400 Series,
03130031-2F72. HW1 error subtank. 1. Replace the right subtank
Turn off printer, wait, then 03130031-2F72 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
turn on again.
2F80 !Spectrophotometer sensor Spectrophotometer sensor won't return 1. Install Spectrophotometer sensor.
is not mounted. Please check signals. 2. Check cables.
if the sensor is mounted 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
properly and press OK. 4. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
PCB.
2F81 ! Spectrophotometer After white calibration, the 1. Clean white tile.
Unit Calibration white tile spectrophotometer sensor returned a value 2. Mount white tile.
error. other than predetermined value. 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
Clean the tile then mount it
and press OK.
2F82 ! Delivery guide of SP unit While the spectrophotometer up-down unit 1. Mount delivery guide.
is not mounted. Check if the upper detection sensor and 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
guide is mounted properly spectrophotometer top cover open/closed PCB.
and press OK. detection sensor are detecting, the interlock 3. Replace spectrophotometer up-
switch remains OFF. down unit upper detection sensor.
2F83 !Backing plate error in the No signal retuned from backing plate. 1. Clean the backing plate.
spectrophotometer unit. The signal from the backing plate is 2. Replace the spectrophotometer unit
Clean the backing plate. beyond threshold. PCB.
Install the backing plate to 3. Replace the spectrophotometer
the unit. Then press [OK]. sensor.
2F85 ! SP unit up and down cover Spectrophotometer top cover open/closed 1. Close spectrophotometer top cover.
is open. detection sensor won't respond. 2. Replace spectrophotometer top
Close it and press OK cover open/closed detection sensor.
PCB.
8-31
Chapter 8
Code
2F86 ! SP unit cover is open. Spectrophotometer cover open/closed 1. Close spectrophotometer cover.
Close it and then press OK. detection sensorwon't respond. 2. Replace cover sensor.
PCB.
2F87 ! Colorimetric readout error. When executing color measuring, the 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute spectrophotometer sensor returned a value 2. Change the patch size to large.
color measuring again. other than predetermined value was 3. Printer support (In case of printing
returned. failure).
4. Replace spectrophotometer sensor
2F88 ! Colorimetric readout error. When reading the positioning bar, a value 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute other than predetermined value was 2. Printer support (In case of printing
color measuring again. returned. failure).
3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor.
2F89 ! Colorimetric readout error. 1) No shifting amount detected from the 1. Operate paper feed adjustment.
Please press OK and execute positioning bar reading value. 2. Printer support (In case of printing
color measuring again 2) Position shifting exceeded the threshold failure).
value. 3. Replace spectrophotometer sensor
3) Skew exceeded the threshold value.
2F90 Detected 3V of abnormal power out from
the printhead.
(Latch up current flows at head logic and
temporarily the print head falls into
abnormal state ; it is possible to recover by
power on and off.)
2FA0 !It is recommended to clean Inform the calibration timing of the Calibrate the spectrophotometer
the white calibration board spectrophotometer sensor. sensor.
to prevent it from possible
dirt.
4001 ERROR E146-4001 ERROR E146-4001 Borderless/flow pre-ejection/mist recovery Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service count full target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
Initialize the parts counter for the
401A ERROR E602-401A HDD failure 1. Restart in service mode.
Call for service. Failed to read and write to and from the 2. Remove and install HDD
HDD. 3. Replace HDD. Switch on service
mode after the replacement.
401B ERROR E602-401B Poor HDD connection 1. Restart in service mode.
Call for service. The HDD and the HDD controller are not 2. Remove and install HDD
indefinable. 3. Replace HDD. Switch on service4.
Replace HDD controller or the main
controller PCB. Restart after the
replacement.
401C ERROR E198-401C ERROR E198-401C Faulty RTC 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service Any error other than the two errors 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
mentioned below has been detected while
initializing the RTC at startup.
401D ERROR E198-401D ERROR E198-401D RTC low battery error 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service A battery error has been detected while 2. Check the RTC battery.
initializing the RTC at startup. 3. Replace the main controller PCB.
401E ERROR E198-401E ERROR E198-401E RTC clock stop 1. Restart the printer in service mode.
Call for service. Call For Service The RTC has been detected idle while 2. Replace the main controller PCB.
initializing the RTC at startup.
4027 Hardware error. Power On Lift shift timeout error 1. Switch off the printer, then back on.
03130031-4027 Again A lift operation has been executed, but no 2. The carriage cannot travel to the lift
Turn off printer, Lift Motion sensor has been detected or a sensor has drive position.
wait, then Timeout remained detected. 3. The lift drive cam is not engaged.
turn on again. 4. Faulty lift drive sensor
5. Faulty lift drive motor
4034 ERROR E196-4034 ERROR E196-4034 Multisensor unit version error Replace the multisensor unit.
Call for service. Call For Service A different version of multisensor is
installed.
This would not occur in an ordinary user
environment.
4037 ERROR E173-4037 ERROR E173-4037 Linear scale error
Call for service. Call For Service No signal is available from the carriage
encoder when the printhead is driven.
403E ERROR E161-403E ERROR E161-403E Head abnormal temperature rise (printhead
Call for service. Call For Service 1 (R), or A model)
Either of the two Di sensors maintained for
each printhead chip (color-specific) has
been detected at 120 degrees C or higher or
-10 degrees C or lower.
403F ERROR E161-403F ERROR E161-403F Head abnormal temperature rise (printhead
Call for service. Call For Service 2 (L))
Either of the two Di sensors maintained for
each printhead chip (color-specific) has
been detected at 120 degrees C or higher or
-10 degrees C or lower.
8-32
Chapter 8
Code
4040 ERROR E196-4040 ERROR E196-4040 Checksum error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service The checksum of a file transmitted on the firmware.
execution of the firmware update is 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
unmatched. clear the error.
4041 ERROR E196-4041 ERROR E196-4041 Flash erase error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to erase flash ROM on execution of the firmware.
the firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4042 ERROR E196-4042 ERROR E196-4042 Flash write error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to write flash ROM on execution of the firmware.
the firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4042 Unknown file. MIT data transfer failure 1. Execute "Initialize Paper Type"
Check file format. Failed to write MIT data on its from the system settings. (Note: All
Turn off printer, transmission. paper information will be reset to its
wait a while, then factory defaults and additional Paper
turn it on again. deleted.)
2. Upgrade the firmware in download
mode.
4043 ERROR E196-4043 ERROR E196-4043 Firmware update failure error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Failed to allocate a work area on RAM on the firmware.
firmware update. 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
clear the error.
4044 ERROR E196-4044 ERROR E196-4044 EEPROM size error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service Size information about the firmware data the firmware.
transmitted on firmware update and the 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
size of actually transmitted data do not clear the error.
match. 3. Check the firmware transfer
environment (IF changes, PC).
4045 ERROR E196-4045 ERROR E196-4045 Engine EEPROM write error 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call For Service An EEPROM read/write failure has been the firmware.
detected in the engine portion of the 2. Restart the printer in service mode to
firmware. clear the error.
4046 ERROR E141-4046 ERROR E141-4046 Recovery part revolutions reaching 50,000 Check the parts counter and replace
Call for service. Call For Service cycles or more required parts.
Recovery part operations have reached a (Replacement of the parts coming to
predetermined count. the end of their useful lives is
recommended.)
Initialize the counter for the
replacement unit mounted.
The iPF5000/500/600 have a counter
problem fixed. Identify the firmware
version and start in download mode to
upgrade the firmware to Ver.1.13 or
later from any earlier release.
4047 ERROR E144-4047 ERROR E144-4047 Carriage count error Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service Supply part operations have reached a target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
predetermined count. Initialize the parts counter for the
4048 ERROR E144-4048 ERROR E144-4048 Non-discharging nozzles on initial filling
Call for service. Call For Service An unallowable number of non-
discharging nozzles have been detected at
the completion of initial filling.
4049 Unknown file. Cannot update Wrong transfer ROM data model 1. Restart the printer in service mode to
Check file format. firmware Files for a different model have been clear the error (this error won't occur
Turn off printer, Power On transferred on firmware update. when FUT is used).
wait a while, then Again 2. Start in download mode to upgrade
turn it on again. the firmware.
404A ERROR E194-404A ERROR E194-404A Non-ejection count error Check the parts counter and replace the
Call for service. Call For Service A non-ejection part operation counter has target unit or Refresh Service Kit.
reached a specified limit. Initialize the parts counter for the
404B ERROR E199-404B ERROR E199-404B Temperature/humidity sensor error 1. Restart the printer in service mode to
Call for service. Call For Service When temperature 0 and humidity 0% are clear the error.
detected, the detection mechanism is 2. Identify the firmware version and
considered failed and an error message is update the firmware to the last release
displayed. if it is earlier than Ver.1.31 (firmware
defect).
3. Remove and reinsert the
temperature/humidity sensor PCB
connector
4. Replace the temperature/humidity
sensor PCB.
8-33
Chapter 8
Code
404C ERROR E196-404C ERROR E196-404C Serial number information mismatch 1. Check to see if the correct PCB is
Call For Service A mismatch has been detected between the mounted, since a PCB of the wrong
Call for service. serial number information stored in the model may have been mistakenly
EEPROM on the main controller PCB and mounted during servicing.
that stored in the EEPROM on the MTC 2. Invoke service mode to implement
relay PCB at startup. PCB replacement.
404D ERROR E196-404D ERROR E196-404D Machine ID information mismatch 1. Check to see if the correct PCB is
Call For Service A mismatch has been detected between the mounted, since a PCB of the wrong
Call for service. model ID information stored in the model may have been mistakenly
EEPROM on the main controller PCB and mounted during servicing.
that stored in the EEPROM on the MTC 2. Invoke service mode to implement
relay PCB at startup. PCB replacement.
404E ERROR E196-404E ERROR E196-404E An EEPROM read/ write error has been 1. Start in download mode to upgrade
Call for service. Call for service. detected in the controller portion of the the firmware.
firmware. 2. Start in service mode to clear the
error.
404F ERROR E144-404F Pump revolutions full Clear the counter in service mode after
Call for service. The number of HP pre-ejection pump having replaced the HP pre-ejection
revolution has reached the defined value. tray unit.
4050 Error E161-4050 Error! Non-ejection detection error
Call for service. For E161-4050 The timing of "ink priming sequence" is
iPF6000, Call for service. fallowing.
03800500-4050. -At installation of a new model printer
-At reinstallation after the second
transportation.
-At replacement of the printhead
405A Error E602-405A Incorrect capacity HDD model is Replace HDD
Call for service. connected.
405B Error E602-405B Mismatched HDD model is connected. Replace HDD
Call for service.
4061 !The paper loaded askew. Postion ditection of askew loaded paper.
Remove the paper.
8-34
Oct 27 2018

iPF8400S Service Manual E-03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

iPF8400S Service Manual E-03

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

iPF8400S Service Manual E-03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

COPYRIGHT © 2018 CANON INC.

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

2.2 Firmware .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 5

4.1 Service Parts ..............................................................................................................................................4- 1

Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE

7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode .........................................................................................................................................7- 2

Chapter 8 ERROR CODE

1.1 Product Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Product Overview

1.1.1 Product Overview

[1] Upper Cover [12] Stand

- Media pass in widths up to 44 inches (1117.6 mm).

Functional enhancements new to this model include:

1.2.3 Ink Tank

The ink tanks are disposable.

1.2.4 Cutter Unit

The cutter unit that mounts on the carriage unit is disposable.

1.2.5 Roll Holder

[1] Stand [2] Stopper

1.2.7 Media Take-up Unit

Media take-up unit

Additional features of the media take-up unit include:

[1] Left media take-up unit [4] Media take-up unit

1.2.8 Hard Disk Drive

Saving print jobs will offer the following benefits:

- Reprinting after error occurrence

- Higher print work efficiency

1.3 Product Specifications

1.3.1 Product Specifications

Type Bubble jet large-sized paper printer (stand model)

Media size (Cut sheet) Width: 203mm (8") to 1118mm (44")

Detection functions (Ink passage Ink tank presence/absence detection: Yes

1.4 Detailed Specifications

1.4.1 Interface Specifications

1.5 Names and Functions of Components

1.5.3 Top Cover (Inside)

1.5.5 Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

1.6 Basic Operation

1.6.1 Operation Panel

[15] [1] [14] [8] [5] [2] [3]

[7] [6] [4]

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[2] Ink tab

[3] Job tab

1.6.3 Main Menu

b) Setting menu items

*1: Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On.

3. Main menu during printing

4. Main Menu Settings

Setting Item Description/Instructions